Johnson Controls Commercial Refrigeration

STT17A-610R	. . . . . . . . . R-151, R-152, R-154,	T28DB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-71
. . . . . . . . . .	. . . . . . . . . R-157, R-159, R-188	T28DD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-71
STT17A-611R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152, R-188	T28DG-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-71
STT17A-612R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152, R-188	T46ABH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-72
STT17A-613R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152, R-188	T46ADH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-72
STT17A-616R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160, R-188	T46JBH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-72
STT17A-617R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160, R-188	T46JDH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-72
STT18A . . . . .	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157	T46JEA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-72
STT18A-600R	. . . .R-151, R-152, R-157, R-188	T46SAA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-72
STT18A-601R	. . . .R-151, R-152, R-157, R-188	T46SAH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-72
STT18A-602R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152, R-188	T46SDA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-72
STT19A-600R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	T46SDH-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-72
STT19A-602R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	T-800-1605 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-80
STT19A-603R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	T-800-1606 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-80
STT19A-605R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	T-800-1618 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-80
STT19A-606R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	T-800-1620 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-80
STT19A-607R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147, R-148	T91BAA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-84
STT19A-608R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	T91BBA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-84
STT19A-609R	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	T91BCA-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-84
		TBG16A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-89

T22AAA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T22ABC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T22ABC-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T22BBC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T22CBC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T22CBC-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T22JAA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T22JCC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T22SDA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T22SEB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T22SFB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T22TFB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T23A-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-70

T23B-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-70

T25A-16C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T25A-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T26A-14C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T26A-15C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T26J-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T26J-9C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T26S-18C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T26T-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-68

T28BD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-71

T28CD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-71

T28DA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-71

TE-6000-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-220

TE-6001-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-220

TE-6001-11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-220

TE-631xx-x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-220

TE-68NT-0N00S . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-196, R-221

V248GB1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GB1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GC1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GC1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GD1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GD1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GE1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GE1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GF1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GF1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GK1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GL1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248GM1-001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V248HC1B001C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-181

V43AS-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-145, R-147

V43AS-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-145, R-147

V43AS-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147

V43AT-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-145, R-147

V43AT-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-145, R-147

Code Number Index

Code Number Index

V47AA-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AA-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AB-27C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AB-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AB-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AB-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AC-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AC-40C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AC-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AC-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AC-8C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AD-19C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AD-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AD-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AE-13C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AE-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AE-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AE-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AR-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AR-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AR-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AS-13C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AS-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AS-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AT-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47AT-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-157

V47NB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-159

V47NC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-159

V47NR-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-159

V48AB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AD-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AE-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AE-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AF-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AF-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AJ-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AL-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48AM-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

V48EK-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-160

VFD68BBB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68BCB-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68BDC-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68BFD-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68BGG-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68BHG-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68BJK-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68BKL-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68BLL-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68BMP-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68BNP-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68CDF-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68CFF-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68CGG-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68CHH-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68CJJ-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68CKL-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68CLL-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68CMP-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68CNP-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68DFM-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68DGM-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68DHM-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68DJN-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68DKN-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

VFD68DLN-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-143

WEL11A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . R-33, R-36, R-79,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80, R-196, R-220

WEL14A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80 WEL14A-602R . . . . . . R-19, R-21, R-25, R-37,

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-59, R-65, R-80 WEL14A-603R . . R-19, R-25, R-59, R-65, R-80

WEL16A-600R . . . . . . . R-25, R-35, R-62, R-80

WEL16A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-19, R-80

WEL17A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-80, R-157

WEL17A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .R-80, R-157

WEL17A-602R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80

WEL17A-604R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80

WEL18A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80

WEL18A-601R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-159

WEL18A-602R . . . . . . . . . . R-80, R-157, R-159

WGT11A-600R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-127

WGT11A-604R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-127

Code Number Index

WHA-C450-100C . . . . . . R-195, R-204, R-207,	Y63T31-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-190
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-208, R-210, R-213,	Y64T15-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-191
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-214, R-216, R-218	Y64T21-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-191
WHA-P400-100C . . . . . . . . . . . . R-112, R-113	Y64T22-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-191
WHA-P400-125C . . . . . . . . . . . . R-112, R-113	Y65A13-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-190
WHA-P400-250C . . . . . . . . . . . . R-112, R-113	Y65A21-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-190
WHA-P400-400C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-113	Y65F13-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-190
WHA-P400-430C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-112	Y65F42-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-190
WHA-PKD3-200C . . . . . . R-119, R-197, R-222	Y65G13-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-190
WHA-PKD3-400C . . . . . . R-119, R-197, R-222	Y65S13-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-190
WHA-PKD3-600C . . . . . . R-119, R-197, R-222	Y65T31-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-190
WZ-1000-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80	Y65T42-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-190
WZ-1000-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80	Y65T54-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-190
WZ-1000-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-80	Y66F12-0 Y66F13-0	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-191 R-191

Y63F22-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190

Y63T22-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-190

Y66T12-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-191

Y66T13-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-191

Y69T15-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-191

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927005

A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls

Description

A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls are available with single-pole, single-throw (SPST) or single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) contact action. Typical applications include the sensing of low temperature conditions to avoid over cooling or icing of hydronic coils, cooling coils, and liquid-handing pipes. The controls are compact and sturdy, and have an adjustable temperature setpoint range with a fixed differential. The range adjustment screw is accessible at the bottom of the control, and at the top of the control when the cover is removed.

The A11 Controls are compact and sturdy and feature an adjustable range with a fixed differential. The range adjustment screw is accessible at the bottom of the control or at the top, when the cover is removed. A factory-set low temperature stop is available when specified.

Refer to the A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125010) for important product application information.

Electrical Rating

Motor Rating	120 V	208 V	240 V
Motor Description	120 V	208 V	240 V
AC Full Load Amperes	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor Amperes	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive Amperes	16.0	9.2	8.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Selection Chart

Features

precision repeat accuracy remains unaffected by ambient temperature at the control diaphragm cup and 4 ft (1.2 m) capillary (20 ft [6.1 m] sensing bulb must be in the controlled area)
trip-free manual reset allows the lever to reset. You must press and release the lever before operation resumes.
precision snap-acting contacts in a dust protected enclosure enables the A11 Control to operate to the fullest potential
direct reading scale provides

easy-to-adjust setpoint. Adjustments can be made from the top or bottom of the control.

Repair Information

If the A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Control

Model	Description
A11A	SPST, open low, manual reset
A11B	SPST, open low, automatic recycle
A11D	SPDT, manual reset
A11E	SPDT, automatic recycle

( )

A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls Dimensions, in. (mm)

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

A11 Series Low Temperature Cutout Controls (Continued)

Technical Specifications

A11 Low Temperature Cutout Controls
Product Codes	A11A: SPST, open low, manual reset A11B: SPST, open low, automatic recycle A11D: SPDT, manual reset A11E: SPDT, automatic recycle
Range Cutout	35 to 45°F (2 to 7°C)
Differential	A11A and A11D: Temperature must be 12°F (6.7°C) above cutout point before control can be reset. A11B and A11E: 12°F (6.7°C)
Ambient Temperature	Minimum: 0°F (-18°C) Maximum: 140°F (60°C)
Maximum Temperature at Bulb	250°F (121°C)
Sensing Element	1/8 in. x 20 ft (3 mm x 6.1 m) or 1/8 in. x 40 ft (3 mm x 12.2 m)
Capillary Length	4 ft (1.2 m)
Switch	Snap-acting contacts in dust-protected enclosure
Material	Case: 0.6 (2 mm) cold rolled steel Cover: 0.3 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel
Finish	Galvanized steel
Conduit Opening	22 mm (9/10 in.) hole for 13 mm (1/2 in.) conduit
Mounting Bracket	Standard on all controls
Shipping Weight	Individual pack: 1.8 lb (0.8 kg) Overpack of 20 units: 38 lb (17 kg)
Electrical Rating	Pilot Duty: 125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC
Motor Ratings	AC Full Load Ampere: 120 V = 16.0 A, 208 V = 9.2 A, 240 V = 8.0 A AC Locked Rotor Ampere: 120 V = 96.0 A, 208 V = 55.2 A, 240 V = 48.0 A Non-Inductive Ampere: 120 V = 16.0 A, 208 V = 9.2 A, 240 V = 8.0 A
Compliance	United States	UL Listed, File SA516, SDFY
		FCC Compliant to CFR 47, Part 15 Subpart B, Class A
	Canada	UL Listed, CSA Class No. 1222 01, File LR948
		Industry Canada, ICES-003

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927010

A19 Series Remote Bulb Control

Description

The A19 Series Controls are single-stage temperature controls that incorporate environmentally friendly liquid-filled sensing elements.

Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.

Features

wide temperature ranges available
constant differential throughout the entire range
compact enclosure
fixed or adjustable differential available
variety of sensing element styles
unaffected by cross-ambient conditions

Applications

The A19 is suitable for temperature control in HVAC/R applications.

Selection Charts

A19 Series Remote Bulb Control1

A19 Series

Action on Increase of Temperature

a19.eps

A19 Series

Terminal Arrangement for Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)

A19ABC-24 Remote Bulb Control

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range °F (°C)	Differential F° (C°)	Bulb and Capillary	Bulb Well No. (Order Separately)	Range Adjuster	Max. Bulb Temp. °F (°C)
Adjustable Differential (Wide Range)
A19ABA-40C2	Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST) Open low	-30 to 100 (-34 to 38)	3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7)	3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft. capillary	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver Slot	140 (60)
A19ABC-4C	SPDT	50 to 130 (10 to 55)	3-1/2 to 14 (1.9 to 8)	3/8 in. x 5 in., 8 ft. capillary	WEL14A-603R	Knob	170 (77)
A19ABC-24C3	SPDT	-30 to 100 (-34 to 38)	3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7)	3/8 in. x 4 in., 8 ft. capillary	WEL14A-602R	Convertible	140 (60)
A19ABC-36C	SPDT	-30 to 100 (-34 to 38)	3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7)	3/8 in. x 4 in., 20 ft. capillary	WEL14A-602R	Convertible	140 (60)
A19ABC-37C	SPDT	-30 to 100 (-34 to 38)	3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7)	3/8 in. x 4 in., 10 ft. capillary	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver slot	140 (60)
A19ABC-74C	SPDT	-30 to 100 (-34 to 38)	3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7)	3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft. capillary	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver slot	140 (60)
Fixed Differential
A19AAF-12C	SPDT	25 to 225 (-4 to 107)	3-1/2 (1.9)	3/8 in. x 3 in., 10 ft. capillary	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver slot	275 (135)
Fixed Differential (Case Compensated)
A19AAC-4C	SPDT	0 to 80 (-18 to 27)	5 (2.8)	3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft. capillary	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver slot	140 (60)
A19AAD-12C	SPST Open low	-30 to 50 (-34 to 10)	2-1/2 (1.4)	3/8 in. x 4 in., 7 ft. capillary	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver slot	140 (60)
Fixed Differential (Close)
A19AAD-5C4	SPST Open low	30 to 50 (-1 to 10) (Bulk Milk Cooler)	2-1/2 (1.4)	3/8 in. x 2-5/8 in., 6 ft. capillary	WEL16A-601R	Screwdriver slot	190 (88)
A19AAF-20C	SPDT	-30 to 100 (-34 to 38)	2-1/2 (1.4)	3/8 in. x 4 in., 6 ft. capillary	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver slot	140 (60)
A19AAF-21C	SPDT	40 to 90 (4 to 32)	1-1/2 (0.8)	3/8 in. x 5-3/4 in., 6 ft. capillary	WEL14A-603R	Screwdriver slot	140 (60)
Manual Reset
A19ACA-14C	SPST Open low	-30 to 100 (-34 to 38)	Manual reset	3/8 in. x 4 in. 6 ft capillary	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver slot	140 (60)
A19ACA-15C	SPST Open low	-30 to 100 (-34 to 38)	Manual reset	3/8 in. x 4 in. 10 ft capillary	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver slot	140 (60)
A19ADB-1C	SPST Open high	100 to 240 (38 to 116)	Manual reset	3/8 in. x 3-1/2 in. 6 ft capillary	WEL14A-602R	Knob	290 (143)
A19ADB-38C	SPST Open high	100 to 240 (38 to 116)	Manual reset	3/8 in. x 4 in. 6 ft capillary	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver slot	290 (143)

Specify the control model code number, packing nut code number (if required), and bulb well code number (if required).
Replaces White-Rodgers® 1609-101

3. Replaces White-Rodgers 1609-12, -13; Ranco® 010-1408, -1409, – 1410, -1490, 060-110; Honeywell® L6018C-1006, L6021A-1005, T675A-1011, -1508, -1516,

-1821, T4301A-1008, T6031A-1011, T6031A-1029

4. Case-Compensated

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

A19 Series Remote Bulb Control (Continued)

Replacement Parts

Product Code Number	Description
CVR28A-617R	Concealed adjustment cover
CVR28A-618R	Visible scale cover
KNB20A-602R	Replacement Knob Kit

Accessories

A packing nut is available for closed tank application. Specify the code number FTG13A-600R.

Bulb wells (WEL14A Series) are available for liquid immersion applications. See the selection chart or the Bulb Wells Catalog Page (LIT-1922135).

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
Wide Range – Adjustable Differential
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive A1	22 A, 120 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC
Fixed Differential and Close Differential
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18.0
Non-Inductive A	10 A, 24 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC
Case Compensated – Fixed Differential A19AAC-4
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive A1	22 A, 120 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC
A19AAD-12
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18.0
Non-Inductive A	10 A, 24 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC
Manual Reset
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

1. SPST and N.O. contact of SPDT control;

SPDT N.C. contact- 16 amperes 120 to 277 VAC

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927015

A19 Series High Range Temperature Control

Description

The A19 Series Controls are single-stage temperature controls that incorporate liquid-filled sensing elements.

Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.

Features

wide temperature ranges available
constant differential throughout the entire range
single-pole, single-throw (SPST) or single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) snap-acting switches
fixed or adjustable differential available
unaffected by barometric pressure changes
unaffected by cross-ambient conditions
compact enclosure
variety of sensing element styles

Applications

The A19s are suitable for temperature control in HVAC/R applications.

Selection Charts

A19 Series High Range Temperature Control

A19 Series

Action on Increase of Temperature

a19.eps

A19 Series

Terminal Arrangement for SPDT

A19AAB Temperature Control

Product Code Number1	Switch Action	Range °F (°C)	Diff F° (C°) (Factory Set)	Bulb and Capillary	Bulb Well No. (Order Separately)	Range Adjuster	Max Bulb Temp °F (°C)
A19AAB-4C	SPST, open high Remote Bulb Thermostat	30 to 110 (-1 to 43)	3-1/2 (1.9)	3/8 in. x 5 in. copper 6 ft. capillary2	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver slot Visible scale	140 (60)
A19AAB-7C	SPST, open high Oven Thermostat	100 to 300 (38 to 149)	7 (3.9)	3/16 in. x 9-1/2 in. copper 6 ft. capillary	–	Knob Visible scale	350 (177)
A19AAB-10C	SPST, open high Oven Thermostat	200 to 550 (93 to 288)	10 (5.6)	3/16 in. x 6 in. copper 8 ft. capillary	–	Convertible	620 (327)
A19AAC-9C	SPDT	100 to 240 (38 to 116)	6 (3.3)	3/8 in. x 3-1/2 in. copper 6 ft. capillary2	WEL14A-602R	Screwdriver slot Visible Scale	290 (143)
A19ABB-2C	SPST, open high Remote Bulb Thermostat	50 to 200 (10 to 93)	Adjustable 6 to 24 (3 to 13)	0.290 in. x 2-1/2 in. copper 10 ft. capillary	–	Knob Visible Scale	240 (116)
A19ABB-7C	SPST, open high Remote Bulb Thermostat	50 to 201 (10 to 94)	Adjustable 6 to 24 (3 to 13)	7 x 64 mm copper 3m capillary	–	Knob Visible Scale	240 (116)

Specify code number, and closed tank fitting (Code Number FTG13A-600R), or bulb well, if required.
With 3-inch bulb support

Replacement Parts

Product Code Number	Description
CVR28A-617R	Concealed adjustment cover
CVR28A-618R	Visible scale cover
KNB20A-602R	Replacement knob kit

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive A1	22 A, 120 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

1. SPST and N.O. contact of SPDT control SPDT N.C. contact – 16 A, 120 to 277 VAC

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927020

A19 Series Thermostat for Crop Drying

Description

The A19 Series are single-stage temperature controls that incorporate liquid-filled sensing elements.

Refer to the A19 Series Utility Thermostats for Farm, Industrial, and Commercial Use Product Bulletin (LIT-125030) for important product application information.

Technical Specifications

The maximum bulb temperature for the A19AAE-3 is 200°F (93°C) and for the A19ABB-2 is 240°F (116°C).

Electrical Rating 120 VAC

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
A19AAE-3
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18.0
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	10 A 120 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC
A19ABB-2
AC Full Load A	10.0	–	6.0
AC Locked Rotor A	60.0	–	36.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

Features

designed for high temperature applications
narrow (2F° fixed) or wide adjustable differentials

Applications

Crop drying thermostat energizes gas valve to maintain temperature.

Repair Information

If the A19 Series Thermostat for Crop Drying fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

A19AAE-3 Thermostat

Product

Code Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F°(C°)

Bulb and

Capillary

Range

Adjuster

Max. Bulb

Temperature

°F (°C)

A19AAE-3C

Single-Pole,

Single-Throw (SPST) open high

80 to 180

(27 to 82)

2 (1.1) fixed

1/8 in. x 1-1/4 in.

copper-coiled 10 ft capillary

Knob

Ext. scale

200 (93)

A19ABB-2C

SPST open high

50 to 200

(10 to 93)

6 to 24

(3 to 13)

adjustable

0.290 in. x 2-1/2 in.

10 ft. capillary

Knob

Ext. Scale

240 (116)

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927030

A19 Series Hot Water Temperature Control (Well Immersion)

Description

The A19 Series Temperature Controls are a universal replacement control for open high or single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) applications. The control is furnished with a well assembly for 1/2 in. tapping.

Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.

Features

liquid-filled element provides rapid response to temperature change
adjustable differential
universal replacement

Applications

This operating control is ideal for hot water boilers.

Selection Charts

A19 Series Hot Water Temperature Control (Well Immersion)

A19ABC-11

Temperature Control

A19ABC-12 Temperature Control

Product Code Number	Application	Switch Action	Range °F (°C)	Differential F° (C°)	Well Connector Size–NPT	Range Adjuster	Max. Bulb Temp. °F (°C)
A19ABC-11C	Open high (R-B) Open low (R-Y)	Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)	100 to 240 (38 to 116)	6 to 24 (3 to 13)	1/2 in.	Convertible	250 (121)
A19ABC-12C	Open high (R-B) Open low (R-Y)	Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)	100 to 240 (38 to 116)	6 to 24 (3 to 13)	1/2 in.; 8 ft. capillary	Convertible	290 (143)
A19ADB-2C	High temperature lockout	Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST) Open high with lockout	100 to 240 (38 to 116)	Manual reset (locks out high)	1/2 in.	Knob	250 (121)

Replacement Parts

Product Code Number	Description
CVR28A-617R	Concealed adjustment cover
CVR28A-618R	Visible scale cover
KNB20A-602R	Knob kit

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	240
AC Full Load A	10.0	6.0
AC Locked Rotor A	60.0	36.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927035

A19 Temperature Control Less Enclosure (SPDT, Close Differential)

Description

The A19 Temperature Control Less Enclosure is an open-type temperature control for mounting in cases or enclosures.

Refer to the A19 Series Temperature Controls Less Enclosure Product Bulletin (LIT-125045) for important product application information.

Features

This control is designed with single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) contacts for open high or open low applications.

Applications

Use for panel-mounted temperature control for a packaged terminal air conditioner or for

self-contained HVAC equipment.

Selection Charts

A19 Series

Action on Increase of Temperature

a19.eps

A19 Series

Terminal Arrangement for SPDT

A19AGF-31 Temperature Control

A19 Temperature Control Less Enclosure (SPDT, Close Differential) Replacement Parts

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range °F (°C)	Differential F° (C°)	Bulb and Capillary	Range Adjuster	Maximum Bulb Temp. °F (°C)	Product Code Number	Description
							CVR28A-617R	Concealed adjustment
							CVR28A-618R	Visible scale
A19AGF-31C	Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)	40 to 90 (4 to 32)	1-1/2 (0.8)	3/8 x 5 in.; 5 ft. capillary	Shaft	140 (60)	KNB20A-602R	Knob Kit

Technical Specifications Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18
Non-Inductive	10 A, 120 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

back mounting
knob supplied by the customer

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927045

A19 Series Thermostat for Hazardous Locations

Description

The A19 Series Thermostat provides remote bulb or coiled bulb sensing for hazardous environments.

Refer to the Types A19AUC, A19BUC Fixed Differential Thermostat For Hazardous Location Product Bulletin (LIT-121035) for important product application information.

Features

precision enclosed switch and a liquid-filled sensing element provides repeat accuracy that is unaffected by barometric pressure and cross-ambient temperature fluctuations
single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switch provides open high or close high action for heating or cooling
electrical rating permits direct control of most equipment

Selection Chart

Applications

These thermostats are designed for use in grain elevators, chemical and powder plants, mines, oil refineries, and similar sites. For use in Class I, Group D and Class II, Groups E, F, and G hazardous locations.

Repair Information

If the A19 Series Thermostat for Hazardous Locations fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277
Full Load Amperes	16.0	9.2	8.0	–
Locked Rotor Amperes	96.0	55.2	48.0	–
Non-Inductive Amperes	22.0	22.0	22.0	22.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

A19AUC

Thermostat

A19BUC

Thermostat

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range °F (°C)	Differential F° (C°)	Bulb and Capillary	Bulb well (if required)	Range Adjuster	Maximum Bulb Temp. °F (°C)
A19AUC-1C	SPDT	-30 to 50 (-34 to 10)	5 (2.8)	3/8 in. x 4-1/16 in., 6 ft. capillary	WEL14A-602R	Knob	140 (60)
A19AUC-2C		20 to 80 (-7 to 27)	3-1/2 (1.9)	3/8 in. x 4-31/32 in., 6 ft. capillary	WEL14A-603R		140 (60)
A19AUC-3C		0 to 150 (-18 to 66)	6 (3)	3/10 x 2-1/2 in., 10 ft. capillary	WEL16A-600R		190 (88)
A19AUC-4C		100 to 250 (38 to 121)	6 (3)	3/10 x 2-3/8 in., 10 ft. capillary	WEL16A-600R		290 (143)
A19BUC-2C		20 to 80 (-7 to 27)	3-1/2 (1.9)	Coiled	–		140 (60)

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927050

A19 Series Coiled Bulb Space Thermostat

Description

The A19 Series Thermostat is a wide range temperature control with air coil sensing element.

Refer to the A19 Series Utility Thermostats for Farm, Industrial, and Commercial Use Product Bulletin (LIT-125030) for important product application information.

Features

wide temperature range
NEMA 1 enclosure

Applications

Use for return air or space temperature sensing.

Selection Charts

A19 Series Coiled Bulb Space Thermostat

A19 Series

Action on Increase of Temperature

a19.eps

A19 Series

Terminal Arrangement for SPDT

A19BAC Thermostat

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
A19BAB, A19BAC
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A1 (Not Lamp Loads)	22 A, 120 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC
A19BAF
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18.0
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	10 A, 120 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC
Cooling – A19BBC
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A1 (Not Lamp Loads)	22 A, 120 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

Product

Code Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F° (C°)

Bulb and

Capillary

Range

Adjuster

Maximum

Bulb Temp

°F (°C)

Ventilating, Heating

A19BAB-3C

Single-Pole,

Single-Throw (SPST),

open high

35 to 95

(0 to 35)

3 (1.7) fixed

1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in.

coiled

Knob

140 (60)

A19BAC-1C

Single-Pole,

Double-Throw (SPDT)

30 to 110

(-1 to 43)

3-1/2 (1.9)

fixed

1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in.

coiled

Convertible

A19BAF-1C

SPDT

30 to 110

(-1 to 43)

1-1/2 (0.9)

fixed

1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in.

coiled

Knob

Cooling

A19BBC-2C 1

SPDT

-30 to 100

(-34 to 38)

3 to 12

(1.7 to 7)

1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in.

coiled

Convertible

140 (60)

1. Replaces White-Rodgers® 201-16, -8, 2A37-1; Ranco® 010-1418, -1802, 016-594, C30-C1101; Honeywell® T631A, T696A, T6054 A1005.

Replacement Parts

Product Code Number	Description
CVR28A-617R	Concealed adjustment cover
CVR28A-618R	Visible scale cover
KNB20A-602R	Knob kit

1. SPST and only one side of SPDT control; SPDT – 16 A 120 to 277 VAC

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927055

Description

A19 Thermostat for Portable Heaters (Chain Mount and Drop Cord Electrical Connection)

Applications

The A19 Series Thermostat is a sturdy compact thermostat designed especially for temporary installations.

Refer to the Type A19BAG Thermostat for Portable Heaters with Thermostat Extension Cord and Beaded Chain Hanger Product Bulletin (LIT-121040) for important product application information.

Features

6-foot extension cord with piggyback style plug
NEMA 1 enclosure
chain mount

Selection Chart

on/off control of portable space heaters
agriculture

Repair Information

If the A19 Thermostat for Portable Heater fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120
AC Full Load A	15
AC Locked Rotor A	90

A19BAG-1 Thermostat

Product Code

Number

Switch Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F° (C°)

Maximum Bulb

Temperature °F (°C)

A19BAG-1C

Single-Pole,

Single-Throw (SPST) open high No-Heat position

35 to 95

(2 to 35)

3 (1.7)

Non-adjustable

140 (60)

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1900402

A19 Thermostat for Portable Cooling Applications (Chain Mount and Drop Cord Electrical Connection)

Description

The A19 Series Thermostat is a sturdy compact thermostat designed especially for temporary installations.

Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.

Features

6-foot extension cord with piggyback style plug
NEMA 1 enclosure
chain mount
remote sensing bulb with 6 ft (1.8 m) capillary tube

Selection Chart

Applications

on/off control of portable cooling applications
home brewing

Repair Information

If the A19 Thermostat for Portable Cooling Applications (Chain Mount and Drop Cord Electrical Connections) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120
AC Full Load Amperes	15
AC Locked Rotor Amperes	90

A19AAT-2 Thermostat

Product

Code Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F° (C°)

Maximum Bulb

Temperature

°F (°C)

A19AAT-2C

Single-Pole, Single-Throw

(SPST)

open low

20 to 80 (-7 to 27)

3-1/2 ± 2 (2 ± 1.11)

Non-adjustable

140 (60)

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927060

A19 Series Automatic Changeover with Strap-On Mounting

Description

The A19 Series Changeover is a control for use with combination heating and cooling thermostats.

Refer to the A19CAC Type Automatic Changeover Control Product Bulletin

(LIT-125065) for important product application information.

Features

This control automatically selects the correct thermostat function.

Applications

Recommended for convectors, fan coils, and blast coil units, and similar devices. The A19CAC-2 Control can be mounted directly on either a vertical or a horizontal pipe, using the can mounting strap supplied with control. The A19CAC-1 Control has a remote bulb for greater mounting convenience.

Selection Charts

A19 Series

Action on Increase of Temperature

a19.eps

A19 Series

Terminal Arrangement for SPDT

A19CAC-1 Control (Remote Bulb Model)

Technical Specifications

A19 Series Automatic Changeover with Strap-on Mounting

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Range °F (°C)

Differential F°(C°)

Mounting

A19CAC-1C

Single-Pole,

Double-Throw (SPDT)

60 to 90 (16 to 32)

10 (5.6)

42 in. Capillary

A19CAC-2C

SPDT

60 to 90 (16 to 32)

10 (5.6)

Direct

Replacement Parts

maximum case ambient temperature: 131°F (55°C)
maximum bulb temperature: 250°F (121°C)

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	240
AC Full Load A	10.0	6.0
AC Locked Rotor A	60.0	36.0
AC Non-Inductive A	10.0	6.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 240 VAC

Product Code Number	Description
CVR28A-617R	Concealed adjustment cover

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927065

A19D Series Surface Mounted Temperature Controls

Description

The A19D Series Surface Mounted Temperature Controls are reliable, durable On/Off temperature controls with line-voltage single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switches. The A19D Series Controls are designed primarily for fluid piping applications and include two adjustable mounting straps for mounting the control directly to a pipe.

Refer to the A19D Series Surface Mounted Temperature Controls Product Bulletin

(LIT-125070) for important product application information.

Features

SPDT switch action provides either high or low temperature detection.
sealed, dust-protected switch provides reliable and durable On/Off control for commercial and industrial applications.
color-coded electrical terminals simplify wiring the controls.
sensing element insulated from the control case minimizes the effects of ambient temperature on the control setpoint.

Selection Chart

convertible range adjuster kit provides knob, screwdriver, or concealed adjustment options.
multi-position mounting capability allows you to mount the control in any position on horizontal, vertical, or angled pipes.
NEMA 1 enclosure provides protection against contact with the control’s electrical components and protects the switch and electrical terminals from incidental contact.

Applications

Typical A19D control applications include high temperature detection on boiler applications and low temperature detection on unit heaters coil applications.

SPDT Switch

Switch Action 6

At Setpoint Y-R is open

B-R is closed

On Increase Y-R closes B-R opens

A19D Series Control Switch Action

FIG:6SPDT_chngHI

A19D Series Temperature Control

Repair Information

If the A19D Series Surface Mounted Temperature Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Product Code Number	Description
A19DAC-1C	100 to 240°F Temperature Range and Scale, 10 F° (± 2.8 F°) Differential, Visible Range Scale
A19DAC-9C	40 to 120°C Temperature Range and Scale, 6 C° (± 1.0 C°) Differential, Visible Range Scale
A19DAC-10C	40 to 120°C Temperature Range and Scale, 6 C° (± 1.0 C°) Differential, Concealed Range Scale
A19DAC-12C	100 to 240°F Temperature Range and Scale, 10 F° (± 2.8 F°) Differential, Concealed Range Scale
A19DAF-2C	200 to 240°F Temperature Range and Scale, 3-1/2 F° (± 2.0 F°) Differential, Concealed Range Scale

Technical Specifications

A19D Series Surface Mount Temperature Controls
Product Code Number	A19DAC: SPDT switch, standard differential A19DAF: SPDT switch, narrow differential
Adjustable Temperature Range	A19DAC: 100 to 240°F or 40 to 120°C A19DAF: 200 to 240°F (95 to 120°C)
Fixed Temperature Differential	A19DAC: 10 F° or 6.0 C° A19DAF: 3-1/2 F° (1.9 C°)
Maximum Ambient Operating Temperature	Controller Housing: 140°F (60°C) Sensor Element: 250°F (121°C)
Switch Contact Action	SPDT, Snap Acting, Enclosed Dust Protected Pennswitch Red to Yellow Terminal Contacts Close on Temperature Increase Red to Blue Terminal Contacts Open on Temperature Increase
Terminal Screws	No. 8-32 x 1/4 in. Binder Head with Cup Washers
Electrical Ratings	Motor Rating VAC	A19DAC: Standard Differential 120 240	A19DAF: Narrow Differential 120 240
	Full Load Amperes Locked Rotor Amperes Non-Inductive Amperes Pilot Duty	10.0 6.0 60.0 36.0 10.0 6.0 125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC	6.0 3.4 36.0 20.4 6.0 3.4 125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC
Enclosure	NEMA Type 1 General Purpose; Cold Rolled Steel, Gray Baked Enamel
Mounting	Clamp-On (Straps Included)
Shipping Weight	1-1/5 lb (.54 kg)
Compliance	UL Guide No. XAPX, File E6688 CSA Class No. 4813 02, File LR948 C-Tick

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927070

A19 Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat

Description

The A19 Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat is a wide-range temperature control with a special air coil sensing element and an adjustable mounting flange.

Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.

Features

single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) snap-action switch
unaffected by barometric pressure or cross-ambient temperatures
flat flange mounting with the coil element permits positioning the sensing bulb in the appropriate portion of the air stream

Selection Charts

A19 Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat

Applications

These duct thermostats are used on rooftop units, make-up heaters, duct heaters, and air handling systems of all types.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18.0
Non-Inductive	10 A, 120 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

A19EAF Thermostat

Product Code

Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F° (C°)

Maximum Bulb

Temperature °F (°C)

A19EAF-1C

SPDT

60 to 130 (16 to 54)

2 (1.1)

200 (93)

A19EAF-2C

SPDT

30 to 110 (-1 to 43)

2 (1.1)

140 (60)

Replacement Parts

Product Code Number	Description
CVR28A-618R	Visible scale cover

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927075

A19 Series Fan or Cutout Control (Liquid Expansion Bulb)

Description

The A19 Series Fan or Cutout Control is a wide range temperature control with adjustable dial stops and mounting flange.

Refer to the A19E Series Warm Air Fan and Duct Controls Low or Line Voltage Product Bulletin (LIT-125075) for important product application information.

Features

liquid charged element for fast response
may be mounted in any position

Applications

This control is designed for low or line voltage applications including warm air or furnace fan control.

Selection Chart

A19 Series Fan or Cutout Control (Liquid Expansion Bulb)

A19EBA, A19EBB, A19EBC

A19EDB Cutout Controls (A19EDB not for use as cutout control)

Product Code

Number

Application

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential F° (C°)

Adjustable Stop °F (°C)

Bulb

Length

Maximum Bulb

Temperature °F (°C)

Min

Max

Min

Max

A19EBA-1C

Furnace Fan

Control

Close high

Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST)

50 to 250

(10 to 121)

(5)

(20)

145

(63)

250

(121)

6 in.

290

(143)

A19EBB-1C

Warm Air

Open high SPST

100 to 350

(38 to 177)

(5)

(20)

240

(116)

350

(177)

6 in.

375

(191)

A19EBC-1C

Counter-Flow Warm Air Furnace

Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)

100 to 350

(38 to 177)

(5)

(20)

240

(116)

350

(177)

6 in.

375

(191)

A19EDB-1C1

Warm Air With Lock Out

Open high SPST

100 to 350

(38 to 177)

Manual Reset

240

(116)

350

(177)

6 in.

375

(191)

1. A19EDB-1 not for use as a limit control.

Replacement Parts

Product Code Number	Description
CVR28A-618R	Visible scale cover

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277
A19EBA, A19EBB
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	–
AC Non-Inductive A	22.0	22.0	22.0	22.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC
A19EBC
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	–
AC Non-Inductive A	16.0	16.0	16.0	16.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC
A19EDB
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	–
AC Non-Inductive A	22.0	22.0	22.0	16.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927040

A19 Temperature Control with Rainproof Enclosure

Description

The A19 Temperature Control is a remote bulb temperature control with a rainproof (NEMA Type 3R) enclosure.

Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.

Features

This control has a rainproof gasketed enclosure.

Selection Chart

Applications

Use for control of cooling tower sump heaters.

Repair Information

If the A19 Temperature Control with Rainproof Enclosure fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

A19ANC-1 Temperature Control

Product

Code Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Diff.

F° (C°)

Bulb and

Capillary

Bulb Well No.

(Order Separately)

Range

Adjuster

Max.

Bulb Temp.

°F (°C)

A19ANC-1C

Single-Pole,

Double-Throw (SPDT)

0 to 150

(-18 to 66)

5 (2.8)

fixed

3/10 x 2-1/2 in.

10 ft. capillary

WEL11A-601R

Screwdriver

slot

190 (88)

Technical Specifications

maximum bulb temperature: 190°F (88°C)
maximum ambient temperature: 140°F (60°C)

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC		120	208	240	277
AC Full Load A		16.0	9.2	8.0	—
AC Locked Rotor A		96.0	55.2	48.0	—
Non-Inductive A	When connected Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST)	22.0	22.0	22.0	22.0
Non-Inductive A	When connected SPDT	16.0	9.2	8.0	6.9
Pilot Duty		125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927080

A19 Agricultural/Industrial Thermostat with NEMA 4X Enclosure

Description

The A19PRC is a single-stage temperature control designed for heating and ventilation applications. It features a raintight enclosure for use in agricultural and industrial applications that require compliance with Article 547 of the National Electrical Code. The A19PRC Thermostat has a rugged thermoplastic enclosure that meets NEMA 4X specifications.

Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.

Features

an O-ring sealed setpoint adjustment knob
exposed portion of the liquid filled sensing elements are plated and plastic coated to resist damage in corrosive atmospheres

Selection Chart

Applications

Typical applications include controlling ventilation or heating equipment in animal confinement or industrial buildings.

Repair Information

If the A19 Agricultural/Industrial Thermostat with NEMA 4X Enclosure fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)1	22 A, 120/277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

1. Single-pole, single-throw (SPST) and only one side of single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) control; SPDT – 16 A, 120 to 277 VAC

A19PRC Thermostat

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range °F (°C)	Differential F° (C°)	Bulb and Capillary	Range Adjuster
A19PRC-1C	SPDT	30 to 110 (1 to 43)	3 to 12 (1.7 to 6.7)	1-3/8 in. x 2 -1/4 in. Coiled	Knob

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927085

A19 Industrial Thermostat (Watertight and Dusttight)

Description

The A19 Industrial Thermostat is a wide range temperature control with rainproof enclosure, single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switch, and 5F° fixed differential.

Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.

Features

rugged steel enclosure
liquid filled sensing element (provides uniform control)

Applications

Use for refrigeration, air conditioning, and heating applications that require a NEMA 4 watertight and dusttight enclosure.

Accessories

Order code number WEL16A-600R bulb well, if required.

Repair Information

If the A19 Industrial Thermostat (Watertight and Dusttight) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	16.0	9.2	8.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

Selection Chart

Product

Code Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F° (C°)

Bulb and

Capillary

Bulb Well No.

(Order Separately)

Range

Adjuster

A19KNC-1C

SPDT

0 to 150

(-15 to 65)

5 (2.8) fixed

3/10 x 2-1/2 in.

10 ft. capillary

WEL16A-600R

Knob

A19KNC-1 Thermostat

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1900403

A19 Temperature Control with NEMA 4X Enclosure (Remote Bulb)

Description

The A19 Temperature Control is a remote bulb temperature control with a watertight NEMA 4X enclosure.

Refer to the A19 Series Hot Water Heating Controls Well Immersion Product Bulletin (LIT-125025) for important product application information.

Applications

cooling tower sump heaters
control of heating or ventilating equipment

Technical Specifications

Maximum ambient temperature: 140°F (60°C).

Electrical Ratings

Features

watertight gasketed thermoplastic enclosure that meets NEMA 4X specifications
concealed setpoint adjustment

Repair Information

If the A19 Temperature Control with NEMA 4X Enclosure (Remote Bulb) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

A19QSC Temperature Control

Motor Ratings VAC		120	208	240	277
AC Full Load Amperes		16.0	9.2	8.0	—
AC Locked Rotor Amperes		96.0	55.2	48.0	—
Non-Inductive Amperes	When connected Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST)	22.0	22.0	22.0	22.0
Non-Inductive Amperes	When connected Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)	16.0	9.2	8.0	6.9
Pilot Duty		125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range °F (°C)	Differential F° (C°)	Bulb and Capillary	Bulb Well No. (Order Separately)	Range Adjuster	Maximum Bulb Temperature °F (°C)
A19QSC-1C	SPDT	0 to 150 (-18 to 66)	5±2 (2.82 ±1.11) fixed	3/10 x 2-1/2 in.; 10 ft. capillary	WEL11A-601R	Concealed screwdriver slot	190 (88)
A19QSC-2C		100 to 250 (38 to 121)	6±2 (32 ±1.11) fixed	3/10 x 2-3/8 in.; 10 ft capillary	WEL11A-601R		290 (143)
A19QSC-3C		200 to 350 (93 to 176)	5±2 (2.82 ±1.11) fixed	3/10 x 2-1/4 in.; 10 ft capillary	—		390 (199)
A19QSC-4C		0 to 190 (-18 to 88)	5±2 (2.82 ±1.11) fixed	3/10 x 2-1/2 in.; 20 ft capillary	WEL11A-601R		190 (88)

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927090

A19 Water Chiller Control with Locked Cut-Out/Adjustable Cut-In

Description

The A19 Water Chiller Control is a remote bulb temperature control with limited setpoint range, adjustable differential, and adjustable cut-out.

Refer to the A19ZBA Type Temperature Control Product Bulletin (LIT-121065) for important product application information.

Features

adjustable cut-out (38 to 47°F)
wide differential adjustment range

Accessories

includes Code No. FTG13A-600R Packing Nut as standard
replacement cover: CVR61A-600R

Selection Chart

Applications

Use for water chillers.

Repair Information

If the A19 Water Chiller Control with Locked Cut-Out/Adjustable Cut-In fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Maximum bulb temperature is 140°F (60°C).

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	16.0	9.2	8.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

A19ZBA Water Chiller Control

Product Code

Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F° (C°)

Bulb and

Capillary

Bulb Well No.

(Order Separately)

Range

Adjuster

A19ZBA-1C

Single-Pole, Single-Throw

(SPST)

Close high, open low

38 to 80 (3 to 27)

8 to 40 (4 to 22)

Adjustable

3/8 in. x 3-7/16 in.

6 ft. capillary

WEL14A-602R

Knob

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927095

A19 Defrost Duration and Fan Delay Control

Description

The A19 Defrost Duration and Fan Delay Control is a remote bulb control with adjustable defrost termination temperature and preset fan delay temperature.

Refer to the A19ZBC Type Temperature Control Product Bulletin (LIT-121071) for important product application information.

Features

sensing element unaffected by barometer pressure and cross ambient temperature problems
limited adjustment range

Applications

Use for defrost termination control for refrigerated display cases.

Selection Chart

Repair Information

If the A19 Defrost Duration and Fan Delay Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

maximum bulb temperature: 140°F (60°C)
fan delay temperature: factory set at 25°F (-4°C)

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	16.0	9.2	8.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

A19ZBC-2 Defrost Duration and Fan Delay Control

Product Code

Number

Switch

Action

Defrost Termination

°F (°C)

Bulb and

Capillary

Range

Adjuster

A19ZBC-2C

Single-Pole,

Double-Throw (SPDT)

45 to 85 (7 to 29)

19/64 in. x 3-1/8 in.; 6 ft. capillary

Knob

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927105

A25 Series Warm Air Limit Control with Manual Reset

Description

The A25 Warm Air Control Locks out on a temperature increase to the control setpoint. Manual reset is required before the electrical contacts can be reclosed.

The A25 Control is normally located in a return air duct and is wired to shut down air conditioning or ventilating fans when the temperature of the air becomes excessively hot.

Refer to the A25 Series Warm Air Control with Manual Reset Product Bulletin (LIT-125118) for important product application information.

Applications

Use for high temperature cut-out.

Features

A25 Series

Action on Increase of Temperature

a25.eps

A25 Series Action Diagram

A25AN-1 Warm Air Limit Control

Technical Specifications

A25AP-1 Warm Air Limit Control

trip-free reset lever does not permit restarting until the reset lever is manually released
the rod and tube type sensing element provides positive control action

Repair Information

If the A25 Series Warm Air Limit Control with Manual Reset fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

The maximum element temperature is 300°F (149°C).

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	–
Non-Inductive A	16.0 A at 120/277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC

Product Code

Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Range

Adjuster

Dial Stop

°F (°C)

A25AN-1C

Single-Pole,

Single-Throw (SPST),

Open high

25 to 215

(-4 to 102)

Knob

High limit

set at 125 (52)

A25CN-1C

Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)

25 to 215

(-4 to 102)

Knob

High limit

set at 125 (52)

Factory Mutual Approved Models

A25AP-1C

SPST

Open high

25 to 215

(-4 to 102)

Concealed

screwdriver slot

High limit

set at 125 (52)

A25CP-1C

SPDT

25 to 215

(-4 to 102)

Concealed screwdriver slot

High limit

set at 125 (52)

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927140

A70 Series Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Temperature Control

Description

The A70 Series Temperature Control incorporates a vapor-charged sensing element. The A70G, A70H, and A70K have a four-wire, two-circuit contact block that contains two isolated sets of contacts.

The contacts are designed so that when the main contact opens, the auxiliary contact closes.

Refer to the A70, A72 Series Temperature Controls for Refrigeration and Heating Product Bulletin (LIT-125155) for important product application information.

Features

long-life, snap-acting contacts
automatic or manual reset models

Applications

Typical applications include energizing an indicator light after a low temperature cutout on a ventilating system.

Selection Charts

A70 Series

Action on Increase on Temperature

Li ne 2

Li ne 1

a70s.eps

A70 Series Action Diagram A70GA-1 Temperature Control

A70 Series Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Temperature Control

Product Code Number	Switch Action		Range °F (°C)	Differential F° (C°)	Bulb and Capillary	Maximum Bulb Temperature °F (°C)	Range Adjuster
Product Code Number	Main Contacts	Auxiliary Contacts	Range °F (°C)	Differential F° (C°)	Bulb and Capillary	Maximum Bulb Temperature °F (°C)	Range Adjuster
A70GA-1C1	Open low	Close low	15 to 55 (-9.4 to 12.8)	5 (2.8)	20 ft of 1/8 in. O.D. tubing	400 (204.4)	Screwdriver slot
A70GA-2C			35 to 80 (1.7 to 26.7)	3 to 30 (-16.1 to -1.1), factory set at 12 (-11.1)	3/8 in. x 3 in. 6 ft capillary	250 (121)
A70HA-1C1			15 to 55 (-9.4 to 12.8)	Manual reset	20 ft of 1/8 in. O.D. tubing	400 (204.4)
A70HA-2C			35 to 80 (1.7 to 26.7)		3/8 in. x 3 in. 6 ft capillary	250 (121)
A70HA-14C			15 to 55 (-9.4 to 12.8)		20 ft of 1/8 in. O.D. tubing	400 (204.4)
A70KA-1C	Open high	Close high	100 to 170 (37.8 to 76.7)		3/8 in. x 3 in. 6 ft capillary	240 (116)

1. On these models, the low cutout stop is set and sealed at 35°F (1.6°C). It cannot be set lower. The control responds only to the lowest temperature along any 14 to 16 in. section of the entire 20 ft element.

Replacement Covers

Product Code Number	Description
CVR17A-620R	Automatic reset cover
CVR17A-621R	Manual reset cover

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Pole Number	LINE-M2 (Main)						LINE-M1 (Auxiliary)
Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277	4801	6001	120	208	240	277
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	—	5.0	4.8	6.0	3.4	3.0	—
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	—	30.0	28.8	36.0	20.4	18.0	—
AC Non-Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2	—	—	6.0	6.0	6.0	6.0
Pilot Duty – Both Poles	125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC and 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

1. Not compressor motor loads.

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927145

Description

A72 Series Two-Pole Heavy Duty Temperature Controls (Adjustable Differential)

A72 Series

The A72 Series Temperature Controls incorporate a vapor charged sensing element and heavy duty contacts.

Refer to the A70, A72 Series Temperature Controls for Refrigeration and Heating

(LIT-125155) for important product application information.

Features

The double-pole, single-throw (DPST) contact block contains two isolated sets of contacts that make or break simultaneously.

Applications

Use for automatic control of heavy electrical loads.

Selection Charts

Line 1

Line 2

Action on Increase on Temperature

A72 Action Diagram

A72AA-3 Temperature Control

a27.eps

Product Code

Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F° (C°)

Bulb and

Capillary

Maximum Bulb

Temperature °F (°C)

Range

Adjuster

A72AA-1C

DPST

Close high Open low

-30 to 30

(-34 to -1)

4 to 25

(2 to 14)

3/8 in. x 3 in.1

6 ft capillary

200

(93)

Screwdriver slot

A72AA-2C

DPST

Close high Open low

15 to 55

(-9 to 13)

3 to 30

(1.7 to 17)

3/8 in. x 3 in.1

6 ft capillary

200

(93)

Screwdriver slot

A72AA-3C

DPST

Close high Open low

50 to 90

(10 to 32)

3 to 30

(1.7 to 17)

11/16 in. x 6-3/4 in. Cross ambient

6 ft capillary

135

(57)

Screwdriver slot

A72AP-1C2

DPST

Close high Open low

-10 to 65

(-23 to 18)

4 to 40

(2 to 22)

11/16 in. x 6-3/4 in. Cross ambient

6 ft capillary

130

(54)

Screwdriver slot

Packing nut assembly available for direct immersion applications, Code No. FTG13A-600R.
Equipped with manual PUSH TO START button. Manual start feature is especially desirable on milk cooler jobs; permits manual start of the compressor when bulb temperature is between closing and opening setting of switch.

Replacement Covers

Product Code Number	Description
CVR17A-620R	Automatic reset cover
CVR17A-621R	Manual reset cover

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120 Single-Phase	2081 Single-Phase	2401 Single-Phase	2201 Two-Phase	208 Three-Phase	220 Three-Phase
Horsepower	2	3	3	5	5	5
AC Full Load A	24.0	24.0	24.0	15.0	15.9	15.0
AC Locked Rotor A	144.0	144.0	144.0	90.0	95.4	90.0
AC Non-Inductive A	24.0	24.0	24.0	–	–	–
DC Non-Inductive A2	3.0	–	0.5	–	–	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

These full load and locked rotor ampere (not horsepower) ratings apply to hermetic compressors only.
This rating does not apply to the A72AP-1C Control.

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927160

A72 Series Cooling Tower or Evaporative Condenser Controls (Single-Stage Temperature Control with Outdoor Enclosure)

Description

The A72AE and A72CE are wide range temperature controls with heavy duty double-pole, single-throw (DPST) contacts and neoprene-coated sensing elements.

Refer to the A72 Series Temperature Controls for Cooling Towers and Evaporated Condensers with Weather Resistant Enclosure Product Bulletin (LIT-125165) for important product application information.

Selection Chart

Features

Open high or close high models are available.

Applications

Use for control of cooling tower fans; motorized valves or solenoid operated valves.

Repair Information

If the A72 Series Cooling Tower or Evaporative Condenser Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

A72 Series Temperature Control

Product

Code Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F° (C°)

Bulb and

Capillary

Range

Adjuster

A72AE-1C

DPST; close high

25 to 90

(-5 to 30)

4 to 25

(2.2 to 14)

11/16 in. x 6-3/4 in. Neoprene-coated 6 ft cap.

Internal screwdriver slot

A72CE-1C

DPST; open high

Technical Specifications

ambient temperature limits: -65 to 150°F (-54 to 66°C)
maximum bulb temperature: 170°F (77°C)

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120 Single- Phase	2081 Single- Phase	2401 Single- Phase	2201 Two- Phase	208 Three- Phase	220 Three- Phase
Horsepower	2	3	3	5	5	5
AC Full Load A	24.0	24.0	24.0	15.0	15.9	15.0
AC Locked Rotor A	144.0	144.0	144.0	90.0	95.4	90.0
AC Non-Inductive A	24.0	24.0	24.0	–	–	–
DC Non-Inductive A	3.0	–	0.5	–	–	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

1. These full load and locked rotor ampere (not horsepower) ratings apply to hermetic compressors only.

Single-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927150

A72AA Coiled Bulb Space Thermostat (Cooling)

Description

The A72 is a space sensing temperature control with heavy-duty contacts.

Refer to the A72 Series Temperature Controls for Cooling Towers and Evaporative Condensers with Weather Resistant Enclosure Product Bulletin (LIT-125165) for important product application information.

Applications

Use for compressor cycling for walk-in coolers and freezers.

Accessories

For replacement cover, order code number

CVR17A-620R.

Selection Chart

Product Code

Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F° (C°)

Bulb and

Capillary

Range

Adjuster

A72AA-4C

DPST

Close high, open low

15 to 55

(-9 to 13)

3 to 30

(1.7 to 17)

Coiled copper

bulb

Screwdriver

slot

Technical Specifications

Maximum bulb temperature is 200°F (93°C).

Electrical Ratings

Features

Double-pole, single-throw (DPST) contact block contains two isolated sets of contacts that make or break simultaneously.

Repair Information

If the A72AA Coiled Bulb Space Thermostat fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

A72AA-4 Thermostat

Motor Ratings VAC	120 Single-Phase	2081 Single-Phase	2401 Single-Phase	2201 Two-Phase	208 Three-Phase	220 Three-Phase
Horsepower	2	3	3	5	5	5
AC Full Load Amperes	24.0	24.0	24.0	15.0	15.9	15.0
AC Locked Rotor Amperes	144.0	144.0	144.0	90.0	95.4	90.0
AC Non-Inductive Amperes	24.0	24.0	24.0	–	–	–
DC Non-Inductive Amperes	3.0	–	0.5	–	–	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

1. These full load and locked rotor ampere (not horsepower) ratings apply to hermetic compressors only.

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1900933

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls

Description

The A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls are single-stage controls with a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) output relay.

A421 Controls feature a bright backlit LCD with adjustable brightness and a three-button touchpad interface that can be set up to restrict user adjustments. An LED indicates the output relay’s On/Off status. Standard A421 Series control modules have simple On and Off temperature settings for heating or cooling, an adjustable anti-short cycle delay, temperature setback, and sensor offset capability. The temperature control range is

-40 to 212°F or -40 to 100°C.

The A421 controls are available either in Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 (CE), high-impact plastic enclosures suitable for surface or DIN rail mounting or in Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 (CE) watertight, corrosion resistant surface mount enclosures.

Refer to the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011972) for important product application information.

Applications

The A421 Electronic Temperature Control can be used to control a wide variety of

single-stage refrigeration or HVAC equipment.

Sample temperature control applications include:

temperature monitoring and alarming
on/off control of boilers and chillers
boiler and chiller pump control
heating and cooling control
floating temperature control of damper and valve actuators
cooling tower fan control based on water temperature
supply, makeup, and mixed air temperature control
temperature actuated valve control
supply and makeup air damper and fan control
condenser fan control based on condenser temperature

Features

easy-to-read, bright, adjustable backlit LCD screen displays the temperature, parameters, and status clearly and allows you to adjust LCD brightness for the ambient light conditions. Custom icons on the display provide visual cues on system and control status.
basic and advanced programming menus allow you to easily set up your control application on the LCD using a simple three-button touchpad interface.
adjustable On and Off temperature setpoints enable easy to set up cooling or heating control applications on the

three-button touchpad, eliminating the need to remove the cover and reposition jumpers for reverse or direct control actions.

high and low temperature setpoint adjustment stops allow you to set up your application for your desired range of adjustment and restrict user adjustment to just the desired temperature adjustment range.
displayed temperature offset allows you to adjust the displayed temperature to the actual sensed temperature in applications where the resistance error in long sensor cable leads cause a deviation in the displayed temperature from the actual sensed temperature.
adjustable anti-short cycle delay keeps the output relay Off after the Off setpoint is reached for a user-defined time delay, which helps avoid short cycling, hard starts, and nuisance overload outages on compressors and other inductive applications.
temperature setback/offset control enables the control to shift the On and Off setpoint values by a user-defined offset when an external switch closes the binary input control circuit. Using a switching timer enables you to set up occupied/unoccupied temperature setback schedules for your applications.
high-impact, thermoplastic Type 1/IP20 or Type 4X (NEMA)/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant enclosures increase application options, allowing surface and snap-fit DIN rail mount, or watertight surface mount.

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control

parameter adjustment restriction allows you to lock the control’s setup parameters and restrict user adjustments to just the On and Off temperature setpoint values within your defined setpoint adjustment range.
low- and line-voltage control models provide industry standard control voltage options for most refrigeration and HVAC control applications.

Repair Information

If the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement A421 Control, contact the nearest Authorized

Johnson Controls/PENN® Distributer or Sales Representative.

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls (Continued)

Selection Chart

A421 Electronic Temperature Control Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Description
A421ABC-02C	Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.
A421ABC-03C	Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-300C temperature sensor with 9 ft 9 in. (3.0 m) cable.
A421ABC-04C	Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-400C temperature sensor with 13 ft 1-1/5 in. (4.0 m) cable.
A421ABC-06C	Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-400C temperature sensor with 19 ft 6 in. (6.0 m) cable.
A421AEC-01C	Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-25C temperature sensor with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) cable.
A421AEC-02C	Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.
A421GBF-02C	Low-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 24 VAC Class 2, Safety Extra Low Voltage. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.
A421GEF-01C	Low-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 24 VAC Class 2, Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV). Includes an A99BB-25C temperature sensor with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) cable.
A421GEF-02C	Low-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 24 VAC Class 2 (SELV). Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.

A99 Temperature Sensors Compatible with the A421 Control1

Product Code Number	Description
A99BA-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) shielded PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-25C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-300C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-400C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 13 ft 1-1/5 in. (4.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-600C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BC-25C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BC-100C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 3 ft 3-3/5 in. (1.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-300C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-500C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 16 ft 4-4/5 in. (5.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-1500C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 49 ft 2-2/5 in. (15.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99CB-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99CB-600C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

1. When any A99 Series Temperature Sensor is connected to a standard temperature A421 Control model, the range of usable values is -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC).

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls (Continued)

Accessories for the A421 Controls

Product Code Number	Description
BKT287-1R	12 in. (305 mm) long DIN rail section
BKT287-2R	36 in. (914 mm) long DIN rail section
PLT344-1R	Two End Clamps for DIN rail sections
A99-CLP-1	Surface Mounting Clip for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
SHL10-603R	Sun Shield for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
BOX10A-603R	PVC Enclosure for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
WEL11A-601R	Immersion well for applying sensor in fluid applications

Technical Specifications

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls
Power Consumption	1.8 VA maximum
Supply Power	Low Voltage Models: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC), 50/60 Hz, Class 2 or Safety Extra-Low Voltage Line Voltage Models: 110/120 or 208/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Ambient Conditions	Operating: Type 1 Models: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C), 0 to 95% RH Noncondensing Type 4X Models: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C), 0 to 95% RH Noncondensing Shipping and Storage: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C), 0 to 95% RH Noncondensing
Temperature Control Range	-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
Input Signal	1,035 ohm at 77F (25C) for A99 PTC temperature sensors
Sensor Offset Range	±5ºF or ±3ºC
Output Relay Contacts Electrical Ratings	24 VAC models: 100 VA, 30 VAC maximum, Class 2
	120/240 VAC models: Applied Voltage: Horsepower N.O. (N.C.) : Full Load Amperes N.O. (N.C.): Locked Rotor Amperes N.O. (N.C.): Resistive Amperes N.O. (N.C.): Pilot Duty N.O. (N.C.):	24 VAC — — — 15 (10) A 125 (50) VA	120 VAC 1 (0.25) hp 16 (5.8) A 96 (34.8) A 15 (10) A 125 (125) VA	208 VAC 1 (0.33) hp 9.2 (4.0) A 55.2 (24) A 10 (10) A 125 (125) VA	240 VAC 1 (0.5) hp 8.0 (4.9) A 48 (29.4) A 10 (10) A 125 (125) VA
Enclosure Material	Type 1/IP20 high-impact thermoplastic or Type 4X/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant, high-impact thermoplastic
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC. Australia: Regulatory Compliance Mark (RCM)

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1900934

Description

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Power Cord

Features

The A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls are single-stage controls with a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) output relay, a bright backlit LCD, and a

three-button touchpad interface that can be set up to restrict user adjustments. An LED indicates the output relay’s On/Off status. The A421 Series Controls have simple On and Off temperature settings for heating or cooling, an adjustable anti-short cycle delay, and a temperature offset function.

The control range is -40 to 212°F

(-40 to 100°C) for standard models. Models with a control range of -40 to 248°F

(-40 to 120°C) are available in quantity orders. The controls feature remote sensing capability and interchangeable sensors. The A421 Controls are available in either Type 1 (NEMA)/IP20 high-impact plastic enclosure suitable for surface or DIN rail mounting or Type 4X (NEMA)/IP66 watertight,

corrosion-resistant surface mount enclosures.

The A421ABG Controls Type 1 (NEMA)/IP20 enclosure feature factory-installed power cords with plug and receptacle to provide easy plug-in connection and control of 120 VAC plug-in cooling and heating equipment.

Refer to the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011972) for important product application information.

Applications

The A421 Electronic Temperature Control can be used to control a wide variety of

single-stage refrigeration or HVAC equipment.

Sample temperature control applications include:

temperature monitoring and alarming
on/off control of boilers and chillers
boiler and chiller pump control
heating and cooling control
floating temperature control of damper and valve actuators
cooling tower fan control based on water temperature
supply, makeup, and mixed air temperature control
temperature actuated valve control
supply and makeup air damper and fan control
condenser fan control based on condenser temperature
easy-to-read, bright, adjustable backlit LCD screen displays the temperature, parameters, and status clearly and allows you to adjust LCD brightness for the ambient light conditions. Custom icons on the display provide visual cues on system and control status.
basic and advanced programming menus allow you to easily set up your control application on the LCD using a simple three-button touchpad interface.
adjustable On and Off temperature setpoints enable easy to set up cooling or heating control applications on the

three-button touchpad, eliminating the need to remove the cover and reposition jumpers for reverse or direct control actions.

high and low temperature setpoint adjustment stops allow you to set up your application for your desired range of adjustment and restrict user adjustment to just the desired temperature adjustment range.
displayed temperature offset allows you to adjust the displayed temperature to the actual sensed temperature in applications where the resistance error in long sensor cable leads cause a deviation in the displayed temperature from the actual sensed temperature.
adjustable anti-short cycle delay keeps the output relay Off after the Off setpoint is reached for a user-defined time delay, which helps avoid short cycling, hard starts, and nuisance overload outages on compressors and other inductive applications.
temperature setback/offset control enables the control to shift the On and Off setpoint values by a user-defined offset when an external switch closes the binary input control circuit. Using a switching timer enables you to set up occupied/unoccupied temperature setback schedules for your applications.
high-impact, thermoplastic Type 1 (NEMA)/IP20 or Type 4X (NEMA)/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant enclosures increase application options, allowing surface and snap-fit DIN rail mount, or watertight surface mount.
parameter adjustment restriction allows you to lock the control’s setup parameters and restrict user adjustments to just the On and Off temperature setpoint values within your defined setpoint adjustment range.

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Power Cord

low- and line-voltage control models provide industry standard control voltage options for most refrigeration and HVAC control applications.

Repair Information

If the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Integral Power Cord fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement A421 Control, contact the nearest Authorized

Johnson Controls/PENN® Distributer or Sales Representative.

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Power Cord (Continued)

Selection Chart

A421 Electronic Temperature Control Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Description
A421ABG-02C	Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control with Dual Power Cords: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120 VAC. Control is factory wired with a 6 ft (1.8 m) cord with 120 VAC grounded external plug and a 1 ft (0.30) cord with 120 VAC grounded internal receptacle. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.
A421ABJ-02C	Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control with Single Power Cord and Piggyback Plug: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120 VAC. Control is factory wired with a 6 ft (1.8 m) cord with 120 VAC grounded piggyback plug. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.
A421AEJ-01C	Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control with Single Power Cord and Piggyback Plug: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120 VAC. Control is factory wired with a 6 ft (1.8 m) cord with grounded piggyback plug. Includes an A99BB-25C temperature sensor with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) cable.
A421AEJ-02C	Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control with Single Power Cord and Piggyback Plug: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120 VAC. Control is factory wired with a 6 ft (1.8 m) cord with grounded piggyback plug. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6.6 ft (2.0 m) cable.

A99 Temperature Sensors Compatible with the A421 Control1

Product Code Number	Description
A99BA-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) shielded PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-25C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-300C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-400C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 13 ft 1-1/5 in. (4.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-600C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BC-25C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BC-100C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 3 ft 3-3/5 in. (1.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-300C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-500C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 16 ft 4-4/5 in. (5.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-1500C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 49 ft 2-2/5 in. (15.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99CB-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99CB-600C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

1. When any A99 Series Temperature Sensor is connected to a standard temperature A421 control model, the range of usable values is -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC).

Accessories for the A421 Controls

Product Code Number	Description
BKT287-1R	12 in. (305 mm) long DIN rail section
BKT287-2R	36 in. (914 mm) long DIN rail section
PLT344-1R	Two End Clamps for DIN rail sections
A99-CLP-1	Surface Mounting Clip for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
SHL10-603R	Sun Shield for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
BOX10A-603R	PVC Enclosure for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
WEL11A-601R	Immersion well for applying sensor in fluid applications

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Power Cord (Continued)

Technical Specifications

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls
Power Consumption	1.8 VA maximum
Supply Power	110/120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Ambient Conditions	Operating: Type 1 Models: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing Type 4X Models: -40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing Shipping and Storage: All Models: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing
Temperature Control Range	-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
Input Signal	1,035 ohm at 77F (25C) for A99 PTC temperature sensors
Sensor Offset Range	±5ºF or ±3ºC
Output Relay Contacts Electrical Ratings	120 VAC Model with Integral Power Cord: Applied Voltage: 120 VAC Full Load Amperes N.O.: 12 A Locked Rotor Amperes N.O.: 72 A Resistive Amperes N.O.: 12 A Pilot Duty: 125 VA (N.O. contacts) at 24 to 120 VAC
Enclosure Material	NEMA 1/IP20 high-impact thermoplastic or NEMA 4X/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant, high-impact thermoplastic
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1900935

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Off-Cycle Defrost

Description

The A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls are single-stage controls with a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) output relay, a bright backlit LCD, and a

The control range is -40 to 212°F

(-40 to 100°C) for standard models. Models with a control range of -40 to 248°F

corrosion-resistant surface mount enclosures.

A421 Controls with Off-Cycle Defrost (A421ABD and A421AED models) provide off-cycle defrost control with

user-configurable defrost cycle duration and frequency.

Refer to the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011972) for important product application information.

Applications

The A421 Electronic Temperature Control can be used to control a wide variety of

single-stage refrigeration or HVAC equipment.

Sample temperature control applications include:

temperature monitoring and alarming
on/off control of boilers and chillers
boiler and chiller pump control
heating and cooling control
floating temperature control of damper and valve actuators
cooling tower fan control based on water temperature
supply, makeup, and mixed air temperature control
temperature actuated valve control
supply and makeup air damper and fan control
condenser fan control based on condenser temperature

Features

easy-to-read, bright, adjustable backlit LCD screen displays the temperature, parameters, and status clearly and allows you to adjust LCD brightness for the ambient light conditions. Custom icons on the display provide visual cues on system and control status.
basic and advanced programming menus allow you to easily set up your control application on the LCD using a simple three-button touchpad interface.
adjustable On and Off temperature setpoints enable easy to set up cooling or heating control applications on the

three-button touchpad, eliminating the need to remove the cover and reposition jumpers for reverse or direct control actions.

high and low temperature setpoint adjustment stops allow you to set up your application for your desired range of adjustment and restrict user adjustment to just the desired temperature adjustment range.
displayed temperature offset allows you to adjust the displayed temperature to the actual sensed temperature in applications where the resistance error in long sensor cable leads cause a deviation in the displayed temperature from the actual sensed temperature.
adjustable anti-short cycle delay keeps the output relay Off after the Off setpoint is reached for a user-defined time delay, which helps avoid short cycling, hard starts, and nuisance overload outages on compressors and other inductive applications.
integrated off-cycle defrost timer (defrost control models only) shuts off the refrigeration system for a user-defined defrost time interval at a user-defined frequency. This eliminates the cost and time to install a separate defrost timer in many refrigeration applications.
temperature setback/offset control enables the control to shift the On and Off setpoint values by a user-defined offset when an external switch closes the binary input control circuit. Using a switching timer enables you to set up occupied/unoccupied temperature setback schedules for your applications.
high-impact, thermoplastic Type 1 (NEMA)/IP20 or Type 4X (NEMA)/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant enclosures increase application options, allowing surface and snap-fit DIN rail mount, or watertight surface mount.

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Off-Cycle Defrost

parameter adjustment restriction allows you to lock the control’s setup parameters and restrict user adjustments to just the On and Off temperature setpoint values within your defined setpoint adjustment range.
low- and line-voltage control models provide industry standard control voltage options for most refrigeration and HVAC control applications.

Repair Information

If the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Off-Cycle Defrost fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement A421 Control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Off-Cycle Defrost (Continued)

Selection Charts

A421 Electronic Temperature Controls

Product Code Number	Description
A421ABD-02C	Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control with Off-Cycle Defrost Timer: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes integral timer for off-cycle defrost control. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.
A421AED-01C	Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control with Off-Cycle Defrost Timer: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes integral timer for off-cycle defrost control. Includes an A99BB-25C temperature sensor with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) cable.
A421AED-02C	Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control with Off-Cyle Defrost Timer: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes integral timer for off-cycle defrost control. Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 6 in. (2 m) cable.

A99 Temperature Sensors Compatible with the A421 Control1

Product Code Number	Description
A99BA-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) shielded PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-25C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-300C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-400C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 13 ft 1-1/5 in. (4.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-600C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BC-25C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BC-100C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 3 ft 3-3/5 in. (1.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-300C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-500C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 16 ft 4-4/5 in. (5.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-1500C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 49 ft 2-2/5 in. (15.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99CB-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99CB-600C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

1. When any A99 Series Temperature Sensor is connected to a standard temperature A421 control model, the range of usable values is -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC).

Accessories for the A421 Controls

Product Code Number	Description
BKT287-1R	12 in. (305 mm) long DIN Rail section
BKT287-2R	36 in. (914 mm) long DIN Rail section
PLT344-1R	Two End Clamps for DIN Rail sections
A99-CLP-1	Surface Mounting Clip for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
SHL10-603R	Sun Shield for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
BOX10A-603R	PVC Enclosure for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
WEL11A-601R	Immersion Well for applying sensor in fluid applications

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Off-Cycle Defrost (Continued)

Technical Specifications

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls
Power Consumption	1.8 VA Maximum
Supply Power	24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2: 108/110/115/120 or 208/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Ambient Conditions	Operating: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C), 0 to 95% RH Noncondensing Shipping and Storage: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C), 0 to 95% RH Noncondensing
Temperature Control Range	-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) or -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC), depending on the model selected
Input Signal	1,035 ohm at 77F (25C) for A99 PTC temperature sensors
Sensor Offset Range	±5ºF or ±3ºC
Output Relay Contacts Electrical Ratings	24 VAC Models: 100 VA, 30 VAC maximum, Class 2
	120 VAC Model with Integral Power Cord: Applied Voltage: 120 VAC Full Load Amperes N.O. and N.C.: 12 A Locked Rotor Amperes N.O. and N.C.: 72 A Non-inductive Amperes N.O. and N.C.:12 A Pilot Duty: 125 VA (N.O. contacts) at 24 to 120 VAC
	120/240 VAC Models: Applied Voltage: 120 VAC 208 VAC 240 VAC Horsepower N.O. (N.C.) : 1 (0.25) hp 1 (0.33) hp 1 (0.5) hp Full Load Amperes N.O. (N.C.): 16 (5.8) A 9.2 (4.0) A 8.0 (4.9) A Locked Rotor Amperes N.O. (N.C.): 96 (34.8) A 55.2 (24) A 48 (29.4) A Non-inductive Amperes N.O. (N.C.):15 (10) A 10 (10) A 10 (10) A Pilot Duty: 125 VA (N.O. contacts) at 24 to 240 VAC 125 VA (N.C. contacts) at 24 to 240 VAC 50 VA (N.C. contacts) at 24 VAC
Enclosure Material	NEMA 1/IP20 High-Impact Thermoplastic or NEMA 4X/IP66 Watertight, Corrosion-Resistant, High-Impact Thermoplastic
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC. Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1900936

Description

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Cycle Timer

Features

The A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls are single-stage controls with a single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) output relay, a bright backlit LCD, and a

The control range is -40 to 212°F

(-40 to 100°C) for standard models. Models with a control range of -40 to 248°F

(-40 to 120°C) are available in quantity orders. The controls feature remote sensing capability and interchangeable sensors. The

A421 Controls are available in either Type 1 (NEMA)/IP20 high-impact plastic enclosure suitable for surface or DIN rail

mounting or Type 4X (NEMA)/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant surface mount enclosures.

The A421 Controls with Integral Cycle Timer provide On/Off control of ventilation fans in agriculture applications, warehouse and storage facilities, and other ventilation application that require air-exchange based on temperature or a ventilation schedule with a user-defined On-time and Off-time cycle.

Refer to the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011972) for important product application information.

Applications

The A421 Electronic Temperature Control can be used to control a wide variety of

single-stage refrigeration or HVAC equipment.

Sample temperature control applications include:

temperature monitoring and alarming
on/off control of boilers and chillers
boiler and chiller pump control
heating and cooling control
floating temperature control of damper and valve actuators
cooling tower fan control based on water temperature
supply, makeup, and mixed air temperature control
temperature actuated valve control
supply and makeup air damper and fan control
condenser fan control based on condenser temperature
easy-to-read, bright, adjustable backlit LCD screen displays the temperature, parameters, and status clearly and allows you to adjust LCD brightness for the ambient light conditions. Custom icons on the display provide visual cues on system and control status.
basic and advanced programming menus allow you to easily set up your control application on the LCD using a simple three-button touchpad interface.
adjustable On and Off temperature setpoints enable easy to set up cooling or heating control applications on the

three-button touchpad, eliminating the need to remove the cover and reposition jumpers for reverse or direct control actions.

high and low temperature setpoint adjustment stops allow you to set up your application for your desired range of adjustment and restrict user adjustment to just the desired temperature adjustment range.
displayed temperature offset allows you to adjust the displayed temperature to the actual sensed temperature in applications where the resistance error in long sensor cable leads cause a deviation in the displayed temperature from the actual sensed temperature.
adjustable anti-short cycle delay keeps the output relay Off after the Off setpoint is reached for a user-defined time delay, which helps avoid short cycling, hard starts, and nuisance overload outages on compressors and other inductive applications.
temperature and timed ventilation control (integral cycle timer models only) enables you to set up timed ventilation or makeup air cycles independent from temperature controlled cycles. This eliminates the cost and time to install a separate interval timer in ventilation and makeup air applications.
temperature setback/offset control enables the control to shift the On and Off setpoint values by a user-defined offset when an external switch closes the binary input control circuit. Using a switching timer enables you to set up occupied/unoccupied temperature setback schedules for your applications.
high-impact, thermoplastic NEMA 1/IP20 or NEMA 4X/IP66 watertight,

corrosion-resistant enclosures increase application options, allowing surface and snap-fit DIN rail mount, or watertight surface mount.

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Integral Cycle Timer

parameter adjustment restriction allows you to lock the control’s setup parameters and restrict user adjustments to just the On and Off temperature setpoint values within your defined setpoint adjustment range.
low- and line-voltage control models provide industry standard control voltage options for most refrigeration and HVAC control applications.

Repair Information

If the A421 Series Electronic Temperature Control with Integral Cycle Timer fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement A421 Control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Cycle Timer (Continued)

Selection Charts

A421 Electronic Temperature Controls

Product Code Number

Description

A421ABT-02C

Line-Voltage Type 1 Electronic Temperature Control with Duty-Cycle Timer: Type 1 (NEMA), IP20 standard enclosure for DIN rail and surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes integral timer for On/Off duty-cycle control.

Includes an A99BB-200C temperature sensor with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) cable.

A421AET-01C

Line-Voltage Type 4X Electronic Temperature Control with Duty-Cycle Timer: Type 4X (NEMA), IP67 weathertight enclosure for surface-mount applications. Rated for 120/240 VAC. Includes integral timer for On/Off duty-cycle control.

Includes an A99BB-25C temperature sensor with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) cable.

A99 Temperature Sensors Compatible with the A421 Control1

Product Code Number	Description
A99BA-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) shielded PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-25C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-300C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-400C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 13.1 ft (4.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BB-600C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BC-25C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9-7/8 in. (0.25 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99BC-100C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 3 ft 3-3/5 in. (1.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-300C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 9 ft 9-3/5 in. (3.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-500C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 16 ft 4-4/5 in. (5.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99BC-1500C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Standard probe 2 in. (5.1 cm) with 49 ft 2-2/5 in. (15.0 m) high-temperature silicon cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC)
A99CB-200C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 6 ft 7-1/5 in. (2.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)
A99CB-600C	PTC Temperature Sensor: Extended probe 6 in. (15.2 cm) with 19 ft 8-2/5 in. (6.0 m) PVC cable; Ambient operating temperature range: -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC)

1. When any A99 Series Temperature Sensor is connected to a standard temperature A421 control model, the range of usable values is -40 to 212ºF (-40 to 100ºC).

Accessories for the A421 Controls

Product Code Number	Description
BKT287-1R	12 in. (305 mm) long DIN rail section
BKT287-2R	36 in. (914 mm) long DIN rail section
PLT344-1R	Two End Clamps for DIN rail sections
A99-CLP-1	Surface Mounting Clip for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
SHL10-603R	Sun Shield for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
BOX10A-603R	PVC Enclosure for A99B and A99C Series Temperature Sensors
WEL11A-601R	Immersion well for applying sensor in fluid applications

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls with Integral Cycle Timer (Continued)

Technical Specifications

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls
Power Consumption	1.8 VA maximum
Supply Power	24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2: 108/110/115/120 or 208/230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Ambient Conditions	Operating: -40 to 150°F (-40 to 66°C), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing Shipping and Storage: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing
Temperature Control Range	-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) or -40 to 248ºF (-40 to 120ºC), depending on the model selected
Input Signal	1,035 ohms at 77F (25C) for A99 PTC temperature sensors
Sensor Offset Range	±5ºF or ±3ºC
Output Relay Contacts Electrical Ratings	24 VAC Models: 100 VA, 30 VAC maximum, Class 2
	120 VAC Model with Integral Power Cord: Applied Voltage: 120 VAC Full Load Amperes N.O. and N.C.: 12 A Locked Rotor Amperes N.O. and N.C.: 72 A Non-inductive Amperes N.O. and N.C.:12 A Pilot Duty: 125 VA (N.O. contacts) at 24 to 120 VAC
	120/240 VAC Models: Applied Voltage: 120 VAC 208 VAC 240 VAC Horsepower N.O. (N.C.) : 1 (0.25) hp 1 (0.33) hp 1 (0.5) hp Full Load Amperes N.O. (N.C.): 16 (5.8) A 9.2 (4.0) A 8.0 (4.9) A Locked Rotor Amperes N.O. (N.C.): 96 (34.8) A 55.2 (24) A 48 (29.4) A Non-inductive Amperes N.O. (N.C.):15 (10) A 10 (10) A 10 (10) A Pilot Duty: 125 VA (N.O. contacts) at 24 to 240 VAC 125 VA (N.C. contacts) at 24 to 240 VAC 50 VA (N.C. contacts) at 24 VAC
Enclosure Material	NEMA 1/IP20 high-impact thermoplastic or NEMA 4X/IP66 watertight, corrosion-resistant, high-impact thermoplastic
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC. Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1900003

MR Series Defrost Control Modules

Description

The MR Series Controls are versatile, microprocessor-based, multifunction, programmable temperature controls. Depending on the model chosen, the

MR Series Controls can also manage alarm, defrost cycle (active or passive defrost), and evaporator fan functions.

The MR Series Controls have large red LED displays. These compact controls are available in panel mount and DIN rail mount varieties. The MR Series Controls use the A99B temperature sensors, which allow remote mounting of the display unit.

All MR Series Controls perform temperature and alarm management. Some models have additional capabilities.

MR1 Series Controls

The MR1 Series provides temperature and alarm management functions. It can replace a temperature control and digital temperature readout.

MR2 Series Controls

The MR2 Series provides temperature, alarm, and defrost cycle management. The MR2 control performs defrost cycle management using time-based, passive, off cycle defrost. It can replace a temperature control, a digital temperature readout, and a defrost timer.

Refer to the MR Series Refrigeration Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125199) for important product application information.

Applications

MR4 Series Controls

The MR4 Series provides temperature, alarm, defrost, and evaporator fan management.

The MR4 Series provides defrost cycle management with hot gas or electric heat defrost and defrost termination based on time or temperature. The MR4 Series consolidates the functions of a temperature control, a digital temperature readout, a defrost cycle timer, and a defrost termination device.

Refer to the MR Series Refrigeration Temperature Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125199) for important product application information.

Features

programmable functions allow adjustment of control settings to meet application needs
alarm management functions provide local alarm display and an alarm output relay that can be used to trigger a remote alarm or dial-out modem
easily readable LED display displays temperature and other functions quickly and clearly
programming button lockout allows user to disable programming buttons and deter accidental or unauthorized changes
accurate, interchangeable temperature sensor provides accurate control performance with up to 300 feet of wiring (an adjustable temperature offset is provided for longer wiring)
self-test procedure checks control operation by cycling all outputs and testing all LEDs

Selection Chart

MR4 Series

DIN Rail and Panel Mount Modules

Repair Information

If the MR Series Defrost Control Modules fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Application	MR1	MR2	MR4
Cooling tower pump control	
Space and return air temperature control	
Convenience store coolers			
Convenience store freezers			
Supermarket display cases for produce			
Reach-in coolers			
Walk-in coolers			
Freezers or coolers with passive defrost, time-based termination			
Freezers with hot gas defrost (temperature or time-based termination			
Freezers with electrical defrost (temperature or time-based termination)			

Product Code Number	Description	Ship. Wt. lb (g)
MR1DR24-11C	MR1 Single-Stage, DIN Rail Mount Defrost Control, One A99BB-200C sensor included	0.75 lb (340 g)
MR2PM24-11C	MR2 Two-Stage, Panel Mount Defrost Control, One A99BB-200C sensor included	0.53 lb (240 g)
MR2DR24-11C	MR2 Two-Stage, DIN Rail Mount Defrost Control, One A99BB-200C sensor included	0.79 lb (360 g)
MR4PM24-12C	MR4 Four-Stage, Panel Mount Defrost Control, Two A99BB-200C sensors included	0.90 lb (410 g)
MR4DR24-12C	MR4 Four-Stage, DIN Rail Mount Defrost Control, Two A99BB-200C sensors included	1.17 lb (530 g)

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

MR Series Defrost Control Modules (Continued)

Technical Specifications

MR Series Defrost Control Modules
Power Requirements		24 VAC, 50/60 Hz Class 2 (20 to 30 VAC)
Power Consumption		3.7 VA at 24 VAC
Accuracy		± 1.8F° (± 1°C)
Ambient Conditions	Operating	+14 to +140°F (-10 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
	Storage	-22 to +176°F (-30 to +80°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Dimensions (H x W x D)	Panel Mount	1.38 x 2.95 x 2.68 in. (35 x 75 x 68 mm)
	DIN Rail:	4.65 x 2.76 x 2.07 in. (118 x 70 x 53 mm)
Agency Listings		UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX2 Canadian UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX8

Electrical Ratings of Contacts

Rating Category	120 VAC	240 VAC	24 VDC
Horsepower	1/4	1/2	—
Full Load Amperes	5.8	4.9	—
Locked Rotor Amperes	34.8	29.4	—
Inductive (Non-Motor) Amperes	8	8	8
Pilot Duty VA	275	450	—

Note: Relay outputs must not exceed 20 Amperes total connected load. Open collector transistors on MR1 alarms have a maximum rating of 40 VDC 100 mA. Alarms require external power source.

Refer to Rating Table for more information

Internal to Control

Process Temperature Sensor

Sensor

Common

Binary Input

Binary Common

Evaporator Alarm Temperature

Sensor

Internal to Control

Power Compressor

Supply

Evaporator

Fan

Defrost

Refer to Rating Table for more information

Terminal Not Used

Common

Defrost

Power Binary

Sensor

Alarm Compressor

mr4panel.eps

Supply

Evaporator Input

Fan

Common

Evaporator Temperature

MR4 DIN Rail Control

mr4dinrl.eps

Process Temperature Sensor

MR4 Panel Mount Control

Sensor

Single-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927380

MR4PMUHV Electronic Temperature/Defrost Control with Relay Pack

Description

The MR Series temperature controls are designed for use with hot gas or electric heat defrost in both refrigeration and freezer units. Either time or temperature based defrost termination may be selected.

The MR Series incorporates control functions such as compressor control, defrost management, fan management, and alarm management.

Refer to the MR4PMUHV Electronic Temperature/Defrost Control with Relay Pack Product Bulletin (LIT-125190) for important product application information.

Features

single package provides the functionality of multiple components at a cost-effective price
mounting flexibility allows the control and relay pack to be mounted together or separately, facilitating multiple configurations
accurate, interchangeable temperature sensor provides reliable control performance with up to 300 ft. of wiring (an offset is provided for longer wiring)
easily readable temperature display can show either evaporator or process temperature at the touch of a button
heavy-duty relays allow direct control of compressors, fans, defrost heaters, and alarms
alarm management functions provide both local alarm codes and a relay closure that can be used to trigger a remote alarm or a dial-out modem

Applications

These relay pack mounted controls provide direct control of compressors up to 2 hp, electric heater loads of up to 20 amperes, and evaporator fan loads of up to 3/4 hp. The need for separate relays is eliminated in these applications.

MR4PMUHV Temperature Control

In addition, the MR4PMUHV controls combine the functionality of an electromechanical thermostat, mechanical clock, defrost termination device, and temperature readout device with the accuracy of electronic technology.

Selection Charts

MR4PMUHV Electronic Temperature/Defrost Control with Relay Pack

Product Code Number

Description

MR4PMUHV-12C

Relay pack defrost control with two

A99BB-200C sensors

Repair Parts

Product Code Number	Description
MR4PM12C-12C	Replacement control for use in relay pack
RP4MRUHV-1C	Relay pack without control
A99BB-200C	Sensor, cable length: 6.5 ft/1.98m

Technical Specifications

MR4PMUHV Electronic Temperature/Defrost Control with Relay Pack (Part 1 of 2)
Frequency		60/50 Hz at 120/240 VAC
Power consumption		10 VA at 240 VAC, 5 VA at 120 VAC
Supply Level		120 and L1: 120 VAC +10%/-15% 240 and L1: 240 VAC +10%/-15%
Accuracy		± 1.8F°/± 1C°
A99 Sensor Cable		6.5 ft/1.98 m
Ambient Operating Conditions	MR4PMUHV-12C	+14° to +111°F/-10° to +44°C; derating 6.25% per 1°C to 60° C; 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
	MR4PM12C-12C	+14° to +140°F/-10° to +60°C; 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
	RP4MRUHV-1C	-40° to +111°F/ -40° to +44°C; derating 6.25% per 1°C to 60° C; 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Ambient Storage Conditions	MR4PMUHV-12C	-22° to +176°F/-30° to +80°C 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
	MR4PM12C-12C	-22° to +176°F/-30° to +80°C 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
	RP4MRUHV-1C	-40° to +185°F/-40° to +85°C 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Dimensions (H x W x D)		7.94 x 3.6 x 2.4 in./202 x 92 x 61 mm

Technical Specifications (Continued)

MR4PMUHV Electronic Temperature/Defrost Control

with Relay Pack (Part 2 of 2)

Agency Listings

UL Listed (File SA516, UL Guide SDFY;

cUL Guide SDFY7)

Shipping Weight

2.9 lb/1,320 g

Relay Electrical Ratings

	24	120	208	240
SPST Compressor Relay
Horsepower Rating	—	1	1.5	2
AC Full Load Amperes	—	16	11	12
AC Locked Rotor Amperes	—	96	66	72
Pilot Duty (VA)	125	750	875	1,125
SPDT Fan Relay
Horsepower Rating	—	1/3	1/2	3/4
AC Full Load Amperes	—	7.2	5.65	6.9
AC Locked Rotor Amperes	—	43.2	33.9	41.4
Pilot Duty (VA)	50	325	450	600
SPST Defrost Heater Relay
Horsepower Rating	—	1	1.5	2
AC Full Load Ampere	—	16	11	12
AC Locked Rotor Amperes	—	96	66	72
Non-Inductive Load Amperes	—	20	20	20
Pilot Duty (VA)	125	750	825	1,125
SPST Alarm Relay
Non-Inductive Load Ampere	5	5	5	5
Pilot Duty (VA)	—	125	250	325

Relay Electrical Ratings Note:

Ratings shown are for ambient operation at -40 to 44°C. Derate electrical ratings 6.25% per 1°C (1.8°F) between 44°C (111°F) and 60°C (140°F).

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927110

A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Control

Description

The A28 Series are two-stage temperature controls that incorporate a liquid-filled sensing element.

Refer to the A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure Product Bulletin Product Bulletin (LIT-125130) for important product application information.

A28 Series

Action on Increase of Temperature

A28 Action Diagram

A28AA-4

Temperature Control

High Stage

Low Stage

a28.eps

Applications

A28AB-29

Temperature Control

Features

wide temperature ranges available
constant differential throughout the entire range
single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) snap-acting switches
unaffected by changes in barometric pressure
unaffected by cross ambient conditions
compact enclosure
variety of sensing element styles

Selection Charts

Use for temperature sensing applications requiring two-stage control of HVAC/R equipment.

Accessories

packing nut assembly available for direct immersion applications (Code No. FTG13A-600R)
remote bulb models include 5/8 in. mounting clip

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range °F (°C)	Differential F° (C°)	Bulb and Capillary	Bulb Well No. (Order Separately)	Range Adjuster
Coiled Bulb-Fixed Differential
A28AA-4C	Two-SPDT	30 to 110 (-1 to 43)	3-1/2 (1.9) each stage 3 (1.7) fixed between stages	1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in. coiled	–	Convertible
Case Compensated-Fixed Differential
A28AA-9C	Two-SPDT	20 to 80 (-7 to 27)	3-1/2 (1.9) each stage 3 (1.7) fixed between stages	3/8 in. x 5 in. 6 ft capillary1	WEL14A-603R	Knob
Wide Range-Adjustable Interstage Differential
A28AA-28C	Two-SPDT	30 to 110 (-1 to 43)	3-1/2 (1.9) each stage 2 to 7 adjustable between stages	12 ft averaging bulb 6 ft capillary	–	Screwdriver slot
A28AA-29C	Two-SPDT	-30 to 100 (-34 to 38)	5 (2.8) each stage 2 to 7 adjustable between stages	3/8 in. x 4 in. 8 ft capillary1	WEL14A-602R	Convertible
A28AA-36C	Two-SPDT	40 to 90 (4 to 32)	3 each stage 2 to 7 adjustable between stages	3/8 in. x 5-3/4 in. 6 ft capillary	–	Knob
A28AA-37C	Two-SPDT	60 to 140 (16 to 60)	5 each stage 2 to 7 adjustable between stages	3/8 in. x 4 in. 6 ft capillary	WEL14A-602R	Knob
A28AJ-4C	Two-SPDT	20 to 80 (-7 to 27)	2 each stage 2 to 7 adjustable between stages	3/16 in. x 22 in. 6 ft capillary	–	Knob
Changeover Control
A28AB-1C	Two-SPDT2	20 to 80 (-7 to 27)	3-1/2 (1.9)	3/8 in. x 5 in. 6 ft capillary	WEL14A-603R	Screwdriver slot

Packing nut assembly available for direct immersion applications (Code No. FTG13A-600R).
Switches within 1 F° (0.6 C°) of each other.

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Control (Continued)

Replacement Parts

Product Code Number	Description
CVR28A-617R	Concealed adjustment
CVR28A-618R	Visible scale
KNB20A-602R	Knob kit

Technical Specifications

Maximum bulb temperature of A28AA-37 is 230°F (110°C). For all others, maximum bulb temperature is 140°F (60°C).

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277
A28AA, A
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	—
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	—
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC1
A28AJ
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0	—
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18.0	—
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	15.0	9.2	8.0	7.2
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC1
A28AB
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	—
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	—
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC1

1. When used as two-circuit control, the total connected load must not exceed 2,000 VA.

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927115

A28 Series Two-Stage Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat

Description

The A28AK is a two-stage temperature control with special air coil sensing element and adjustable mounting flange.

Refer to the A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure Product Bulletin (LIT-125130) for important product application information.

Features

flat flange mounting with special coil element permits positioning of sensing bulb in the appropriate portion of the air stream
two single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) snap-acting switches
unaffected by barometric pressure or cross ambient temperatures

Applications

These duct thermostats are used on roof top units, make-up heaters, duct heaters, and air handling systems of all types.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Number of Stages	Switch Action	Range °F (°C)	Differential F° (C°) Fixed		Maximum Allowable Temperature at Bulb °F (°C)
Product Code Number	Number of Stages	Switch Action	Range °F (°C)	Each Stage	Between Stage	Maximum Allowable Temperature at Bulb °F (°C)
A28AK-1C	Two	Two-SPDT switches	30 to 110 (-1 to 43)	2 (1.1)	3 (1.7)	140 (60)
A28AK-2C	Two	Two-SPDT switches	60 to 130 (16 to 54)	2 (1.1)	3 (1.7)	200 (93)

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

A28 Series

High Stage Low Stage

Action on Increase of Temperature

a28.eps

A28 Action Diagram

Repair Information

If the A28 Series Two-Stage Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

A28AK Thermostat

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18.0	–
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	10.0	9.2	8.0	7.2
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Note: When used as a two-circuit control, the total connected load must not exceed 2,000 VA.

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927120

A28 Two-Stage Industrial Thermostat (Watertight and Dusttight)

Description

The A28KA is a wide range temperature control with gasketed enclosure and two single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switches.

Refer to the A19A, A19K, A28K Series Industrial Controls Remote Bulb Product Bulletin (LIT-125105) for important product application information

Features

rugged steel enclosure
liquid-filled sensing element that provides uniform control

Applications

This control is for refrigeration, air conditioning, and heating applications. This model incorporates a gasketed enclosure that can be used in a wide range of industrial and general purpose applications.

Repair Information

If the A28 Two-Stage Industrial Thermostat fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings AC	120	208	240
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	16.0	9.2	8.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Note: When used as a two-circuit control, the total connected load must not exceed 2,000 VA.

A28AKA Industrial Thermostat

Selection Chart

Product Code

Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F° (C°)

Bulb and

Capillary

Bulb Well No.

(Order Separately)

Range

Adjuster

A28KA-1C

Two-SPDT

0 to 150

(-15 to 65)

5 (2.8) each stage

3 (1.7) fixed between stages

0.290 x 2-1/2 in.

10 ft capillary

WEL16A-600R

Knob

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927125

A28 Two-Stage Temperature Control with Weatherproof Enclosure

Description

The A28MA Controls are wide range temperature controls with rainproof NEMA 3R enclosure and two single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switches.

Refer to the A28MA Type Two-Stage Tower Fan Control Two-Stage Air Cooled Condenser Fan Control Product Bulletin

(LIT-125135) for important product application information

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings	120	208	240
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	16.0	9.2	8.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Note: When used as a two-circuit control, the total connected load must not exceed

2,000 VA.

Features

rugged steel enclosure
liquid-filled sensing element provides uniform control

Applications

sump water temperature control for cooling towers and evaporative condensers
fan cycling control for air-cooled condensers

Repair Information

If the A28 Two-Stage Temperature Control with Weatherproof Enclosure fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product

Code Number

Switch

Action

Range

°F (°C)

Differential

F° (C°)

Bulb and

Capillary

Range

Adjuster

A28MA-1C

Two-Stage Two-SPDT

Switches

40 to 120

(4 to 49)

Factory set

5 (2.8) each stage

8 (4.4) between stages

3/8 in. x 4 in.;

Neoprene-coated 6 ft capillary

Screwdriver slot

A28MA-2C

3/8 in. x 4-1/16 in.; 6 ft capillary

A28MA Temperature Control

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927130

A28 Two-Stage Agricultural Thermostat with NEMA 4X Enclosure

Description

The A28PJ and A28PA are two-stage temperature controls with raintight and dusttight enclosures.

Refer to the A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure Product Bulletin (LIT-125130) for important product application information.

Features

rugged thermoplastic gasketed enclosures that meet NEMA 4X specifications
O-ring sealed setpoint adjustment knobs
range scale with oversized white markings for easy readability in low light
exposed portion of liquid-filled sensing elements are plated and plastic coated to resist damage in corrosive atmospheres

Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Range °F (°C)

Differential F° (C°)

Bulb and Capillary

Range Adjuster

A28PJ-1C

Two-SPDT

30 to 110

(-1 to 43)

2 (1.1) each stage

2 to 7 (1.1 to 3.9) adjustable between stages

1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in.

coiled

Knob

A28PA-2C

Two-SPDT

30 to 110

(-1 to 43)

2 (1.1) each stage

2 to 7 (1.1 to 3.9) adjustable between stages

1-3/8 in. x 2-1/4 in. coiled

Knob

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Applications

Designed for use in agricultural and industrial applications that require compliance with Article 547 of the National Electrical Code.

Repair Information

If the A28 Two-Stage Agricultural Thermostat with NEMA 4X Enclosure fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

A28PJ, A28PA Thermostat

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277
A28PJ
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18.0	–
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	10.0	9.2	8.0	7.2
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC1
A28PA
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	–
Non-Inductive or Resistance Load A (Not Lamp Loads)	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC1

1. When used as a two-circuit control, the total connected load must not exceed 2,000 VA.

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927135

A36 Series Four-Stage Remote Bulb Thermostats

Sw itch

D ifferentia l

Description

The A36 series are four-stage thermostats with open construction for use in panel mounting.

Refer to the Type A36AHA 4-Stage Computer Environmental Temperature Control Product Bulletin (LIT-125145) for important product application information.

In ter sta ge Dif ferent ial

A36 Series Differential Diagram

Sw itch

D iffe ren tia l

Sw itch

D iffere n tial

a36diff.eps

Features

Screwdriver slot adjustment with calibrated dial enables movement of entire staging band within the range.

Applications

Use for cycling control for multiple refrigeration compressors or unloading type compressors.

Accessories

Order Enclosure CSE57A-600 separately, if required.

a36 IN.eps

A36AHA-52 Remote Bulb Thermostat

Repair Information

If the A36 Series Four-Stage Remote Bulb Thermostat fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

A36 Series Action Diagram

Selection Chart

Product Code

Number

Switch

Action

Range °F (°C)

Differential F° (C°)

Fixed

Bulb and

Capillary

Bulb Well No.

(Order Separately)

Range

Adjuster

A36AHA-50C1

Four Single-Pole,

Double-Throw (SPDT)

switches

55 to 95

(13 to 35)

Two each stage

1 1/2 (0.8) between stages

3/8 in. x 5-1/4 in.

18 in. capillary

w ith 12 in. nylon armor

WEL14A-603R

Screwdriver slot with

calibrated dial

A36AHA-52C1

A36AHA-58C2

0 to 70

(-18 to 21)

Three each stage

2-1/2 (1.4) between stages

3/8 in. x 4-3/4 in.

15 ft braid armor capillary

WEL14A-602R

A36AHB-33C1

Two each stage

2-1/2 (1.4) between stages

Calibrated at mid-switching point; computer room or comfort control.
Calibrated at low-switching point; special close control chiller applications.

Specifications

Maximum bulb temperature is 120°F (49°C) in operation and 140°F (60°C) when shipping.

Electrical Ratings (Per Switch)

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277
A36AHA
AC Full Load A	10.0	6.9	5.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	60.0	41.4	30.0	–
Non-Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 227 VAC
A36AHB
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18.0	–
Non-Inductive A	10.0	5.7	5.0	4.3
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 227 VAC

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1922250

S26 Series Switching Subbase

Description

The S26 Series is a switching subbase used in conjunction with T26A, T26J, and T26S thermostats to provide system and fan switching capability.

The variety of switching configurations available with the S26 Series adds application flexibility to the T26 Series thermostats.

Applications

S26 Series subbases are available with a variety of system switch configurations for manual control of system operation and fan speed for heating, cooling, and combination heating/cooling equipment.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	System Switch	Fan Switch
S26AA-1	Heat-off-cool	Low-med-high
S26AH-1	Heat-off-cool	None
S26DH-1	Off-auto	None

Refer to the S26 Series Switching Subbase Product Bulletin (LIT-125610) for important product application information.

Features

mounts directly to a two-gang electrical box
wiring connections enclosed and isolated from the user
smooth action multi-position slide switches for dependable service
can be added to existing T26 Series thermostats (new style with plastic cover)
high-impact plastic enclosure

Repair Information

If the S26 Series Switching Subbase fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement subbase, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

S26 Series Switching Subbase

Technical Specifications

Gray

Typical Wiring Configuration for Cooling S26

T26S and S26AH (T46SAH) Heat-Off-Cool Selector Switch with Continuous Fan (Heating and Cooling)

Black

FIG:T46SAH

S26 Series System Switching Subbase
Finish	Cover	Almond
	Faceplate	Gold metallic with dark brown border and lettering
Material	Base	0.050 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel
	Cover	0.090 in. (2 mm) high impact PVC plastic
Mounting		Mounts to a 2-gang electrical box
Shipping Weight	Individual Pack	7 oz (0.20 kg)
	Overpack of 20 Units	10 lb, 4 oz (4.65 kg)
Wiring Connections		Color coded No. 16 AWG wires, 8 in. (203 mm) long

Typical Wiring Configurations for Combinations

Electrical Ratings
Motor Ratings	120V	208V	240V	277V
AC full load A	12.0	6.9	6.0	5.2
AC locked rotor A	72	41.4	36	31.2
AC non-inductive A	6.5	6.5	6.5	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Black

Red

H C H C

Gray

T26S and S26AA (T46SAA) Heat-Off-Cool Selector Switch with Fan Speed Control (Heating and Cooling)

Black

T26S and S26DH (T46SDH) Off-Auto Selector Switch with Manual or Automatic Changeover Switch and

Gray

FIG:T46SAA

FIG:T4SDH

Continuous Fan (Heating and Cooling)

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1922255

T22/T25/T26 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat (Heating, Cooling, or Heating and Cooling)

Description

For line voltage control of residential, commercial, or industrial heating or year-round air conditioning. Heat or cold anticipators are not required. The

liquid-charged temperature sensing element and highly efficient diaphragm and leverage provide close temperature control.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information:

T22 Series Line Voltage Thermostats with Selector Switch Product Bulletin

(LIT-125630)

T25 Two-Stage Room Thermostat Product Bulletin (LIT-125640)
T26 Series Line Voltage Thermostats Product Bulletin (LIT-125645)

Features

attractive beige colored, high-impact plastic enclosure (T26 Series)
close differential without the need for anticipators
bi-metal thermometer supplied as standard except where indicated
equipped with adjustable dial stops (T26 Series)

T22 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat

Series T25

B R

High Stage

T25 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat

Low Stage

t28cd.eps

T25 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat

SeriesT26

t28cd.eps

Specifications

Action on Increase of Temperature

Temperature range is 40 to 90°F (5 to 30°C),

except energy conservation models.

Accessories

replacement knobs and faceplates
for double trim plate for mounting two T22s or T26s

Repair Information

If the T22/T25/T26 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat (Heating, Cooling, or Heating and Cooling) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Applications

Use for line voltage control of heating and cooling equipment.

T25, T26 Series Action Diagrams

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

T22/T25/T26 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat (Heating, Cooling, or Heating and Cooling) (Continued)

Selection Chart

Product Code Number1	Type of Adjustment	Application	Selector Switch	Differential Approximately C° (F°)		Shipping Wt. (lb)
				Heating	Cooling
Heating
T22AAA-1C	Knob	Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST)	Off-Auto	1-3/4 (1)	–	1.3
T22ABC-1C			Auto-Off-Fan
T22ABC-3C	Concealed
T22BBC-1C	Knob	SPST, medium duty		3 (1.7)
T22CBC-1C		SPST, heavy duty
T22CBC-3C	Concealed
T26A-14C (No Thermometer)	Knob	SPST, Energy Conservation Heating model, max. setting 75°F (24°C)	None	2 (1.1)		1.0
T26A-15C (No Thermometer)		SPST, Energy Conservation Heating model, max. setting 65°F (18°C)
Cooling
T22JAA-1C	Knob	SPST	Off-Auto	–	2-1/4 (1.3)	1.3
T22JCC-1C			Auto-Off-Fan
T26J-7C (No Thermometer)		SPST, Energy Conservation Cooling model, min. setting 75°F (24°C)	None
T26J-9C (No Thermometer)		SPST, Energy Conservation Cooling model, min. setting 78°F (26°C)			2 (1.1)	1.0
Heating and Cooling
T22SDA-1C	Knob	Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT), permits system shutdown at the thermostat	Off-Auto	1-3/4 (1)	2-1/4 (1.3)	1.3
T22SEB-1C		SPDT, used when the same device controls heating and cooling	Heat-Off-Cool
T22SFB-1C2		SPDT, used to control separate loads on heating and cooling
T22TFB-1C2		SPDT, heavy duty, used to control separate loads on heating and cooling		3 (1.7)	3 to 4 (1.7 to 2.2)
T26S-18C3		SPDT	None	1-3/4 (1)	2-1/4 (1.3)	1.0
T26T-3C2		SPDT, heavy duty		3 (1.7)	3 to 4 (1.7 to 2.2)
Two-Stage
T25A-1C	Knob	Two SPDT switches Two-stage heating, cooling or one- stage heating and one-stage cooling	None	1-3/4 (1)	2-1/4 (1.3)	1.5
T25A-16C	Concealed			3 (1.7) between stages

For the thermostat guard, refer to G Series Thermostat and Humidistat Guards (LIT-1922145).
Can also be used where one unit provides both heating and cooling by adding a jumper between terminals 2 and 3. Refer to Typical Wiring Diagram and Electrical Ratings for Line Voltage Thermostats (LIT-1922600).
Includes a faceplate for horizontal mounting. The plate is for on-the-job installation over a vertical plate. Can field-convert to other configurations.

The T26S-18 is a universal replacement for Honeywell T451A, -B, T651A; White-Rodgers 179-1, 180-1, 181-1, 182-101, -102; Robertshaw® TA500, TH71,

-72, -79, -500, TX550.

T26T-3 replaces: Honeywell T4051A, -B, T6051A; White-Rodgers 151-6, 152-9, 159-3, -5.

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1922600

Typical Wiring Diagram and Electrical Ratings for Line Voltage Thermostats

Technical Specifications

Off

H eat C ool H eat C ool

Cooling

System

Heating

System

t22sfb.eps

T22SFB, T22TFB

Typical Wiring Diagram for Line Voltage Thermostat

Electrical Ratings T22A, T22J, T22S, T25A, T26A, T26J, T26S

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	21	18.0	–
AC Non-Inductive A	(1)	(1)	(1)	(1)
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Note: T25A Non-Inductive Ratings are 10.0, 9.2, 8.0 and 7.2 A. T26A, T26S Non-Inductive Rating is 10.0 A,

120 to 277 VAC.

Electrical Ratings T22BBC

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
AC Full Load A	10.0	6.9	6.0
AC Locked Rotor A	60.0	41.4	36.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

Electrical Ratings T22CBC1, T26T2

Motor Ratings VAC	120		208		240
	Heat	Cool	Heat	Cool	Heat	Cool
AC Full Load A	16.0	8.0	9.2	8.0	8.0	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	48.0	55.2	48.0	48.0	48.0
Non-Inductive Rating	120		240		227
AC Non-Inductive A	22.0		22.0		22.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 240 VAC

Heating rating only applies. Non-inductive ratings do not apply to Type T2CBC.
Non-inductive rating does not apply to the cooling side of T26T.

Electrical Ratings T22TFB

Motor Ratings VAC	120		208		240
Motor Ratings VAC	Heat	Cool	Heat	Cool	Heat	Cool
AC Full Load A	16.0	8.0	9.2	8.0	8.0	8.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	48.0	55.2	48.0	48.0	48.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 240 VAC

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1922260

T23 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with Fan and System Selectors)

Description

This line voltage thermostat controls heating, cooling, or combination heating and cooling systems. It operates fan motors, relays, or valves on fan-coil units. All thermostats have a three-speed fan selector switch.

Refer to the T23 Series Line Voltage Fan Coil Thermostat Product Bulletin (LIT-125635) for important product application information.

Features

dual voltage switching provided (120/240 VAC) without the need for

anticipators to achieve close temperature control

field-adjustable high and low dial stops
mounts on a standard double outlet box
attractive one-piece beige cover with inlaid two-tone panel

Applications

line voltage control of fan motors, relays, or valves on fan-coil units

T23A Thermostat

2 3 Y h

MED

L O H I B

OF F

5 6 4

H E A T C O OL

ME D

OF F

AU T O

t23a.eps

T23B Thermostat

ME D

OF F

AU T O

T23A-1 Thermostat

Repair Information

If the T23 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with Fan and System Selectors) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

t23b.eps

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Switches		Range °F (°C)	Differential F° (C°)		Shipping Weight (lb)
	Fan	System		Heating	Cooling
T23A-1C	Low-Med-High	Heat-Off-Cool	50 to 90 (10 to 32)	1-3/4 (1)	2-1/4 (1.3)	1.5
T23B-1C	Low-Med-High	Auto-Off

Technical Specifications Mounts on a standard double outlet box. Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	240
AC Full Load Amperes	5.8	2.9
AC Locked Rotor Amperes	34.8	17.4
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 240 VAC

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1922265

T28 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with or without Fan Selector Switches)

Description

This thermostat controls light duty line voltage fan coil or baseboard valves on heating, cooling, and heating-cooling systems. The thermostat can control one or two valves directly. These thermostats are rated for 120, 208, or 240 VAC at 50 to 60 Hz.

Refer to the T28 Series Fan Coil Thermostats Product Bulletin (LIT-125650) for important product application information.

Features

precision, snap-acting contacts
heating and cooling anticipation
cooling and heating-cooling models have an interlocked fan off position

Applications

Use for line voltage control of heating and cooling equipment.

HI ME D h

OFF

T28CD

t28cd.eps

Heating-Cooling Thermostat with Off-Hi-Med-Lo Fan Switch

HI ME D h

OF F LO

T28DG

Sequenced Heating-Cooling Thermostat with Off-Hi-Med-Lo Fan Switch

t28dg.eps

T28CD Thermostat

Repair Information

If the T28 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with or without Fan Selector Switches) fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement thermostat, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Fan Switch	Shipping Weight, lb (kg)
Cooling
T28BD-1C	Off-Hi-Med-Lo	1.3 (0.59)
Heating-Cooling (Remote changeover, Single valve for heating and cooling)1
T28CD-1C	Off-Hi-Med-Lo	1.3 (0.59)
Heating-Cooling, Sequenced (Automatic changeover, Separate valves for heating and cooling)2
T28DA-1C	None	1.0 (0.45)
T28DB-1C1	Off-On	1.3 (0.59)
T28DD-1C1	Off-Hi-Med-Lo	1.3 (0.59)
T28DG-1C3	Off-Hi-Med-Lo	1.3 (0.59)

Off position of fan switch interlocks to turn off cooling.
For automatic changeover where one valve functions for heating or cooling, use A19CAC-2 Strap-On Changeover Control.
Off position of fan switch interlocks to turn off both heating and cooling.

Technical Specifications

The T28 mounts on a standard, double outlet box.

Nominal operating differential at 0.6°F (0.3 C°) heating, 1 F° (0.6 C°) cooling on standard 120 VAC fan coil valves. Sequenced models have 6 F° (3.3 C°) differential from heat on to cool on.

Electrical Ratings – Ampere

VAC	Thermostat				Fan Switch
	Cooling		Heating		Fan Switch
	Normal	Inrush	Normal	Inrush	Full Load Amperes	Locked Rotor Amperes
120	0.32	1.0	0.12	0.36	5.8	34.8
208	0.18	0.57	0.07	0.21	3.3	19.8
240	0.16	0.50	0.06	0.18	2.9	17.4

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1922270

T46 Series Fan Coil Thermostat

Description

The T46 Series Thermostat is used to control line voltage, fan coil, and heating zone valves on heating, cooling, and combination heating and cooling systems. Models are available with single-pole, single-throw (SPST) or single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) contact action for standard duty (nominal 1/4 hp,

6 A non-inductive) applications. Thermostats are available with or without fan speed control or built-in thermometers. Various system switch combinations are available, including fan speed selection.

Field-installable faceplate combinations of knob or concealed adjustment are possible. Also, the T46 is available with or without thermometer indication. These thermostats have plastic locking covers with an

Allen-head screw to discourage unauthorized tampering. Standard models are supplied with the thermostat faceplate installed with knob adjustment and thermometer.

Refer to the T46 Series Fan Coil Thermostats Product Bulletin (LIT-125655) for important product application information.

Selection Charts

T46 Series Fan Coil Thermostat

Features

knob or concealed setpoint adjustment
low and high temperature dial stops that are concealed and adjustable throughout setpoint range
can be set for a locked dial
narrow differential without the need for anticipator
standard internal dual Celsius and Fahrenheit scales
switch mechanism and wiring connections go into the switch box to isolate electrical circuits from the sensing element
mounts on a standard double outlet box
separable mounting plate allows easy mounting and wiring without removing thermostat cover
locking cover reduces unauthorized tampering
high-impact plastic enclosure
smooth action multi-position slide switches for dependable service

Replacement Parts

Product Code Number	Description
CVR88A-600R	Thermostat Cover Assembly for knob adjustment models with thermometer, °F scale, faceplate supplied unassembled
KNB26A-600R	Plastic push on knob for thermostat
BKT48A-600R	Mounting plate for T46

T46 Thermostat

Applications

These thermostats control fan coil and zone heating valves on a wide variety of heating and cooling combinations for conditioned space.

Accessories

Product Code Number	System Switch	Fan Switch
Heating
T46ABH-1C	Auto-off-fan	None
T46ADH-1C	Off-auto	None
Cooling
T46JBH-1C	Auto-off-fan	None
T46JDH-1C	Off-auto	None
T46JEA-1C	On-off	Low-med-high
Heating and Cooling
T46SAA-1C	Heat-off-cool	Low-med-high
T46SAH-1C	Heat-off-cool	None
T46SDA-1C	Off-auto	Low-med-high
T46SDH-1C	Off-auto	None

Product Code Number	Faceplate Selection1
Product Code Number	Mounting Position	Type of Adjustment	Thermometer Cutout	Temperature Scale
PLT333-1R2	Vertical	Knob	Yes	Fahrenheit
PLT333-3R	Vertical	Concealed	Yes	Fahrenheit
PLT333-5R	Vertical	Knob	Yes	Celsius
PLT333-12R	Vertical	Concealed	No	–

Technical Specifications

Faceplates must be ordered in multiples of ten.
Supplied with standard wholesaler models.

T46 Series Fan Coil Thermostats
Range	Thermostat	40 to 90°F (5 to 30°C)
Range	Thermometer	50 to 90°F (10 to 30°C)
Differential	Mechanical	Approximately 0.7°F (0.4°C)
Differential	Operating	See next page
Finish	Cover	Almond
Finish	Faceplate	Gold metallic with dark brown border and lettering
Mounting		Double gang box, separable mounting plate
Material	Base	0.050 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel
Material	Cover	0.090 in. (2 mm) high-impact plastic
Sensing Element		Liquid-filled for positive trouble-free operation
Shipping Weight	Individual Pack	1 lb (0.45 kg)
Shipping Weight	Overpack of 20 Units	20 lb (9.07 kg)
Thermometer		Bimetal type for accuracy and clarity, can be field-calibrated
Wiring Connections		Color coded No. 16 AWG wires, 8 in. (203 mm) long

Multi-Stage Electromechanical Temperature Controls

T46 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (Continued)

Technical Specifications (Continued)

Electrical Ratings

Typical Wiring Application for Heating

Black

Motor Ratings	120 V	208 V	240 V	277 V
T46 System and Fan Switches
AC Full Load A	12.0	6.9	6.0	5.2
AC Locked Rotor A	34.8	19.1	17.4	14.4
AC Non-Inductive A	6.5	6.5	6.5	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC
T46 Thermostat Only
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.5	3.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	34.8	19.1	17.4	–
AC Non-Inductive A	6.5	6.5	6.5	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC

L1 (Hot)

Grey

Operating Differentials

T46A, T46S Heating

Operating Differential F 0

2.2

Orange

Red

Neutral

T46ABH Auto-Off-Fan Selector Switch with Continuous Fan (Heating Only)

Typical Wiring Application for Cooling

To Fan

To Heating

t46auht.eps

0 2 4 6 8

Amperage Load

1.1

L1 (Hot)

Operating Differential C 0

Bla ck

Grey

Orange

Blu e

To Fan

t46auco.eps

Operating Differential for T46A and Heating Side of T46S

t46heat.eps

Neutral

To Cool ing

T46JBH Auto-Off-Fan Selector Switch

5 with Continuous Fan (Cooling Only)

T46J, T46S Cooling

4 2.2

Operating Differential F 0

Operating Differential C 0

2 1.1

Typical Wiring Application for Combination

Fan

Orange

L1 (Hot)

Fan

Off

Changeover

Control

Blue

Red

Valve

Neutral

Black

t46cool.eps

Grey

0 2 4 6 8

Amperage Load

Operating Differential for T46J and Cooling Side of T46S

Note: The heavy line in each of the above figures is the nominal operating temperature differential. Production thermostats may vary from the norm, as indicated by the dotted line.

T46SDH Off-Auto Selector Switch.

t46_2.eps

Used on Fan-Coil Unit with Cycling Valve and Continuous Fan.

Terminal Markings Shown for

A19CAC Changeover Control (Heating and Cooling)

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1900004

MS Series Temperature Stage Control Modules

Description

The MS Series Temperature Controls are versatile, microprocessor-based, multifunction, programmable temperature controls. They are designed for single and multiple-stage temperature control applications.

Depending on the model selected, the

MS Series Controls can operate in the following modes:

Direct mode
Reverse mode
Deadband mode
Independent Setpoint mode

The MS Series Controls have large, easy-to-read, red LED displays. These

compact controls are available in panel mount and DIN rail mount models. MS Series Controls use the A99B temperature sensors, which allow remote mounting of the display unit.

Refer to the MS Series Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls Product Bulletin

(LIT-125198) for important product application information.

Features

programmable functions allow adjustment of control settings to meet application needs
alarm management functions provide visible alarm codes on the display
easily readable LED display shows temperature and functions quickly and clearly
programming button lockout allows user to disable programming buttons to deter accidental or unauthorized changes
accurate temperature sensors provide precise control performance with up to 300 feet of wiring (An adjustable offset is provided for longer wiring)
self-test procedure checks control operation by cycling all outputs and testing all LEDs

MS4 Series Panel and DIN Rail Mount, Multi-Stage, Electronic Temperature Controls

Repair Information

If the MS Series Temperature Stage Control Modules fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Applications

Application	MS1 Series Single-Stage	MS2 Series Two-Stage	MS4 Series Four-Stage
Rooftop heating or cooling units			
Boiler or pump control			
Convenience store coolers			
Space temperature control		
Cooling tower pump control	
Compressor or chiller staging			
Reach-in coolers			
Supermarket display cases for produce			
Restaurant and Convenience store walk-in coolers			

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Description	Shipping Weight, lb (g)
MS1DR24T-11C	MS1 Single-stage, DIN Rail Mount Temperature Control, A99BB-200C sensor included	0.75 (340)
MS2DR24T-11C	MS2 Two-stage, DIN Rail Mount Temperature Control, A99BB-200C sensor included	0.79 (360)
MS2PM24T-11C	MS2 Two-stage, Panel Mount Temperature Control, A99BB-200C sensor included	0.53 (240)
MS4DR24T-11C	MS4 Four-stage, DIN Rail Mount Temperature Control, 2 A99BB-200C sensors included	1.17 (530)
MS4PM24T-11C	MS4 Four-stage, Panel Mount Temperature Control, 2 A99BB-200C sensors included	0.90 (410)

Accessories

Product Code Number	Description
A99BB-200C	Temperature Sensor: Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) Cable length and type: 6-1/2 ft (2 m) PVC
A99BB-300C	Temperature Sensor: Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) Cable length and type: 9-3/4 ft (3 m) PVC
A99BB-500C	Temperature Sensor: Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) Cable length and type: 16-3/8 ft (5 m) PVC
A99BB-600C	Temperature Sensor: Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) Cable length and type: 19-1/2 ft (6 m) PVC
A99BA-200C	Temperature Sensor: Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C) Cable length and type: 6-1/2 ft (2 m) Shielded

ms4pm24t.eps

ms4dr24t.eps

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

MS Series Temperature Stage Control Modules (Continued)

Technical Specifications

MS Series Temperature Stage Control Modules
Power Requirements		24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2 (20 to 30 VAC)
Power Consumption		5 VA at 24 VAC
Accuracy		 1.8°F ( 1°C)
Ambient Conditions	Operating	+14 to +140°F (-10 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
	Storage	-22 to +176°F (-30 to +80°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Agency Listings		UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX2 Canadian UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX8
Dimensions (H x W x D)	Panel Mount	1.38 x 2.95 x 2.68 in. (35 x 75 x 68 mm)
	DIN Rail	4.65 x 2.76 x 2.07 in. (118 x 70 x 53 mm)

Electrical Ratings

	120 VAC	240 VAC	24 VDC
Horsepower	1/4	1/2	—
Full Load Amperes	5.8	4.9	—
Locked Rotor Amperes	34.8	29.4	—
Inductive (Non-Motor) Amperes	8	8	8
Pilot Duty VA	275	450	—

Note: Relay outputs must not exceed 20 Amperes total connected load. Open collector transistors on the MS1 Alarm Circuits have a maximum rating of 40 VDC 100 mA. Alarms require separate power source.

Refer to Ratings Table for more information

Internal to Control

Stage Stage

Power

Stage

Stage Supply

2 4

Common

Binary Input

Auxiliary Temperature Sensor

Process Sensor

Binary/Sensor Common

V1	V2	D		S2	SC		S1

Terminal Not Used

Binary Input

Sensor Common

Process Sensor

Binary and Sensor Common

Auxiliary Temperature Stage Sensor

SC D CD S2 C2

Internal to Control

V1 V2

C1 1

C3 3

Stage 1 Stage 4 Stage 3

Power Supply

See Ratings Table for more information

MS4PM24T Panel Mount Control Wiring MS4DR24T Din Rail Mount Control Wiring

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1900009

MS Series Single-Stage Control Modules with Voltage Input

Description

The MS Series Controls are versatile, microprocessor-based, multifunction, programmable controls for humidity, pressure, or other 0 to 10 VDC input. They are designed for single- and multiple-stage control applications.

Depending on the model selected, the MS Series Control can operate in one of several modes:

Direct mode
Reverse mode
Deadband mode
Independent Setpoint mode

The MS Series Controls have large, easy-to-read, red LED displays. These

compact controls are available in panel mount and DIN rail mount models.

Refer to the MS Series Multi-Stage Electronic Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125502) for important product application information.

Applications

Application	MS1 Series Single-Stage
Rooftop heating or cooling units	
Boiler or pump control	
Convenience store coolers	
Space temperature control	
Cooling tower pump control	

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Description
MS1DR24T-11C	MS1 Single-Stage thermostat, DIN Rail Mount Control; A99 sensor included
MS1DR24V-11C	MS1 Single-Stage, DIN Rail Mount Control; 0 to10 VDC input; no sensor included

Accessories

Product Code Number

Description

HE-6300-3

HE-6310-3

Humidity Sensor: 0 to 100% RH noncondensing

20 to 140°F (-29 to 60°C)

Technical Specifications

Features

programmable functions allow adjustment of control settings to meet application needs
alarm management functions provide visible alarm codes on the display and alarm relay contacts that can be used to activate a remote alarm or dial-out modem
easily readable LED display shows condition and functions quickly and clearly
programming button lockout allows user to disable programming buttons to deter accidental or unauthorized changes
provides accurate control performance with up to 300 feet of wiring (an adjustable offset is provided for longer wiring.)
self-test procedure checks control operation by cycling all outputs and testing all LEDs

MS1 Series DIN Rail Mount, Single-Stage, Electronic Pressure, Temperator

Repair Information

If the MS Series Single-Stage Control Modules with Voltage Input fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

MS Series Stage Control Modules with Voltage Input
Power Requirements	24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2 (20 to 30 VAC)
Power Consumption	5 VA at 24 VAC
Accuracy	 1.8°F ( 1°C)

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls

Electrical Ratings

MS Series Stage Control Modules with Voltage Input
Ambient Conditions	Operating	+14 to +140°F (-10 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
	Storage	-22 to +176°F (-30 to +80°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Agency Listings		UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX2 Canadian UL Recognized: File E194024, CCN XAPX8
Dimensions (H x W x D)	Panel Mount	1.38 x 2.95 x 2.68 in. (35 x 75 x 68 mm)
	DIN Rail	4.65 x 2.76 x 2.07 in. (118 x 70 x 53 mm)

MS Series Single-Stage Control Modules with Voltage Input (Continued)

	120 VAC	240 VAC	24 VDC
Horsepower	1/4	1/2	—
Full Load Amperes	5.8	4.9	—
Locked Rotor Amperes	34.8	29.4	—
Inductive (Non-Motor) Amperes	8	8	8
Pilot Duty VA	275	450	—

Note: Relay outputs must not exceed 20 Amperes total connected load. Open collector transistors on the MS1 Alarm Circuits have a maximum rating of 40 VDC 100 mA. Alarms require separate power source.

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Controls Code No. LIT-1927375

Description

MS4PMUHVT Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack

- Surface Mounted Design (SMD)

The MS4PMUHVT Control is intended for multi-stage temperature control applications. This microprocessor based control offers innovative features and state-of-the-art technology to improve all your staged temperature control applications.

Refer to the MS4PMUHVT Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack Product Bulletin (LIT-125195) for important product application information.

Features

four enclosed, line voltage relays provide direct control of motor loads without additional relays
120/240 VAC power supply eliminates need for separate transformers
one control provides single-sensor multi-stage control or dual-sensor reset

control, which reduces need for warehouse or truck to stock multiple controls for similar applications

accepts A99 sensor signal, which is suitable for a wide range of applications

Selection Charts

technology assures high quality, reliable components in a compact package

keypad lock deters accidental changes to parameter settings
listed for use on refrigeration equipment in accordance with Canadian and U.S. National standards

Applications

This control is specifically designed for the control of four-stage applications in the following configurations:

four cooling stages with common setpoint
four heating stages with common setpoint
four stages with deadband (two heating stages and two cooling stages with common setpoint)
two independent sets of two dependent stages (two heating stages and two cooling stages with independent setpoints)

Repair Information

If the MS4PMUHVT Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

MS4PMUHVT Electronic Temperature Control

MS4PMUHV Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack

MS4PMUHVT Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with Relay Pack
Power Requirements		120 VAC ±10% or 240 VAC ±10%
Frequency		60/50 Hz
Power Consumption		10 VA at 240 VAC, 10 VA at 120 VAC
Sensor Range		-40 to 158°F (-40 to +70°C)
Accuracy		±1 F°/±1 C°
Ambient Operating Conditions	MS4PMUHVT-11C	+14 to +140°F (-10 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
	MS4PM12CT-11C	+14 to +140°F (-10 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
	RP4MSUHV-1C	-40 to +140°F (-40 to +60°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Ambient Storage Conditions	MS4PMUHVT-11C	-22 to +176°F (-30 to +80°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
	MS4PM12CT-11C	-22 to +176°F (-30 to +80°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
	RP4MSUHV-1C	-40 to +185°F (-40 to +85°C); 0 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Agency Listings		UL File SA516, Guide SDFY cUL File SA516, Guide SDFY7
Emissions Compliance		FCC (US), DOC (Canada)
Dimensions (H x W x D)		7.94 x 3-3/5 x 2-2/5 in. (202 x 92 x 61 mm)
Shipping Weight		2.9 lb (1,320 g)

Product Code Number

Description

MS4PMUHVT-11C

Multi-Stage Electronic Temperature Control with

Relay Pack and One Temperature Sensor

Accessories and Maintenance Parts

Product Code Number	Description
A99BB-200C	Sensor with 6-1/2 ft/1.98 m Cable Length
MS4PM12CT-11C	Replacement Control (for use only with relay pack)
RP4MSUHV-1C	Replacement Relay Pack without Control

Electrical Ratings per Relay

	24 VAC	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC
HP	—	1/3	3/4	1
FLA (Ampere)	—	7.2	7.6	8
LRA (Ampere)	—	43.2	45.6	48
Non-Inductive (Ampere)	—	8	8	8
Pilot Duty (VA)	50	325	625	750

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories Code No. LIT-1900006

A99B Series Temperature Sensor

Description

The A99B Series Temperature Sensors are passive PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) sensors. The A99B sensors are splashproof and are designed to measure temperature in a variety of refrigeration applications. Several accessories allow easy tailoring of the temperature sensor to various mounting configurations.

Applications include temperature sensing for freezers and coolers, as well as in defrost termination sensing, space and return air temperature sensing, and condenser fan cycling.

Refer to the A99B Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-125186) for important product application information.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Description
A99BA-200C	PTC Silicon Sensor with Shielded Cable; Cable length 6-1/2 ft (2 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
A99BB-25C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 9-3/4 in. (0.25 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
A99BB-200C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 6-1/2 ft (2 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
A99BB-300C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 9-3/4 ft (3 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
A99BB-500C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 16-3/8 ft (5 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
A99BB-600C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable length 19-1/2 ft (6 m); Range: -40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
A99BC-25C	PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable length 9-3/4 in. (0.25 m); Range: -40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C)
A99BC-300C	PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable length 9-3/4 ft (3 m); Range: -40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C)
A99BC-500C	PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable length 16-3/8 ft (5 m); Range: -40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C)
A99BC-1500C	PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable length 49 ft (15 m); Range: -40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C)

Features

variety of lead lengths available to encompass most application requirements and simplify wiring sensors
an assortment of mounting hardware provides configurations for many applications
exceptional accuracy of sensing element provides excellent performance in a wide variety of control applications
stainless steel sensing bulb allows use in more applications than other types of bulbs without corrosion
lead length may be extended up to 800 ft (244 m)

Applications

A99B Temperature Sensors

Repair Information

If the A99B Series Temperature Sensor fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement sensor, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Accessories

The A99B temperature sensor line offers an economical solution for a wide variety of temperature sensing needs in refrigeration and HVAC applications.

Typical temperature sensing applications and environments include:

freezers
display cases
walk-in coolers
reach-in coolers
defrost termination temperature sensing
condenser fan cycling
space and return air temperature sensing
outdoor air sensing
process cooling and heating

Technical Specifications

A99B Series Temperature Sensor
Sensing Range	A99BA A99BB	-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C)
	A99BC	-40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C)
Reference Resistance		1,035 ohms at 77°F (25°C)
Accuracy		0.9°F (0.5°C) between 5 and 167°F (-15 and 75°C)
Sensor Construction		Stainless steel probe
Sensor Lead Wire Insulation	A99BA	Shielded PVC cable
	A99BB	PVC cable
	A99BC	High temperature silicon cable
Lead Wire Gauge		22 AWG
Maximum Allowable Bulb Temperature		257°F (125°C)
Ambient Operating Conditions	A99BA A99BB	-40 to 212°F (-40 to 100°C); 0 to 100% RH, condensing
	A99BC	-40 to 248°F (-40 to 120°C); 0 to 100% RH, condensing
Ambient Storage Conditions	A99BA A99BB	40 to 221°F (-40 to 105°C); 0 to 100% RH, condensing
	A99BC	-40 to 266°F (-40 to 130°C); 0 to 100% RH, condensing

Product Code Number	Description
A99-CLP-1	Surface Mounting Clip for the A99B Temperature Sensor
ADP11A-600R	1/2 in. diameter EMT Conduit Adaptor (box of 10) for use with BOX10A-600R
BOX10A-600R	PVC Enclosure
SHL10A-600R	Sun Shield for Single Sensor
SHL10A-603R	Sun Shield for Two Sensors
WEL11A-601R	Immersion Well

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories Code No. LIT-1922135

Bulb Wells

Description

Bulb Wells are used in conjunction with Remote Bulb Temperature Controls where bulb insertion into a vessel or container to sense temperature is required. These wells are used with TE-6000 and TE-6300 Series Sensors.

A variety of shapes, sizes, and materials are available for a wide range of applications.

Refer to the appropriate temperature control for the exact bulb well required.

Accessories

The Code No. FTG13A-600R Packing Nut Assembly is used in applications where the temperature does not fall below -35°F (-37°C). The maximum liquid pressure limit is 150 psig (1,034 kPa). Use with Style 1, 3/8 in. diameter bulb for direct immersion application. A19s require models with support tube; A70s and A72s do not need support tubes.

Selection Charts

WEL Series Bulb Wells

Repair Information

If the Bulb Wells fail to operate within thier specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement Bulb Well, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

WEL Series Bulb Well

WEL Series Bulb Wells

FIG:Wel_3

FIG:Wel_2

FTG13A-600R

Packing Nut

Interlocking Retainer Washers

½ in. N.P.T. Adaptor

Style 1

Bulb Support Tube

FIG:Wel_1

FIG:FTG13A_600R

Product Code

Number

See

Figure

Dimension, in.

Pipe Thread, in.

Material

Maximum

Temp °F

Maximum

Pressure psig

Type of

Solder Joint

Plating

Inside

Outside

Connector

Tube

WEL11A-601R1

2-3/8

2-5/16

.299

–

1/2

Brass

Copper

250

300

Soft

–

WZ-1000-22

5-1/4

1-1/4

.500

1/2

Stainless steel

300

400

–

WZ-1000-4

5-1/4

1-1/4

.500

1/2

Stainless steel

600

400

–

WZ-1000-52

2-3/8

2-5/16

.299

–

1/2

Malleable

Brass

250

300

–

WEL14A-601R 3

7-9/16

1-13/16

.430

–

1/2

Brass

Copper

250

300

Silver

Brite-Dip

WEL14A-602R 3

4-15/16

1-13/16

.430

–

1/2

Brass

Copper

250

300

Silver

Brite-Dip

WEL14A-603R 3

5-13/16

1 13/16

.430

–

1/2

Brass

Copper

250

300

Silver

Brite-Dip

WEL16A-600R1

2-3/8

1-5/16

.299

–

1/2

Brass

Copper

250

300

Soft

–

WEL16A-601R

2-13/16

1-13/16

.375

–

1/2

Brass

Copper

250

300

Soft

–

WEL17A-600R3

10-7/16

3/4

.763

1/2

3/4

Malleable

Copper

250

Silver

Tin

WEL17A-601R3

8-11/16

3/4

.763

1/2

3/4

Malleable

Copper

250

Silver

Tin

WEL17A-602R3

10-7/16

3/4

.753

1/2

3/4

Malleable

Steel

250

540

Silver

Tin

WEL17A-604R3

14-13/32

3/4

.763

1/2

3/4

Malleable

Copper

250

Silver

Tin

WEL18A-600R3

3-1/2

3/4

.773

1/2

3/4

Malleable

Steel

250

150

Silver

Tin

WEL18A-602R3

3-1/2

3/4

.773

1/2

3/4

Malleable

Brass

250

150

Silver

Tin

With phenolic bushing 0.093 in. slot
Includes thermal compound
For 11/16 in. diameter style 4 bulbs. Style 1 can be used, but is not fastened into well

T-800 Wells

Product Code Number	Description
T-800-1605	Brass well, 6-1/2 inch
T-800-1606	Stainless steel well, 5-1/4 inch
T-800-1618	Brass well, 9-1/2 inch
T-800-1620	Brass well, 9-1/2 inch

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories Code No. LIT-1922145

G Series Thermostat and Humidistat Guards

GRD10-1R

Wire Guard

GRD10A-601

Cast Aluminum Guard

GRD10A-608

Large Clear Plastic Guard

GRD10A-609

Rectangular Clear Plastic Guard

Description

The G Series Guards protect thermostats and humidistats from damage, vandalism, tampering, and unauthorized adjustment.

They are available in plastic, cast aluminum, or wire construction.

Features

• clear plastic guards have tumbler-type key locks

• GRD10A-608 and -609 include a mounting ring for mounting to a wall or flat surface

• plastic baseplate and plastic mounting ring available

• the baseplate mounts to a flat surface or to a single or double outlet box

• the mounting ring permits mounting over a thermostat or humidistat already installed

Applications

Ideal for locations where locked protection is required, such as schools, warehouses, churches, hospitals, or offices.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Description	Thermostat or Humidistat Series Number
Product Code Number	Description	T22	T25	T26	T28 No Switches	T91
GRD10-1R	Wire guard only		—		—	
GRD10A-600	Wire guard and baseplate		—		—	
GRD10A-601	Aluminum guard and baseplate		—			
GRD10A-606	Plastic guard with baseplate			—		
GRD10A-608	Plastic guard with baseplate, mounting ring					
GRD10A-609	Plastic guard with baseplate, mounting ring					

Repair Parts

Replacement key KEY12A-600 (set of two) is available.

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories

G Series Thermostat and Humidistat Guards (Continued)

6-3/4 (171)

(64)

2-2/3

(68)

3-3/8 (86)

6-1/5 (157)

6-3/4 (171)

1-2/5 (36)

3-5/8

(92)

4-1/5

(106)

(127)

2-7/8 (73)

1-5/8 (41)

4-3/4 (121)

grd10a_dm.eps

7-2/3 (195)

3-2/3 (94)

6-3/8 (162)

4-3/4 (121)

3-1/3 (84)

1-5/8 (41)

4-1/5

(106)

2-2/3

(68)

5-4/5 (148)

5-1/3 (135)

4-2/3 (119)

6-5/9

(167)

1-5/8

(41)

grd10a_dm2.eps

3-1/3

(84)

G Series Dimensions, in. (mm)

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories Code No. LIT-1922285

T22, T25, T26, T28, T46, and T91 Accessories

Description

Replacement Knob and Cover Kits

Replacement Knob Kit numbers KNB17A-600R, KNB20A-600R, and

KNB26A-600R are designed as direct replacements for original equipment knobs.

Faceplates

Faceplates are available with metal or plastic covers.

Thermostat Trim Plates

Trim plate PLT231-1R is for mounting two wall thermostats such as T22, T25, T26, T58, T91 or one thermostat and one humidistat on a three-gang electrical box. The PLT61A-600 is a similar three-gang plate but with one cutout and a 3/8 in. hole for mounting accessory switches.

These plates are finished in tawny silver to complement the design of the thermostat and humidistat.

PLT61A-600 Faceplate

Selection Charts

Replacement Knob and Cover Kits

Product Code Number	Description	Replacement Knob For
KNB17A-600R	Includes two plastic knobs	T91, T22, T25, and T26 with metal knob and metal cover
KNB20A-600R	Includes one plastic knob	T26 and W43 with plastic knob and metal cover
KNB26A-600R	Includes one plastic knob with trim disc	T26, T46, and W43 with plastic cover

Faceplates

Product Code Number	Mounting Position	Type of Adjustment	Cutout for Thermometer	Use With	Temperature Scale
Faceplates for T22, T25, T26, T80, T91, and W43 with Metal Cover
PLT213-6R	Vertical	Concealed	No	T26, T91BA, W43 with metal cover	None
Faceplates for T26, W43 AND W45 with Plastic Cover
PLT333-1R	Vertical	Knob	Yes	T26, T46	Fahrenheit
PLT333-2R	Horizontal	Knob	Yes	T26	Fahrenheit
PLT333-3R	Vertical	Concealed	Yes	T26, T46	Fahrenheit
PLT333-4R	Horizontal	Concealed	Yes	T26	Fahrenheit
PLT333-5R	Vertical	Knob	Yes	T26, T46	Celsius
PLT333-12R	Vertical	Concealed	No	T26, T46, and W43	None

Trim Plates

Product Code Number	Description	Replacement Trim Plate For
PLT231-1R	Tawny silver trim plate	T22, T25, T26, T28, T58, T91, W42, W43

Temperature Control Sensors and Accessories Code No. LIT-1922280

T91 Series Room Temperature Sensor

Description

The T91 Series Temperature Sensor is a solid state thermistor sensor detects temperature changes in a room or similar space.

Series T91 Sensors may be used directly with Series M100Q Motor Actuators.

Refer to the T91 Thermistor Room Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin (LIT-125675) for important product application information.

Applications

Use for room or space temperature sensing to position sequencers or actuators for heating and/or cooling systems.

Selection Chart

Features

• highly sensitive thermistor sensing element

• fast response

• integral Fan and System switch options

• vertical or horizontal mounting

• three types of adjusters: external knob, concealed knob, or provisions for remote setpoint

• easy to install and wire

• separable mounting plate with screws saves installation time

Repair Information

If the T91 Series Room Temperature Sensor fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement sensor, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

T91 Series Room Temperature Sensor

Product Code Number1	Range °F (°C)	Thermometer	Setpoint Adjustment	Switches
Product Code Number1	Range °F (°C)	Thermometer	Setpoint Adjustment	Fan	System
T91BAA-1C	40/90 (5/32)	No	Remote	–	–
T91BBA-1C	40/90 (5/32)	No	Concealed	–	–
T91BCA-1C	40/90 (5/32)	Yes	Knob	–	–

1. Supplied with vertical faceplate installed.

Technical Specifications

T91 Series Room Temperature Sensor
Ambient Temperature	-40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C)
Baseplate	0.050 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel with dichromate dip finish
Cover	0.025 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel. Baked on tawny silver finish. Faceplate is aluminum with dark brown and light brown finish. Letters and markings are bright aluminum surface.
Electrical Rating for Switches	5 A at 24 VAC
Wiring Connections	6 in. No. 18 color coded wire leads

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927175

P10 Series Low Pressure Control

Description

The P10 Series Pressure Controls open or close electrical circuits from a change in operating air pressure. R to Y terminals make (cut-in) on pressure rise

Refer to the P10 Series Low Range Pressure Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125400) for important product application information.

P10 Series

Action on Increase of Pressure

p10.eps

P10 Series Action Diagram

Selection Chart

Features

• visible calibrated adjustable range scale

• snap-acting switch in a dust protected enclosure

• easily accessible wiring terminals

Applications

• pneumatic systems

• control of pumps or small air compressors

Accessories

• universal mounting bracket

No. BKT16A-600 as well as a barbed fitting supplied as standard

• model P10FC-4 has a jumper installed on the common terminals

Repair Information

If the P10 Series Low Pressure Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P10BC-7

with Bracket No. BKT16A-600R

Product Code Number	No. of Stages	Contact Action	Range psi (kPa)	Factory Setting				Pressure Connector
Product Code Number	No. of Stages	Contact Action	Range psi (kPa)	psig (kPa)		Switch Diff psi (kPa)		Pressure Connector
P10BC-7C	1	Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)	3 to 20 (21 to 138)	12 (R to Y Cut-in)		2		Barbed Fitting
P10BG-3C	1	SPDT	2 to 20 (15 to 138)	12 (R to Y Cut-in)		0.2		1/8 in. Internal NPSF
P10BJ-1C	1	SPDT	3 to 20 (21 to 138)	12 (R to Y Cut-in)		2		1/8 in. Internal NPSF
P10FC-4C	2	SPDT	3 to 20 (21 to 138)	(R-Y Cutout) Low Stage 8 (55)	(R-Y Cut-in) High Stage 12 (82)	Low Stage 2 (14)	High Stage 2 (14)	1/8 in. Barbed Fitting
P10PA-11C	3	SPST	3 to 20 (21 to 138)	Stage One Open High 6 (41)	Stages Two & Three Open High 18 (120)	Stage One 3 (21)	Stages Two & Three 0.4 (3)	1/8 in. Barbed Fitting

Technical Specifications

• model P10BJ-1 is rated for 24 A non-inductive when used as a

single-pole, single-throw (SPST) (R-Y). (See Electrical Ratings chart below.) maximum allowable pressure is 150 psig (1,034 kPa) maximum ambient temperature is 140°F (60°C) Electrical Ratings (Part 1 of 2)						Motor Ratings VAC		120	208	240	277	600
						AC Locked Rotor A		96.0	55.2	48.0	42	–
						Non-Inductive A	Double Throw	16.0	16.0	16.0	16.0	16.0
						Non-Inductive A	Single Throw	24.0	24.0	24.0	24.0	24.0
						Pilot Duty		125 VA, 24 to 600 VAC
Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277	600	P10FC-4
P10BC-7						AC Full Load A		16.0	9.2	8.0	7.0	–
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.0	–	AC Locked Rotor A		96.0	55.2	48.0	42.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	42.0	–	Non-Inductive A		16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2	–
Non-Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2	–	Pilot Duty		125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC On two- and three-stage models, maximum connected load shall not exceed 2,000 VA
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC
P10BG-3
P10BG-3						P10PA-11
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0	–	–	P10PA-11
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18.0	–	–	AC Full Load A		6.0	3.4	3.0	–	–
Non-Inductive A	6.0	3.4	3.0	2.6	–	AC Locked Rotor A		36.0	20.4	18.0	–	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC					Non-Inductive A		6.0	3.4	3.0	–	–
P10BJ-1						Pilot Duty		125 VA, 24 to 277 VAC On two- and three- stage models, maximum connected load shall not exceed 2,000 VA
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7	–	Pilot Duty

Electrical Ratings (Part 2 of 2)

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927180

P20 Series Air Conditioning/Pressure Cutout Control

Description

The P20 Series are field replacement high and low pressure controls for non-corrosive refrigerants. They include a dust-tight contact unit with quick connect connectors, and a

36 in. or 42 in. capillary with 1/4 in. sweat section. The setpoint is screwdriver adjustable.

Refer to the P20, P21 Series Air Conditioning Limit Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125415) for important product application information.

Features

• accurate repeatability

• compact size

• trip-free manual reset

Applications

• air conditioning high/low pressure control

• refrigeration high/low pressure control

• head pressure control

Repair Information

If the P20 Series Air Conditioning/Pressure Cutout Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P20DB-1 Air Conditioning/ Pressure Cutout Control

SPST

Construction

SPDT

Construction

Red Red

Blue

(Open High)

Yellow (Open Low)

Blue

(Open High)

Seal

White: Open Low Control Red: Open High Control

Low Range High Ranges

Control action is identified by

p20spst.eps

colored sealing compound or terminal markings on switch.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number1	Pressure Connections	Switch Action	Range psi (kPa)	Differential psi (kPa)	Factory Setting, psig (kPa)		Max. Bellows Pressure psig (kPa)	Max. Temp.
Product Code Number1	Pressure Connections	Switch Action	Range psi (kPa)	Differential psi (kPa)	Opens	Closes	Max. Bellows Pressure psig (kPa)	Max. Temp.
P20BB-1C2	36 in. capillary 1/4 in. sweat tube	Open on fall	7 to 150 (48 to 1,034)	Manual reset	40 (276)	Lockout	250 (1,724)	140°F
P20DB-1C3	36 in. capillary 1/4 in. sweat tube	Open on rise	100 to 425 (690 to 2,930)	Manual reset	400 (2,758)	Lockout	450 (3,103)
P20GB-1C	42 in. capillary 1/4 in. sweat tube	Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) Open on rise	100 to 425 (690 to 2,930)	Manual reset	360 (2,482)	Lockout	450 (3,103)
P20EB-1C4	36 in. capillary 1/4 in. sweat tube	SPDT	7 to 150 (48 to 1,034)	30 (172) fixed	40 (276)	70 (448)	250 (1,724)
P20EB-18C	42 in. capillary 1/4 in. sweat tube	SPDT	7 to 150 (48 to 1,034)	22 (152) fixed	15 (103)	37 (255)	250 (1,724)
P20EB-2C5	36 in. capillary 1/4 in. sweat tube	SPDT	100 to 425 (690 to 2,930)	75 (483) fixed	400 (2,758)	324 (2,275)	450 (3,103)

1. Mounting bracket supplied on all models.

2. Replaces Ranco® G20-4412; Robertshaw® 3126-216, 3160-212

3. Replaces Ranco G23-5253; Robertshaw 3127-220, 3161-205; Honeywell® P430X-1250, 1268, 1292, 1300

4. Replaces Ranco G20-4050; Robertshaw 3126-116, 3160-012, 3160-014; Honeywell P431X-1092, 1100

5. Replaces Ranco G23-5052; Robertshaw 3127-140, 3127-414, 3161-009; Honeywell P430X, 1235, 1243, 1276, 1284

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

Accessories

P20 Series Air Conditioning/Pressure Cutout Control

Product Code Number	Description
210-604R	Black phenolic resin spring clip snap-on insulated terminal cover

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.0
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	42.0
SPDT	16.0	16.0	16.0	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA at 24 VAC, 720 VA at 120 to 277 VAC

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927190

P29 Series Low Pressure Control with Time Delay

Description

P29NC is a low pressure control with time delay and lockout, which requires manual reset. A drop in pressure energizes the time delay relay and opens a contact after the time delay, shutting down the equipment. The time delay prevents nuisance shutdowns due to momentary fluctuations in system pressures.

Refer to the P29 Series Low Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay Relay Product Bulletin (LIT-125425) for important product application information.

Features

• direct reading scale indication

• dust-protected snap action switch

• trip-free manual reset

• replacement timing relays available

Selection Chart

Applications

• chiller low temperature

• industrial equipment, oil pressure lubrication

• low suction pressure

Technical Specifications

• pilot duty rating of 750 VA, 120/240 VAC

• external step down transformer for 440 and 550 VAC applications must be of sufficient capacity to supply 15 VA at 120 VAC or 30 VA at 240 VAC for time delay

Accessories

• universal mounting bracket (271-51)

• replacement timing relays (Refer to Replacement Timing Relays for P28 and P29 Lube Oil Controls Catalog Page [LIT-1927395].)

P29 Series Low Pressure Control

Repair Information

If the P29 Series Low Pressure Control with Time Delay fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Product Code

Number

Switch

Action

Pressure

Range

Differential

psi (kPa)

Max Overpressure

psig (kPa)

Max Working Pressure

psig (kPa)

Pressure

Connection

Time Delay

Setting

P29NC-2C

Single-Pole,

Single-Throw (SPST)

20 in. Hg Vacuum

to 100 psig

(-68 to 690 kPa)

2.2 ±1.5

(15.2 ±10.3)

325

(2,241)

250

(1,723)

1/4 in. external

flare fitting

60 seconds

(factory set)

P29NC-3C

36 in. copper

capillary tube

with 1/4 in. flare nut

P29NC-49C

120 seconds

P29NC-53C

90 seconds

P29NF-1C1

120 seconds

1. With alarm contacts

Example: Setpoint at 10 psig. On a rise in pressure, the timing circuit opens at 10 psig and time out ends. On a fall in pressure, the timing circuit energizes at 6 to 9 psig and the time out begins. If the pressure fails to reach 10 psig within the 60 second time delay, the main contacts open, shutting down the controlled equipment.

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927205

P47 Series Steam Pressure Limit Control

Description

The P47 Controls are available with single-pole, single-throw (SPST), double-pole, single-throw (DPST), or

four-wire, two-circuit contacts for line voltage or low voltage. The pressure connector is 1/4 in. external NPT (0 to 15 psi only) or

1/4 in. internal NPT (for all other ranges).

Refer to the P47 Series Steam Pressure Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125450) for important product application information.

Features

• long-life contact structure with high contact force

• easy-to-adjust single sight set scales show both cut-in and cut-out settings

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range psi (kPa)	Diff psi (kPa)		Max. Over-pressure psig (kPa)
Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range psi (kPa)	Min.	Max.	Max. Over-pressure psig (kPa)
Contacts Open On Rise – Automatic Reset
P47AA-1C	SPST	0 to 15 (0 to 103)	2 (14)	8 (55)	50 (345)
P47AA-4C		20 in. Hg to 50 (-68 to 345)	5 (34)	35 (241)	180 (1,241)
P47AA-13C		0 to 150 (0 to 1,034)	12 (83)	50 (345)	325 (2,241)
Contacts Close On Rise – Automatic Reset
P47BA-1C	SPST	0 to 15 (0 to 103)	2 (14)	8 (55)	50 (345)
P47BA-6C	SPST	0 to 150 (0 to 1,034)	12 (83)	50 (345)	325 (2,241)
Four-Wire, Two Circuit1 – Automatic Reset
P47GA-9C1	Main open high; Auxiliary open low	0 to 150 (0 to 1,034)	12 (83)	50 (345)	325 (2,241)
P47AB-3C	SPST	50 to 240 (345 to 1,655)	Manual reset		300 (2,069)
P47EA-1C	SPDT	50 to 240 (345 to 1,655)	10 (69) Fixed		300 (2,069)

Applications

P47 steam pressure controls are designed for high limit or operating control applications. A typical use is as a limit control on steam heating systems. Models that close on a pressure increase are used on steam unit heaters to avoid blower operation when steam pressure is below the point required for adequate heating. The P47 can be used with steam, water, air, or noncombustible gases that do not harm iron or copper.

Accessories

The Part No. TBG16A-600 Siphon is supplied with all controls except models with

0 to 15 psi range.

P47AA-1 Steam Pressure Limit Control

Repair Information

If the P47 Series Steam Pressure Limit Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

1. The main contacts (Line-M2) open on rise, as the auxiliary contacts (Line-M1) close.

P47AA

Opens on Pressure Rise

P47BA

Closes on Pressure Rise

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings for P47AA, P47AB, and P47BA

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	–
AC Non-Inductive A	16.0	16.0	16.0	16.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

Electrical Ratings for P47EA

p47ga_1.eps

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	–
AC Non-Inductive A	16.0	10.0	10.0	10.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 227 VAC

Electrical Ratings for P47GA

p47ga_2.eps

Pole Number	Line-M2 (Main)				Line-M1 (Auxiliary)
Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277	120	208	240	277
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–	6.0	3.3	3.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	–	36.0	19.8	18.0	–
AC Non-Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2	6.0	6.0	6.0	6.0
Pilot Duty: Both Poles	125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

SPST

P4 7 G A

Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Action on Pressure Rise

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927215

P67 Series Low Pressure Control

Description

P67 pressure controls are used to close or open an electrical circuit, based on a predetermined air pressure signal. The operating point of the control and the differential, are easy to adjust with the externally located adjustment screws on the top of the control enclosure. The pressure controls incorporate a non-metallic diaphragm that is positioned by air pressure changes. The diaphragm, in turn, actuates a heavy-duty electrical contact block using a lever mechanism.

Refer to the P67 Series Low Range Pressure Control Product Bulletin (LIT-121445) for important product application information.

Selection Chart

Features

• long-life contact structure, high contact force

• easy-to-adjust settings: single sight-set scales show both cut-in and cut-out settings

Applications

Typical applications include the control of air compressors, fans, pilot lights, resistance heating elements, and other devices.

P67 Series Low Pressure Control with 271-350 Mounting Bracket

Repair Information

Product

Code Number

Control

Action

Scale

Range psi1 (kPa)

Temp.

Range

Diff.

psi (kPa)

Maximum

Over- pressure psig (kPa)

Connector

P67AA-1C

Double-Pole, Single-Throw

(DPST) opens on pressure drop

3 to 30

(21 to

207)

32 to

140°F

0 to 60°C

1-1/2-20

(10 to 138)

Adjustable

50 (345)

Angle

Barbed Fitting

P67CA-1C

DPST opens on pressure rise

P67EA-5C

L-M2 contacts connect on

pressure rise and simultaneously the L-M1 contacts break

1/8 in.

External NPT

If the P67 Series Low Pressure Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

1. Range is minimum cut-out to maximum cut-in on Open Low controls. It is minimum cut-in to maximum cut-out on Open High controls.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings for P67AA and P67CA

Electrical Ratings for P67EA and P67FA

Pole Number	LINE-M2 (Main)				LINE-M1 (Auxiliary)
Motor Rating VAC	120	208	240	277	120	208	240	277
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–	6.0	3.3	3.0	–
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	–	36.0	19.8	18.0	–
AC Non-Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2	6.0	6.0	6.0	6.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

Motor Ratings VAC	1 Phase				2 – 3 Phase
Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240	277	208	240
AC Full Load A	12.0	12.0	12.0	–	12.0	12.0
AC Locked Rotor A	72.0	72.0	72.0	–	72.0	72.0
AC Non-Inductive A	12.0	12.0	12.0	12.0	–	–
DC Non-Inductive A	3.0	0.5	0.5	–	–	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

P67 Wiring Diagram (no alarm) P67 Dimensions, in. (mm)

Line

Load

Action on

Pressure Increase

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927220

P70, P72 Approximate Low Pressure Settings for Typical Applications

Vacuum – in. Hg	Approximate Temperature °F		Pressure – psig1
Application			Refrigerant
			R-12		R-22		R-502		R-717		R-134A
	Cut-Out	Cut-In	Cut-Out	Cut-In	Cut-Out	Cut-In	Cut-Out	Cut-In	Cut-Out	Cut-In	Cut-Out	Cut-In
Ice Cube Maker – Dry Type Coil	-11	14	4	17	16	37	22	45	–	–	2	15
Sweet Water Bath – Soda Fountain	20	31	21	29	43	56	52	66	33	45	18	26
Beer, Water, Milk Cooler, Wet Type	17	31	19	29	40	56	48	66	–	–	16	26
Ice Cream Trucks, Hardening Rooms	-16	10	2	15	13	34	18	41	5	24	0	13
Eutectic Plates, Ice Cream Truck	-21	-11	1	4	11	16	16	22	4	8	1	2
Walk In, Defrost Cycle	9	37	14	34	32	64	40	75	23	55	12	32
Reach In, Defrost Cycle	20	39	19	36	40	68	48	78	30	57	16	36
Vegetable Display, Defrost Cycle	7	38	13	35	30	66	38	77	–	–	10	34
Vegetable Display Case – Open Type	12	45	16	42	35	77	44	89	–	–	14	40
Beverage Cooler, Blower Dry Type	11	37	15	34	34	64	42	75	24	55	12	32
Retail Florist – Blower Coil	29	45	28	42	55	77	65	89	44	67	26	40
Meat Display Case – Defrost Cycle	19	38	17	35	37	66	45	77	–	–	15	34
Meat Display Case – Open Type	4	28	11	27	27	53	35	63	–	–	8	25
Dairy Case – Open Type	2	38	10	35	26	66	33	77	–	–	16	34
Frozen Food – Open Type	-32	-9	7	5	4	17	8	24	–	–	10	3

1. Conversion factor: 1 psig = 6.9 kPa

Note: These settings represent approximate starting values. Actual values may vary widely, depending on application-specific guidelines.

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1900170

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications

Description

The P70, P72, and P170 Controls for low pressure applications are designed primarily for low pressure cut-out control, pump-down control, and capacity control on commercial refrigeration and air conditioning applications.

These controls are available in several pressure ranges and are compatible with most common refrigerants. They may also be used on other non-corrosive fluid applications. Ammonia-compatible models are also available.

Controls also are available in several different electrical ratings and switch configurations. The P72 models provide direct control of 208 to 240 volt single-phase motors up to

3 horsepower, and 208 to 220 volt

three-phase motors up to 5 horsepower.

Refer to the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications Product Bulletin (Part No. 24-7664-2608) for important product application information.

Features

• all-steel case and cover built to provide long lasting, rugged protection for internal components

• sight-set calibrated pressure adjustment displays a visible pressure scale, fully adjustable through the range without removing the cover (on NEMA 1 enclosure models)

• MICRO-SET™ differential option allows for precise control on critical low pressure applications

• manual reset lockout option provides

trip-free low pressure lockout that cannot be overridden or reset until pressure returns to specified level

• limited knob adjustment option restricts control adjustment ranges and deters tampering and over-adjustment

Applications

NEMA 1 enclosures are standard on most models.

• P70A and P170A models with single-pole, single-throw (SPST)

Open Low switch action are the most popular models, and are typically used for low pressure cut-out and pump-down control.

• P70 and P170 models are also available with SPST Open High switch action, and are typically used for capacity control. Models with single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) or four-wire, two-circuit switch action allow users to install alarm devices or other control circuits.

• P72 models have a double-pole, single-throw (DPST) switch with

load-carrying contacts that can provide direct control of 208 to 240 V single-phase motors up to 3 horsepower, and 208 to 220 V 3-phase motors up to 5 horsepower. See the DPST Electrical Ratings (P72A, B, C, and D Models) that follow.

P70AB-12 MICRO-SET

Low Pressure Control

Repair Information

If the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications fail to operate within their specifications, replace the units. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications (Continued)

Selection Chart for Standard P70, P72, and P170 Controls for Low Pressure Applications

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range psi (kPa)	Differential psi (kPa)	Pressure Connection	Max. Overpressure	Max. Working Pressure	Limited Knob Adjustment
MICRO-SET Controls (For Non-Corrosive Refrigerants)
P70AB-12C	SPST open low	12 in. Hg to 80 (-41 to 551)	Minimum 5 (34) Maximum 35 (241)	36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut	525 psig (3,617 kPa)	80 psig (551 kPa)	Supplied, but not assembled
P170AB-12C				1/4 in. external flare connector
P70EA-14C	SPDT 1 to 3 open low 1 to 2 close low			36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut			None
P170EA-14C				1/4 in. external flare connector
All-Range Controls (For Non-Corrosive Refrigerants)
P70AB-1C	SPST open low	20 in. Hg to 100 (-68 to 690)	Minimum 7 (48) Maximum 50 (345)	1/4 in. external flare connector	325 psig (2,239 kPa)	100 psig (690 kPa)	Supplied, but not assembled
P70AB-2C				36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
P70BA-1C			Manual reset lockout				None
P70BA-10C				1/4 in. external flare connector
P70EA-10C	SPDT 1 to 3 open low 1 to 2 close low		5 (34) fixed
P72AA-1C	DPST open low		Minimum 7 (48) Maximum 50 (345)	36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
P72AB-1C							Mounted on differential screw
P170AB-2C	SPST open low			1/4 in. external flare connector
P70CA-1C	SPST open high			36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut			None
P170CA-1C				1/4 in. external flare connector
All-Range Controls (Ammonia-Compatible)
P70AA-5C	SPST open low	20 in. Hg to 100 (-68 to 690)	Minimum 7 (48) Maximum 50 (345)	1/4 in. SS Internal NPT	325 psig (2,239 kPa)	100 psig (690 kPa)	None
P70CA-4C	SPST open high
P70GA-11C	Four-wire, Two-circuit Line M1 close low Line M2 open low
P70HA-3C			Manual reset lockout

Note: To order models not listed in the selection chart, please contact Johnson Controls/PENN® Refrigeration Application Engineering at 1-800-275-5676.

Technical Specifications

Single Pressure Controls Switch Action, Low Event, High Event, and Models

Switch and Action	Low Event	High Event	Models
SPST Open Low	Cut-Out (Opens Line to M1)	Cut-In (Closes Line to M1)	P70A, P70B, P170A
SPST Open High	Cut-In (Closes Line to M1)	Cut-Out (Opens Line to M1)	P70C, P70D, P170C, P170D
SPDT	Opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3	Closes 1 to 2 and Opens 1 to 3	P70E, P70F
Four-Wire, Two-Circuits, 1 N.O., 1 N.C. Open Low	Cut-Out (Opens M2 to Line and Closes M1 to Line)	Cut-In (Closes M2 to Line and Opens M1 to Line)	P70G, P70H
Four-Wire, Two-Circuits, 1 N.O., 1 N.C. Open High	Cut-In (Closes M2 to Line and Opens M1 to Line)	Cut-Out (Opens M2 to Line and Closes M1 to Line)	P70J, P70K, P170K
DPST Open Low	Cut-Out (Opens M1 to Line and M2 to Line)	Cut-In (Closes M1 to Line and M2 to Line)	P72A, P72B
DPST Open High	Cut-In (Closes M1 to Line and M2 to Line)	Cut-Out (Opens M1 to Line and M2 to Line)	P72C, P72D

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications (Continued)

L1 L2

Load

Line

Open-Low switch action: opens on pressure drop.

(A and B Models) L1

Alarm

Load

L1 L2

Load

p7s_wir_spst.eps

p7s_wir_spdt.eps

Line

Open-High switch action: opens on pressure rise. (C and D Models)

1 to 3 opens, and 1 to 2 closes on pressure rise.

Typical Wiring for SPST Open Low Switch and Open High Switch (P70A, B, C, D, and P170A, C, D, Models)

Typical Wiring for SPDT Switch (P70E, F Models)

L1 L2

L3*

Line

Load

Line

Typical Wiring for Four-Wire Two-Circuit Switch (P70G and H Models)

eps 2.

–

s_wi p7

Alarm

Alarm

Circuit Power

Line

Load

Line

Main circuit (Line to M2) opens and

auxiliary circuit (Line to M1) closes on pressure rise.

Line to M1 and Line to M2 open on pressure drop.

*(L3 is third supply line in three-phase applications.)

p7s_wir_dpst.eps

Typical Wiring for DPST Switch (P72A and B Models)

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications (Continued)

Technical Specifications (Continued)

SPST Electrical Ratings

(P70A, B, C, and D, and P170A, C, and D Models)

2-15/16

(74)

Two Mounting Holes 10-32 UNF-2B Thread

3-1/4

(83)

5/16

(9)

	Single-Phase Ratings
	Standard			Hermetic Compressor
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	208/240 VAC
Motor Horsepower	2	3	3	—
Motor Full-Load A	24	18.7	17	20
Motor Locked-Rotor A	144	112.2	102	120
Non-Inductive A	22	22	22	—
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 600 VA; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC

5/16

(8)

3-1/4 (83)

1-11/16 (43)

5/16 (8)

(25)

1-1/8

(29)

1-7/8

13/16 (20)

1-3/4

(44)

Capillary or Connector as Specified

(48)

3/8

X 3/16 (5)

15/16

(24)

3/16 Diameter (5)

1-5/16 (34)

3-1/16

3/16 (5)

1-1/4 (32)

3/16 Diameter

(5) Mounting Hole

	Standard Single-Phase Ratings
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	277 VAC1
Motor Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.0
Motor Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	42.0
Non-Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC			125 VA at 24 to 600 VAC

Diameter

SPDT Electrical Ratings 1hp Switch (P70E Models)

1/16

(77)

7/8 or 1-1/8

(1/2 in. or 3/4 in. Trade Size)

(22) (28)

Conduit Hole

Dimensions for Low Pressure Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure, in. (mm)*

p70_low_NEMA1_dims.eps

1. Rating for P70EC models only

SPDT Electrical Ratings 1/4 hp Switch (P70F Models)

5/8 (16)

79)

	Standard Single-Phase Ratings
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC
Motor Full Load A	6.0	3.3	3.0
Motor Locked Rotor A	36.0	19.8	18.0
Non-Inductive A	6.0	6.0	6.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA at 24 to 240 VAC

4-1/16

(103) (

5/8 (16)

4-1/16

1/2

Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Electrical Ratings

7/16 (11)

(103)

2-11/16

3/8 (10)

3/4-NPSM

Threaded

	Standard Single-Phase Ratings
	Line-M2 (Main Contacts)				Line-M1 (Auxiliary Contacts)
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	277 VAC	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	277 VAC
Motor Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	—	6.0	3.3	3.0	—
Motor Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	—	36.0	19.8	18.0	—
Non-Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2	6.0	6.0	6.0	6.0
Pilot Duty for both sets of contacts	125 VA at 24 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

(13)

(70)

2-15/16 3/16

(P70G, H, J, and K, and P170K Models)

1-1/4 (32)

(68)

(25)

1-9/16

Rigid Conduit

Connector

Four Mounting Holes

(74)

5/16 (8)

Diameter

(5)

1-3/4 (44)

1/2 (13)

p70_low_NEMA3R_dims.eps

Dimensions for Low Pressure Controls with NEMA 3R Enclosure, in. (mm)*

* These dimensions are nominal and are subject to accepted manufacturing tolerances and application variables.

DPST Electrical Ratings (P72A, B, C, and D Models)

	Standard Ratings					Hermetic Compressor Ratings
	120 VAC, Single-Phase	208 VAC, Single-Phase	240 VAC, Single-Phase	208 VAC, Three-Phase	220 VAC, Three-Phase	208 VAC, Single-Phase	240 VAC, Single-Phase
Motor Horsepower	2	3	3	5	5	—	—
Motor Full-Load A	24	18.7	17	15.9	15	24	24
Motor Locked-Rotor A	144	112.2	102	95.4	90	144	144
AC Non-Inductive A	24	24	24	24	24	—	—
DC Non-Inductive A	3	0.5	0.5	0.5	0.5	—	—
Pilot Duty	125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1900171

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications

Description

The P70, P72, and P170 Controls for high pressure applications are designed primarily for high pressure cut-out control,

head-pressure control, and condenser fan cycling control on commercial refrigeration and air conditioning applications.

Controls are available in several pressure ranges and are compatible with most common refrigerants. They may also be used on other non-corrosive fluid applications. Ammonia compatible models are also available.

Several different electrical ratings and switch configurations are available. The P72 models provide direct control of 208-240 volt

single-phase motors up to 3 horsepower, and 208-220 volt 3-phase motors up to

5 horsepower.

Refer to the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-125454) for important product application information.

Features

• all-steel case and cover provides long lasting, rugged protection for internal components

• sight-set calibrated pressure adjustment displays a visible pressure scale, fully adjustable through the range without removing the cover (on NEMA 1 enclosure models)

Selection Chart (Part 1 of 2)

• manual reset lockout option provides

trip-free lockout that cannot be overridden or reset until pressure returns to specified level

• variety of available pressure connection styles allows greater flexibility when mounting control and adapting pressure connections to field application requirements

Applications

• P70C, P70D P170C and P170D models with single-pole, single-throw (SPST) Open High switch action are the most popular models, and are typically used for high-pressure cutout. The C models are automatic reset. The D models have a manual reset lockout mechanism. Some P70C, P70D P170C and P170D models are UL Listed as refrigeration pressure limiting controls.

• P70A and P170A models are available with SPST Open Low switch action, and typically are used for condenser fan cycling control.

• P70 and P170 models with single-pole, double-throw (SPDT), or four-wire,

two-circuit switch action allow users to install alarm devices or other control circuits.

P70CA-3 High Pressure Cutout Control

• P72 models have a double-pole, single-throw (DPST) switch with

load-carrying contacts that can provide direct control of 208-240 V single-phase motors up to 3 horsepower, and 208-220 V 3-phase motors up to 5 horsepower. See the DPST Electrical Ratings (P72A, B, C, and D Models) that follow.

NEMA 1 enclosures are standard on most models.

Repair Information

If the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications fail to operate within their specifications, replace the units. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range psi (kPa)	Differential psi (kPa)	Pressure Connection	Max. Working Pressure
Condenser Fan Cycling Controls (for Non-Corrosive Refrigerants)
P70AA-118C	SPST Open Low	100 to 400 (690 to 2,758)	Minimum 35 (241) Maximum 200 (1,379)	36 in. Capillary with 1/4 in. Flare Nut	475 psig (3,275 kPa)
P72AA-27C	DPST Open Low
P170AA-118C	SPST Open Low			1/4 in. External Flare Connector
All Range Controls (for Non-Corrosive Refrigerants)
P70CA-2C1	SPST Open High	50 to 500 (345 to 3,448)	Minimum 60 (414); Maximum 150 (1,034)	1/4 in. External Flare Connector	525 psig (3,620 kPa)
P70CA-3C1				36 in. Capillary with 1/4 in. Flare Nut
P70DA-1C1			Manual Reset Lockout
P70KA-1C	Four-wire, Two-circuit Line-M1 Close High Line-M2 Open High
P72CA-2C1	DPST Open-high		Minimum 60 (414); Maximum 150 (1,034)
P72DA-1C1			Manual Reset Lockout
P170CA-3C1	SPST Open High		Minimum 60 (414); Maximum 150 (1,034)	1/4 in. External Flare Connector
P170DA-1C			Manual Reset Lockout
P170KA-1C	Four-wire, Two-circuit Line-M1 Close High Line-M2 Open High

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications (Continued)

Selection Chart (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range psi (kPa)	Differential psi (kPa)	Pressure Connection	Max. Working Pressure
Models for High Pressure Non-Corrosive Refrigerants2
P70AA-2C	SPST Open Low	0 to 150 (0 to 1,034)	Minimum 10 (69); Maximum 70 (483)	36 in. Cap. with 1/4 in. Flare Nut	325 psig (2,241 kPa)
P170AA-2C				1/4 in. External Flare Connector
P70AA-400C		100 to 470 (689 to 3,241)	Minimum 35 (241); Maximum 200 (1,379)	36 in. Cap. with 1/4 in. Flare Nut	690 psig (4,757 kPa)
P170AA-400C				1/4 in. External Flare Connector
P70CA-400C1	SPST Open High	200 to 610 (1,379 to 4,206)	Minimum 60 (414); Maximum 150 (1,034)	36 in. Cap. with 1/4 in. Flare Nut
P170CA-400C1				1/4 in. External Flare Connector
P70DA-400C1			Manual Reset Lockout	36 in. Cap. with 1/4 in. Flare Nut
P170DA-400C1				1/4 in. External Flare Connector
Ammonia Compatible Models
P70AA-119C	SPST Open Low	50 to 300 (345 to 2,068)	Minimum 20 (138); Maximum 120 (827)	1/4 in. SS Internal NPT	400 psig (2,758 kPa)
P70CA-5C1	SPST Open-High	50 to 500 (345 to 3,448)	Minimum 60 (414); Maximum 150 (1,034)		525 psig (3,620 kPa)
P70DA-2C1			Manual Reset Lockout
P70KA-7C	Four-wire, Two-circuit Line-M1 Close-high Line-M2 Open High

UL Listed as refrigeration pressure limiting controls
Compatible with R410A refrigerant.

Note: To order models not listed in the selection chart, please contact

Johnson Controls/PENN Refrigeration Application Engineering at 1-800-275-5676.

Technical Specifications

Single Pressure Controls Switch Action, Low Event, High Event, and Models

Switch and Action	Low Event	High Event	Models
SPST Open Low	Cut-Out (Opens Line to M1)	Cut-In (Closes Line to M1)	P70A, P70B, P170A
SPST Open High	Cut-In (Closes Line to M1)	Cut-Out (Opens Line to M1)	P70C, P70D, P170C, P170D
SPDT	Opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3	Closes 1 to 2 and Opens 1 to 3	P70E, P70F
Four-wire, Two-circuits, 1 N.O., 1 N.C. Open Low	Cut-Out (Opens M2 to Line and Closes M1 to Line)	Cut-In (Closes M2 to Line and Opens M1 to Line)	P70G, P70H
Four-wire, Two-circuits, 1 N.O., 1 N.C. Open High	Cut-In (Closes M2 to Line and Opens M1 to Line)	Cut-Out (Opens M2 to Line and Closes M1 to Line)	P70J, P70K, P170K
DPST Open Low	Cut-Out (Opens M1 to Line and M2 to Line)	Cut-In (Closes M1 to Line and M2 to Line)	P72A, P72B
DPST Open High	Cut-In (Closes M1 to Line and M2 to Line)	Cut-Out (Opens M1 to Line and M2 to Line)	P72C, P72D

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications (Continued)

L1 L1

Alarm

Load

L2 L2

Load

Line

Open-Low switch action: opens on pressure drop. (A and B Models)

p7s_wir_spdt.eps

L1 L2

Load

1 to 3 opens, and 1 to 2 closes on pressure rise.

Typical Wiring for SPDT Switch (P70E, F Models)

p7s_wir_spst.eps

Line

Open-High switch action: opens on pressure rise. (C and D Models)

L1 L2

*L3

Line

Load

Line

Typical Wiring for SPST

(P70A, B, C, D, and P170A, C, D, Models)

L1 L2

Alarm

Alarm

Circuit Power

Line

Load

Line

p7s_wir_dpst.eps

Line to M1, and Line to M2 open on pressure rise.

*(L3 is third supply line in 3-phase applications.)

Typical Wiring for DPST Switch (P72C, and D Models)

Main circuit (Line to M2) opens and auxiliary circuit (Line to M1) closes on pressure rise.

p7s_wir-4-2.eps

Typical Wiring for Four-Wire Two-Circuit Switch used for a High Pressure Cutout Application with an Alarm Circuit (P70J, K, and P170K Models)

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications (Continued)

Technical Specifications (Continued)

2-15/16

Two Mounting Holes 10-32 UNF-2B Thread

3-1/4

(83)

5/16

(8)

5/16

(8)

3-1/4 (83)

1-11/16 (43)

5/16

(25)

1-1/16 (29)

15/16 (24)

Capillary or Connector as speci?ed

3/16 (5)

3/8 X 3/16

3/16 Diameter

(5)

(48)

(10) (5)

Mounting Hole

Diameter Mounting Hole

3/16 Diameter

(5)

2-1/16

(53) 15/16

(24)

1-5/16

1-1/4 (33)

1/16 (2)

(34) 3-1/16

(77) 4

101

(22) (28)

7/8 or 1-1/8 (1/2 in. or 3/4 in. Trade Size)

1-7/8

Dimensions for High Pressure Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure, in. (mm)*

p7shi_dim1.eps

SPST Electrical Ratings

(P70A, B, C, and D, and P170A, C, and D Models)

	Single-Phase Ratings
	Standard			Hermetic Compressor
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	208/240 VAC
Motor Horsepower	2	3	3	—
Motor Full-Load A	24	18.7	17	24
Motor Locked-Rotor A	144	112.2	102	144
Non-Inductive A	22	22	22	—
Pilot Duty	125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

SPDT Electrical Ratings 1hp Switch (P70E Models)

	Standard Single-Phase Ratings
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	277 VAC1
Motor Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.0
Motor Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	42.0
Non-Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC			125 VA at 24 to 600 VAC

1. Rating for P70EC models only

Dimensions for High Pressure Controls with NEMA 3R Enclosure, in. (mm)*

5/8 (16)

4-1/16 (104)

3-1/8 (79)

5/8

5/8 (15)

4-1/16 (104)2-11/16

(68) 1

(25)

3/8 (10)

1/2 (12)

3/4-NPSM

Threaded Rigid Conduit

2-3/4

(70)

2-15/16

(74)

3/16 (5)

Connector

Four Mounting Holes

5/16 Diameter

(8)

1-1/4 (31)

1-9/16 (40)

15/16 (24)

1/2 (13)

(16)

p7shi_dim3.eps

* These dimensions are nominal and are subject to accepted manufacturing tolerances and application variables.

SPDT Electrical Ratings1/4 hp Switch (P70F Models)

	Standard Single-Phase Ratings
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC
Motor Full Load A	6.0	3.3	3.0
Motor Locked Rotor A	36.0	19.8	18.0
Non-Inductive A	6.0	6.0	6.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA at 24 to 240 VAC

Four-wire, Two-circuit Electrical Ratings (P70G, H, J, and K, and P170K Models)

	Standard Single-Phase Ratings
	Line-M2 (Main Contacts)				Line-M1 (Auxiliary Contacts)
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	277 VAC	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	277 VAC
Motor Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	—	6.0	3.3	3.0	—
Motor Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	—	36.0	19.8	18.0	—
Non-Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2	6.0	6.0	6.0	6.0
Pilot Duty for both sets of contacts	125 VA at 24 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

DPST Electrical Ratings (P72A, B, C, and D Models)

	Standard Ratings					Hermetic Compressor Ratings
	120 VAC, Single-Phase	208 VAC, Single-Phase	240 VAC, Single-Phase	208 VAC, Three-Phase	220 VAC, Three-Phase	208 VAC, Single-Phase	240 VAC, Single-Phase
Motor Horsepower	2	3	3	5	5	—	—
Motor Full-Load A	24	18.7	17	15.9	15	24	24
Motor Locked-Rotor A	144	112.2	102	95.4	90	144	144
AC Non-Inductive A	24	24	24	24	24	—	—
DC Non-Inductive A	3	0.5	0.5	0.5	0.5	—	—
Pilot Duty	125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1900172

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Dual Pressure Applications

Description

The P70, P72, and P170 Controls for Dual Pressure Applications are designed primarily for use as combination high and low pressure controls on commercial refrigeration and air conditioning applications.

These controls are available in several pressure ranges and are compatible with most common refrigerants. Ammonia compatible models are also available.

These controls respond directly to system pressure changes on both high and low sides, and can provide single-device control of the compressor.

Controls are available in several different electrical ratings and switch configurations, including independent high and low pressure switches (on P70S and P170S models). The P72 models provide direct control of

208 to 240 volt, single-phase motors up to three horsepower, and 208 to 220 volt, three-phase motors up to five horsepower.

Refer to the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Dual Pressure Applications Product Bulletin (LIT-125455) for important product application information.

Features

• all-steel case and cover built to provide long lasting, rugged protection for internal components

• sight-set calibrated pressure adjustment displays a visible pressure scale, fully adjustable through the range without removing the cover (on NEMA 1 enclosure models)

Selection Chart (Part 1 of 2)

• MICRO-SET™ differential option allows for precise control on low pressure applications

• independent high and low pressure switches (P70S and P170S Models) satisfies a variety of dual pressure application wiring requirements with a single versatile control

• convertible high pressure reset–auto reset or manual reset lockout (P70S and P170S Models) reduces inventory—one control can be adapted to several dual pressure applications in the field

Applications

• P70S and P170S models have independently operated high and low pressure single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switches that can be wired to satisfy a variety of control requirements. These adaptable controls also come with a high pressure manual reset lockout mechanism that may be converted to automatic reset.

• P70L, M, N, and P170L, M, N models have a single-pole, single-throw (SPST) switch. Models are available with automatic or manual reset lockout options. Models with manual reset are available with either high-side-only manual reset, or low-side and high-side manual reset. Ammonia-compatible models are also available (P70L and P70M only).

• P72 models have a double-pole, single-throw (DPST) switch with

load-carrying contacts that can provide direct control of 208 to 240 VAC,

single-phase motors up to 3 hp, and 208 to 220 VAC, three-phase motors up to 5 hp. See the DPST Electrical Ratings (P72L, M, and N Types) that follow.

P70MA-1 Dual Pressure Control

Some models are available with Limited Knob Adjustment, which restricts adjustment of the pressure settings and deters

over-adjustment or tampering.

NEMA 1 enclosures are standard on most models. NEMA 3R enclosures are also available.

Repair Information

If the P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Dual Pressure Applications fail to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Low Pressure Side psi (kPa)		High Pressure Side psi (kPa)		Pressure Connector	Limited Knob Adjustment
		Range	Differential	Range	Differential (Non-Adjustable)
MICRO-SET Controls for Non-Corrosive Refrigerants
P70LB-6C1	SPST	12 in.Hg to 80 (-41 to 552)	Minimum 5 (34) Maximum 35 (241)	100 to 500 (690 to 3,447)	Fixed approx. 65 (448)	36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut	Low cut-out
P70MA-1C1					Lockout requires manual reset		None
P70SA-1C1	Two independent SPDT				Fixed at 65 (448) or Lockout requires manual reset
P170LB-6C1	SPST				Fixed approx. 65 (448)	1/4 in. external flare connector	Low cut-out
P170MA-18C1					Lockout requires manual reset		None
P170SA-1C1	Two independent SPDT				Fixed at 65 (448) or Lockout requires manual reset
All Range Controls for Non-Corrosive Refrigerants
P70LB-1C1	SPST	20 in.Hg to 100 (-68 to 690)	Minimum 6 (41) Maximum 50 (345)	100 to 500 (690 to 3,447)	Fixed Approx. 65 (448)	36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut	Low cut-out
P70MA-1C1					Lockout Requires Manual Reset		None
P70NA-1C			Fixed (manual reset)
P72LA-1C1	DPST		Minimum 7 (48) Maximum 50 (345)		Fixed approx. 65 (448)
P72LB-1C1							Low cut-out
P72MA-1C1					Lockout requires manual reset		None
P72NA-1C1			Fixed (manual reset)

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Dual Pressure Applications (Continued)

Selection Chart (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Low Pressure Side psi (kPa)		High Pressure Side psi (kPa)		Pressure Connector	Limited Knob Adjustment
		Range	Differential	Range	Differential (Non-Adjustable)
All Range Controls for Non-Corrosive Refrigerants
P170LB-1C1	SPST	20 in.Hg to 100 (-68 to 690)	Minimum 7 (48) Maximum 50 (345)	100 to 500 (690 to 3,447)	Fixed approx. 65 (448)	1/4 in. External flare connector	Low cut-out
P170MA-1C1					Lockout requires manual reset		None
P170NA-1C			Fixed (manual reset)
All Range Ammonia Compatible Controls
P70LA-2C1	SPST	20 in. Hg to 100 (-68 to 690)	Minimum 7 (48) Maximum 50 (345)	100 to 500 (690 to 3,447)	Fixed approx. 65 (448)	1/4 in. Internal NPT connector	None
P70MA-2C1					Lockout requires manual reset

1. Control models with high pressure side (only) that are UL Listed as Refrigeration Pressure Limiting Controls.

Note: For information on models not listed, please contact Johnson Controls/PENN® Refrigeration Application Engineering at 1-800-275-5676.

Technical Specifications

Maximum Pressures

Pressure	Low Side		High Side
Pressure	All Range	MICRO-SET	High Side
Maximum Working Pressure	100 psi (552 kPa)	80 psi (690 kPa)	500 psi (3,447 kPa)
Maximum Overpressure	325 psi (2,241 kPa)	525 psi (3,620 kPa)	525 psi (3,620 kPa)

L1 L1

L2 L2

L1 L2

L3*

High side opens Line to M1 on pressure rise.

High

Load a

c o

p7sdual_wir_spst.eps

t High

Line

High side opens Main ircuit (Line to M2), nd closes auxiliary ircuit (Line to M1)

n pressure rise.

ow side opens Main

Alarm Alarm Circui

Powe

High

Load

Line M1

High side opens

Line to M1 and Line to M2 on pressure rise.

p7sdual_wir_pst.eps

Line L

Line M2

Line

p7sdual_wir_4-2.eps

Load

Low side opens Line

to M1 on pressure drop.

Low

circuit (Line to M2), and closes auxiliary circuit (Line to M1)

Low

Low side opens Line to M1 and Line to M2 on pressure drop.

Typical Wiring for SPST Switch

on pressure drop.

Low

*(L3 is third supply line in 3-phase applications.)

(P70L, M, and N, and P170L, M, and N Models)

Typical Wiring for Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Switch (P70P, Q and R Models)

Typical Wiring for DPST Switch (P72L, M, and N Models)

L1 L2

Low

Alarm

High

Alarm

Load

1 1

Low

High

L1 L2

High side switch opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3 on pressure rise.

High

High Alarm

Low Load

High Load

Low Alarm

p7sdual_wir_2spdt_-diff.eps

Low side switch opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3 on pressure drop.

High side switch opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3 on pressure rise.

Low side switch opens 1 to 2 and closes 1 to 3 on pressure drop.

Low

Two SPDT Switches Wired as a Dual Pressure Control (Switching a Single Load with Optional High Side Alarm and Low Side Alarm) (P70S and P170S Models)

p7sdual_wir_2spdt_asdual.eps

Two SPDT Switches Wired to Control Two Different Loads (Optional High Side Alarm and Low Side Alarm) (P70S and P170S Models)

Standard Electromechanical Pressure Controls

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Dual Pressure Applications (Continued)

Technical Specifications (Continued)

DPST Electrical Ratings (P72L, M, and N Types)

	Standard Ratings					Hermetic Compressor Ratings
	120 VAC, Single-Phase	208 VAC, Single-Phase	240 VAC, Single-Phase	208 VAC, Three-Phase	220 VAC, Three-Phase	208 VAC, Single-Phase	240 VAC, Single-Phase
Motor Horsepower	2	3	3	5	5	—	—
Motor Full-Load A	24	18.7	17	15.9	15	24	24
Motor Locked-Rotor A	144	112.2	102	95.4	90	144	144
AC Non-Inductive A	24	24	24	24	24	—	—
DC Non-Inductive A	3	0.5	0.5	0.5	0.5	—	—
Pilot Duty	125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

SPST Electrical Ratings (P70L, M, and N, and P170L, M, and N Types)

5/16

(15) 2-7/8

(73)

Reset Button for Controls with both High and Low Side Reset

Two Mounting Holes 10-32 UNF-28 Thread

5/16

3/16 Diameter

	Single-Phase Ratings
	Standard			Hermetic Compressor
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	208/240 VAC
Motor Horsepower	2	3	3	—
Motor Full-Load A	24	18.7	17	24
Motor Locked-Rotor A	144	112.2	102	144
Non-Inductive A	22	22	22	—
Pilot Duty	125 VA at 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

(5) Mounting Hole

(127)

5/16

(8)

(9)

3-1/4

(83)

13/16

(20)

1-11/16 (43)

15/16

(95)

11/16 15/16

(25)

1-1/8 (29)

1-3/4

(17)

(95)

(44)

3/16 (4)

1-11/16 (43)

Reset Lever for Controls

with High Side Only Manual Reset (Except P70S and P170S Models)

1-15/16

(48)

2-1/16

5/16

3/16

3/8 X 3/16 Diameter

(53) 1 5/16

(33) 15/16

(24)

(8)

(5)

(10) (5) Mounting Hole

SPDT Electrical Ratings

1-5/16

(33) 3

3-3/16 (80)

11/16 (18)

p7sdual_dim1.eps

1/16

(76)

5-11/16

7/8 or 1-1/8 (1/2 in. or 3/4 in. Trade Size)

(P70S and P170S Types)

(2)

(144)

(22) (28) Conduit Hole

Dimensions for P70, P72, and P170 Dual Pressure Controls with NEMA 1 Enclosure, in. (mm)*

	Standard Single-Phase Ratings
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	277 VAC
Motor Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.0
Motor Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	42.0
Non-Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0	–
Pilot Duty	125 VA at 24 VAC; 720 VA at 120 to 277 VAC

Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Electrical Ratings (P70P, Q, and R Types)

5/8 (16)

3-1/8 (79)

4-13/16 (122)

5-13/16

	Standard Single-Phase Ratings
	Line-M2 (Main Contacts)				Line-M1 (Auxiliary Contacts)
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	277 VAC	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	277 VAC
Motor Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	—	6.0	3.3	3.0	—
Motor Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	—	36.0	19.8	18.0	—
Non- Inductive A	16.0	9.2	8.0	7.2	6.0	6.0	6.0	6.0
Pilot Duty for both sets of contacts	125 VA at 24 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA at 120 to 300 VDC

(148) 4-7/16

(112) 2-3/4

(69)

1-1/4

(32)

3/8

(10)

2-3/4

(70)

3-3/8 (86)

Four Mounting Holes 5/16 Diameter

(8)

1/16 (2)

1-3/8

3/4-NPSM Threaded Rigid Conduit Connector

1-1/8 1-3/4

p7sdual_dim3.eps

(35)

Element as Specified

7/16 (10)

(29)

(44)

Dimensions for P70, P72, and P170 Dual Pressure Control with NEMA 3R Enclosure, in. (mm)*

*These dimensions are nominal and are subject to accepted manufacturing tolerances and application variables.

Single-Stage Electronic Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1900109

P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display

Description

The P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display is a single-stage, On/Off, electronic pressure control with a single-pole,

double-throw (SPDT) output relay. The control may be field set to operate in one of

three pressure ranges (0 to 100 psi, 0 to 500 psi, or 50 to 750 psi), as either an open high or open low control.

The P470 Control features a large LCD that displays the sensed pressure and other system-status indicators, as well as the adjustable setpoints in the programming mode. The P470 Control has a lockable, three-button touchpad for adjusting setpoints, and a front-panel LED that indicates the output relay status.

The P470 Control uses a P499 Electronic Pressure Transducer in conjunction with a WHA-PDK3 Wiring Harness to sense system pressure. This arrangement virtually eliminates the chance of a refrigerant leak because there are no capillaries or bellows to break or fail.

Refer to the P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display Product Bulletin (LIT-125528) for important product application information.

Selection Chart

Features

• easy-to-read LCD

• three field-selectable pressure ranges between 0 to 750 psi

• 24 VAC, and 120 or 208/240 VAC models

• lockable, three-button, front-panel touchpad

• built-in, adjustable, anti-short cycle time-delay

• uses an economical and versatile transducer and wiring harness

Repair Information

The P470 pressure control and

P499 transducer are not field repairable. Perform the following procedures, in the order they are presented, to determine the problem. If the problem is with the control or transducer, contact a Johnson Controls/PENN® sales representative for a replacement.

P470 Pressure Control with Transducer and Wiring Harness (Control, Transducer, and Harness Must be Purchased Separately)

Item	Product Code Number	Description
P470 (Low-Voltage) Electronic Pressure Control with Display	P470FB-1C	Low Voltage (less than 30 VAC) Electronic Pressure Control with Display Supply Voltage: 24 VAC Class 2 Transformer (See Technical Specifications for complete Relay Electrical Ratings.)
P470 (Line-Voltage) Electronic Pressure Control with Display	P470EB-1C	Line Voltage Electronic Pressure Control with Display Supply Voltage: 120 or 208/240 VAC (See Technical Specifications for complete Relay Electrical Ratings.)
P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers	P499RAP-101C P499RAP-101K	0 to 100 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/8 in. NPT External Fitting
	P499RCP-101C P499RCP-101K	0 to 100 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/4 in. SAE (Schrader®) Internal Fitting with integral valve depressor
	P499RAP-105C P499RAP-105K	0 to 500 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/8 in. NPT External Fitting
	P499RCP-105C P499RCP-105K	0 to 500 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/4 in. SAE (Schrader) Internal Fitting with integral valve depressor
	P499RAP-107C P499RAP-107K	0 to 750 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/8 in. NPT External Fitting
	P499RCP-107C P499RCP-107K	0 to 750 psi Pressure Transducer with 1/4 in. SAE (Schrader) Internal Fitting with integral valve depressor
Wiring Harnesses for P499 Transducers	WHA-PKD3-200C	6 ft 6-1/2 in. (2 m) 3-Wire Cable with Plug-in Connector for P499 Transducer
	WHA-PKD3-400C	13 ft 3 in. (4 m) 3-Wire Cable with Plug-in Connector for P499 Transducer
	WHA-PKD3-600C	19 ft 8 in. (6 m) 3-Wire Cable with Plug-in Connector for P499 Transducer

Note: P470 Controls do not include a transducer or wiring harness. P499 Transducer and wiring harness must be purchased separately. Transducer must be matched to the selected pressure range.

Single-Stage Electronic Pressure Controls

P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display (Continued)

Technical Specifications

Output Relay Contacts Electrical Ratings

	P470EB-1			P470 FB-1
	120 VAC	208 VAC	240 VAC	24 VAC
Horsepower N.O. (N.C.)	1 (1/4)	1 (1/3)	1 (1/2)	100 VA, 30 VAC maximum, Class 2
Full Load Ampere N.O. (N.C.)	16 (5.8)	9.2 (4.0)	8.0 (4.9)
Locked Rotor Ampere N.O. (N.C.)	96 (34.8)	55.2 (24)	498 (29.4)
Non-Inductive Ampere N.O. (N.C.)	15 (10)	10 (10)	10 (10)
Pilot Duty	125 VA (N.O.) at 24 to 240 VAC 125 VA (N.C.) at 120 to 240 VAC 50 VA (N.C.) at 24 VAC

P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display
Operating Pressure Ranges	0 to 100 psi	0 to 500 psi	50 to 750 psi
Minimum Differential Pressure	5 psig	20 psig	20 psig
Displayed Resolution	1 psig	3 psig	5 psig
Control Accuracy	+ 1.5% of selected Operating Pressure Range plus transducer accuracy
Supply Voltage	P470FB-1:24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, Class 2 P470EB-1:120 or 208/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption	1.8 VA maximum
Transducer Type	P499 Electronic Pressure Transducer
Ambient Temperature at Control	Operating: -30 to 140°F (-34 to 60°C) Shipping: -40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)
Ambient Humidity at Operating Control	0 to 95% RH noncondensing; Maximum dew point: 85°F (29°C)
Enclosure	Case and cover: NEMA 1 High-impact thermoplastic
Agency Information	UL: File SA516; CCN SDFY Canadian UL: File SA516; CCN SDFY7 FCC/DOC Part 15, Class A

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927185

P28 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay

Description

The P28 series provides dependable lube oil protection on pressure of lubricated refrigeration compressors by sensing low lube oil pressure. A built-in time delay switch, accurately compensated for ambient temperature, allows for pressure pick up on start and avoids nuisance shutdowns on pressure drops of short duration during the running cycle.

Refer to the P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product Bulletin (LIT-125420) for important product application information.

Features

• direct-reading scale indication

• adjustable setpoint

• trip-free manual reset

• replacement timing relays available

• dust-protected switch

Applications

• semi-hermetic compressors

• P28 Control measures pressure available to circulate oil though the lubrication system (Net oil pressure is the difference between oil gauge and crankcase pressure.)

Accessories

• all models listed on this page include a universal mounting bracket

• replacement timing relays— refer to Replacement Timing Relays for P28 and P29 Lube Oil Controls Catalog Page (LIT-1927395)

Repair Information

If the P28 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P28AA Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Time Delay	Time Delay Heater Circuit VAC	Type of Reset	Range1 psi (kPa)	Refrigerant (R)	Pressure Connection
P28AA-1C2	90 seconds	120/240	Manual	8 to 70 (55 to 483)	Non-corrosive3	36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
P28AA-2C4	60 seconds
P28AA-17C5	120 seconds
P28AA-18C	45 seconds
P28AN-1C	90 seconds	120/240	Manual	8 to 70 (55 to 483)	Ammonia	1/4 in. internal NPT
P28DN-1C	90 seconds With Runlight and Alarm Terminals
P28DA-1C		120/240	Manual	8 to 70 (55 to 483)	Non-corrosive3	36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
P28GA-2C	90 seconds		Automatic
P28NA-5C	120 seconds	24 VAC or VDC	Manual

Switch differential approximately 5 psig (34 kPa). Time delay relay energizes at 9 psig (61 kPa) pressure difference, de-energized at 14 psig (97 kPa) difference
Replaces Ranco® P30-3701
Non-corrosive refrigerants include R-12, R-22, R-134A, R-500, R-502 (R)
Replaces Ranco P30-3601
Replaces Ranco P30-3801

Technical Specifications

The maximum bellows pressure is 180 psig (2,241 kPa).

Electrical Ratings – Pilot Duty

Time Delay Heater Circuit	Pilot Circuit	Alarm Circuit (must be same voltage as pilot circuit)	P28DA-1 Contact Rating 2 to 1: 2 to 3 (must be same voltage as time delay circuit)
			Crankcase Heater: Term 2 to 1	Runlight: Term 2 to 3
120/240 VAC	750 VA, 120/240 VAC	125 VA, 120/240 VAC	10 A 120 VAC, 5 A 240 VAC	10 W
24 VAC or VDC	125 VA, 24 VAC 57.5 VA, 24 VDC	125 VA, 24 VAC 57.5 VA, 24 VDC	—

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927195

P32 Series Sensitive Pressure Switch

Description

This differential pressure switch is used to sense pressure/air flow in ducts.

Refer to the P32 Series Sensitive Differential Pressure Switch Product Bulletin

(LIT-125435) for important product application information.

P32 Series

Action on Increase of Pressure

p32.eps

P28 Action Diagram

Selection Chart

Product

Code Number

Ambient

Temperature Min./Max.

Connector

Maximum

Over- pressure psig (kPa)1

Contact

Action

Range

in. WC (kPa)

Sensitivity

at Min.

Setpoint

in. WC (kPa)

Setpoint

Scale

Plate

Mounting Bracket

(Included)

P32AC-1C

-40°F (-40°C)

min.

167°F (75°C)

max.

High Pressure connectors are metal 1/8 in. internal NPT inside, 1/2 in. NPSM outside for mounting

Low pressure connectors are molded,

1/8 in. internal NPT

(6.895)

SPDT

0.15 to 12 (0.037 to 2.99)

0.07

(0.017)

Adjustable

Yes

BKT182-1

P32AC-2C2

0.05 to 5 (0.012 to 1.24)

0.04

(0.01)

BKT229-1

P32AF-1C

0.025

(0.006)

BKT182-1

P32AF-2C2

BKT229-1

bracket1.eps bracket2.eps bracket1.eps

bracket2.eps

Features

• easy-to-read setpoint scale

• versatile mounting options

Applications

• pressure/air flow proving with electric duct heaters, humidifiers, and other equipment

• maximum pressure/air flow control for variable volume systems

• reheat duct powered systems

• clogged filter detection

• detection of icing of air conditioning coils and initiation of defrost cycle

• sensitive pressure settings

• dust-tight snap switch

Repair Information

If the P32 Series Sensitive Pressure Switch fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P32 Sensitive Pressure Switch

Maximum overpressure at either connection
Supplied with 1/4 in. compression fitting, 4 in. extension tube, two mounting screws, and O-gasket (angle barbed fitting installed)

Accessories

The switch can be mounted directly or with the supplied mounting bracket.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings VAC	120	208	240
Type P32AC (Standard Differential, 1/2 hp)
AC Full Load A	9.8	5.65	4.9
AC Locked Rotor A	58.8	33.9	29.4
Non-Inductive or Resistive Load	15 A, 24 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 VAC; 360 VA, 120 to 277 VAC
Type P32AF (Close Differential, 1/4 hp)
AC Full Load A	5.8	3.3	2.9
AC Locked Rotor A	34.8	19.8	17.4
Non-Inductive or Resistive Load	10 A, 24 to 277 VAC
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 24 VAC; 360 VA, 120 to 277 VAC

Product Code

Number

Description

FTG18A-600R

Remote Mounting Kit: 4 in. flanged sensing tube,

two barbed fittings, two No. 10 screws, and a gasket

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927200

P45 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay

Description

The P45 Control provides dependable, low lube oil pressure protection for refrigeration compressors. The low-adjustable factory-set pressure setting provides operation to the compressor manufacturer’s specification. A built-in time delay relay, compensated for ambient temperature, allows for pressure pick-up on start and avoids nuisance shutdowns on short duration pressure losses during the running cycle.

Refer to the P45 Series Oil Pressure Cutout Controls with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product Bulletin (LIT-125445) for important product application information.

Features

• universal mounting

• trip-free manual reset

• ambient compensated time delay

Selection Chart

Accessories

These controls are supplied without mounting brackets. If brackets are required, order kit number BKT38A-600R, which contains five 271-51 Angle Mounting Brackets with screws.

Applications

The P45 control is used on semi-hermetic compressors. It measures net oil pressure available to circulate oil through the compressor’s lubrication system. (Net oil pressure is the difference between oil pump pressure and the crank case pressure.)

Repair Information

If the P45 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P45NCALube Oil Pressure Cutout Control

Technical Specifications For all non-corrosive refrigerants. Electrical Rating – Pilot Duty

Time Delay

Heat Circuit

Pilot Duty

120/240 VAC

750 VA, 120/240 VAC

24 VAC

125 VA, 24 VAC

Product Code Number	Time Delay1	Heater Circuit VAC	Type of Reset	Maximum Bellows Pressure, psig (kPa)	Factory Setting, psi (kPa) Fixed	Pressure Connection
Copeland® Compressors
P45NAA-5C	120 seconds	24	Manual	425 (2,390)	9 (62)2	36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
P45NAA-10C	90 seconds					48 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
P45NCA-12C3	120 seconds	120/240				36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
P145NCA-12C4						1/4 in. external flare (Style 5)
P145NCB-12C5
Carlyle® Compressors
P45NCA-82C6	45 seconds	120/240	Manual	425 (2,390)	6.5 (45)7	36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
P145NCA-82C8						1/4 in. external flare (Style 5)
P145NCB-82C9

Relay is not field-replaceable
Switch differential is approximately 5 psi (34 kPa). Time delay relay energizes at 9 psi (61 kPa) pressure difference, de-energizes at 14 psi (97 kPa) difference.
Replaces Ranco® P30-5826
Replaces Ranco P30-5827
Replaces Ranco P30-5827 (Includes alarm wire)
Replaces Carlyle/Carrier® Code No. HKCA-500, 6342050
Switch differential is approximately 4.5 psi (34 kPa). Time delay relay energizes at 6.5 psi (45 kPa) pressure difference, de-energizes at 11 psi (76 kPa) difference.
Replaces Carlyle/Carrier Part No. HKCA-500, 6342050 with 36” SEC99A UltraCap®
Replaces Carlyle/Carrier Part No. HKCA-500, 6342050 with 36” SEC99A UltraCap (Includes alarm wire)

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927260

P74 Series Differential Pressure Control

Description

Series P74 measures the pressure difference between two sources: supply lines and return lines. A change in differential pressure will reposition the switching mechanism to cause corrective action of the supplementary control equipment.

Refer to the P47 Series Steam Pressure Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-125450) for important product application information.

Features

• field-proven Penn switch with a completely enclosed contact mechanism

• pressure differential setting is easily changed without removing the cover

Selection Chart

Applications

• differential pressure sensing on chillers or water-cooled condensers

• lube oil failure cutout for refrigeration compressors (same as the P28, but does not incorporate time delay)

• positioning M100 Series motor-actuated valves (P74JA-2)

• to prove pump operation

Accessories

All models on this page include a universal mounting bracket.

Repair Information

If the P74 Series Differential Pressure Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P74EA-8 Differential Pressure Control

Product Code Number	Switch Action	Range Pressure Differential psig (kPa)1	Switch Differential	Pressure Connections	Bellows Material
For All Non-Corrosive Liquids
P74AA-1C	Single-Pole, Single-Throw (SPST) closes on decreases in pressure difference	8 to 70 Adjustable (55 to 483)	8 to 30 Adjustable	36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut	Stainless steel
P74BA-1C	SPST opens on decrease in pressure difference
P74EA-8C	Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT) (snap-acting)	2 to 26 Adjustable (14 to 207)	3.5 Fixed	36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut	Brass
P74EA-10C				1/4 in. external flare
P74FA-1C		8 to 60 Adjustable (55 to 414)	1.5 Fixed
P74FA-5C				1/4 in. FNPT
P74FA-10C		2 to 26 Adjustable (14 to 207)		36 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut
P74JA-2C	SPDT (floating)	8 to 60 Adjustable (55 to 414)	2.5 Fixed	1/4 in. external flare

1. Maximum continuous pressure to low pressure bellows – 180 psig (1,241 kPa)

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Motor Ratings	120 V	208 V	240 V	277 V
P74AA, P74BA – 1 Phase
AC Full Load A	20.0	18.7	17.0	—
AC Locked Rotor A	120.0	112.2	102.0	—
AC Non-Inductive A	22.0	22.0	22.0	—
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC; 57.5 VA, 120 to 300 VDC
P74EA
AC Full Load A	16.0	9.2	8.0	—
AC Locked Rotor A	96.0	55.2	48.0	—
AC Non-Inductive A	16.0	16.0	16.0	16.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 600 VAC
P74FA
AC Full Load A	6.0	3.4	3.0	—
AC Locked Rotor A	36.0	20.4	18.0	—
AC Non-Inductive A	10.0	10.0	10.0	10.0
Pilot Duty	125 VA, 120 to 277 VAC
P74JA
1 A; 24 VAC Class 2; 50/60 Hz

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1927280

P128 and P145 Series Lube Oil Pressure Controls

Description

The P128 and P145 Series Controls provide dependable low pressure lube oil cut-out for pressure lubricated refrigeration compressors. The P128 Series offer adjustable range settings.

The P128 and P145 controls feature a 1/4 in. external flare pressure connection which may be used with a refrigerant hose or cap tube such as SEC99 UltraCap.

Refer to the P28 and P128 Series Lube Oil Control with Built-in Time Delay Relay Product Bulletin (LIT-125420) for important product application information.

Features

• ambient compensated time delay relay

• trip-free manual reset

• industry standard

• P128 is fully adjustable throughout its range

• P145 is factory set to compressor manufacturer’s specifications

Applications

Use these controls for lube oil cutout on hermetic and semi-hermetic compressors used in commercial air-conditioning and commercial and industrial refrigeration systems.

Selection Chart

P128AA Lube Oil Pressure Control

Technical Specifications

Pressure controls P128 and P145 are designed to be used with SEC99 UltraCap. Product specifications for P128 are the same as P28 model. Refer to P28 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control (With Time Delay) (LIT-1927185). Product specifications for P145 are the same as P45 model. Refer to P45 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control (With Time Delay) (LIT-1927185).

Also note the selection chart below.

P145NCA Lube Oil Pressure Control

Accessories

Some controls are supplied less mounting brackets. If brackets are required, order kit number BKT38A-600, which contains

five 271-51 angle mounting brackets with screws; or BKT38A-601 which contains one mounting bracket with screws.

Repair Information

If the P128 and the P145 Series Lube Oil Pressure Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Product Code Number	Time Delay	Heater Circuit VAC	Type of Reset	Range psig (kPa)		Refrigerant	Pressure Connection
				Adjustable	Non-Adjustable
P128AA-1C1	90 seconds	120/240	Manual	8 to 70 (55 to 483)	—	Non-corrosive	1/4 in. external flared connection
P128AA-2C2	60 seconds
P128AA-17C3	120 seconds
P145NCA-12C4				—	Factory Set 9 (62)	Non-corrosive
P145NCA-82C5	45 seconds				Factory Set 6.5 (45)
P145NCB-12C6	120 seconds				Factory Set 9 (62)
P145NCB-82C7	45 seconds				Factory Set 6.5 (45)

Replacement for P28AA-1*. Replaces Ranco® P30-3701.
Replacement for P28AA-2*. Replaces Ranco P30-3601.
Replacement for P28AA-17*. Replaces Ranco P30-3801.
Replacement for P45NCA-12*. (Copeland Model) Replaces Ranco P30-5826.
Replacement for P45NCA-82*. (Carlyle Model).
Copeland model with alarm circuit
Carlyle model with alarm circuit

* SEC99 UltraCap Hose must be ordered separately.

Electromechanical Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1900115

P12 Series Differential Pressure Controls

Description

The P12 Series Differential Pressure Controls are suitable for use with oil and/or

non-corrosive refrigerants. The switch is actuated by a difference in pressure between the two sensing elements. The control is factory-set to open the switch (COM to 1) at a differential pressure of 18 psi (124 kPa) and close the switch (COM to 1) at a differential pressure of 12 psi (83 kPa). The control is not field-adjustable.

This control may be connected to a P28 Lube Oil Control, with time delay, to give complete monitoring of lubrication on two refrigeration compressors driven by one motor.

Refer to the P12 Series Differential Pressure Control Product Bulletin (LIT-997452) for important product application information.

Repair Information

If the P12 Series Differential Pressure Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P12AA

Differential Pressure Control

Selection Chart

Product Code

Number

Differential Pressure

Maximum

Overpressure, psi (kPa)

Enclosure

Fitting

COM to 1 OPENS

COM to 1 CLOSES

P12AA-3C

18 psi (124 kPa)

12 psi (83 kPa)

500 (3,447)

NEMA1 Enclosure

1/4 in. external SAE flare fitting

Electronic Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1900355

P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control

Description

The P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control is designed for use on refrigeration compressors equipped with an oil pump that accepts a single-point differential pressure switch. The P400 switch continuously monitors net lube oil pressure and the P545 control locks out the compressor if lube oil pressure falls below the manufacturer’s recommended net pressure for longer than the recommended lube oil time delay. Front-mount LEDs indicate the status of the lubrication system, and a user-selectable, minimum-off time delay can be set to minimize compressor short cycling.

A Johnson Controls/PENN® R310AD Current Sensing Switch, sold separately, may be used to disable the P545 control lockout circuit during abnormal compressor shutdowns.

Refer to the P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control Product Bulletin (LIT-12011012) for important product application information.

Features

• single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) relay contacts for liquid line solenoid and alarm applications allow liquid line solenoid to be closed if the P545 control shuts off the compressor due to low oil pressure and provides alarm indication, including circuits that use neon lights

Selection Charts

P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control

• relay contact output for compressor provides reliable, long-lasting operation

• built-in test circuit verifies proper control operation quickly, without additional tools or equipment

• improved noise immunity exceeds immunity requirements of UL 991 for transient overvoltage: IEC 61000-4-3 for radiated Radio Frequency (RF) and IEC 61000-4-6 for RF-induced conducted disturbances

• jumper-selectable anti-short cycle time delays provide for a wide range of

anti-short cycle strategies that meet most equipment requirements— the anti-short cycle delay feature may allow for the elimination of an external short-cycle timer

• user-friendly display panel displays the status of the compressor lubrication system continuously

• backwards compatibility allows easy replacement of existing electronic lube oil controls

Repair Information

If the P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P545 Control with P400 Switch

Product Code Number	Lube Oil Delay (Seconds)	P400 Switch	Wiring Harness	Fits Compressors Manufactured by
P545NCB-22C1	120	P400AD-2	WHA-P400-100	Copeland
P545NCB-25C1	90	P400BD-1	WHA-P400-125	Bitzer
P545NCB-82C1	120	P400AD-1	WHA-P400-100	Carlyle

1. Switch and wiring harness included

Control and Sensor/Switch Compatibility

Test

P345 or P445 Control

with P400 Switch

P545 Control and

P400 Switch

Wiring Harness1

WHA-P400-xxx

Test Switch

Does not function2

Immediate

WHA-P400-xxx is the two-wire harness supplied with the P545 control and the P400 switch.
When the P445 Control is wired to a P400 Switch, the Test button may operate when first powered up; however, after a couple minutes of operation, the Test Switch function no longer works. All other control functions operate normally.

Electronic Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls

P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control (Continued)

Accessories

P400 Single-Point Differential Lube Oil Pressure Switch

Product Code Number1	Open Point (Differential Pressure)	Close Point (Differential Above Open Point)	Threads	Wiring Harness
P400AD-1C	7.0 ±1.0 psi	less than or equal to 2.0 psi	3/4-16 UNF	WHA-P400-100
P400AD-2C	12.75 ±0.75 psi	less than or equal to 1.5 psi	3/4-16 UNF	WHA-P400-100
P400BD-1C	10.0 ±1.5 psi	less than or equal to 3.0 psi	M20 x 1.5	WHA-P400-125

1. Wiring harness included

Wiring Harnesses and Other Accessories

Product Code Number	Description
KITP545-82C1	CST29A-600C Sensor Block; P545NCB-82 Control; P400AD-1C Switch; WHA-P400-100C Wiring Harness
WHA-P400-100C	3-1/3 ft (1 m) length wiring harness
WHA-P400-125C	4 ft (1-1/4 m) length wiring harness
WHA-P400-250C	8 ft (2-1/2 m) length wiring harness
WHA-P400-430C	14 ft (4-1/3 m) length wiring harness
R310AD-1C	Low-voltage Current Sensing Switch
271-51	Universal Mounting Bracket

1. Contact Carlyle Compressor Co. at 1-800-462-2759 to order Sensor Block Gasket 06DA680063.

Technical Specifications

P545NCB Electronic Lube Oil Control
Power Requirements	120 or 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz +10%, -15%; power consumption: 3 VA
Open Point (Differential Pressure)	P545NCB-22/P400AD-2: 12.75 ± 0.75 psi (87.9 ± 5.17 kPa) P545NCB-25/P400BD-1: 10 ± 1.5 psi (68.9 ± 10.3 kPa) P545NCB-82 P400AD-1: 7 ± 1.0 psi (48.2 ± 6.9 kPa)
Lube Oil Time Delay (Factory Settings)	P545NCB-22: 120 ± 15 seconds P545NCB-25: 90 ± 12 seconds P545NCB-82: 120 ± 15 seconds
Anti-Short Cycle Timer	Four selectable positions: 0, 35, 65, and 100 seconds (nominal times)
Type of Refrigerant	Non-corrosive refrigerants only
Electrical Connections	Control: Screw type terminals on a barrier terminal strip Sensor: Snap-connect at sensor end, three-pin plug at control end
Maximum Electrical Rating	Isolated relay output to compressor contactor (M-1 and M-2) Pilot duty 375 VA at 120 VAC, 750 VA at 240 VAC
Alarm Circuit (Relay)	NOA contact: Pilot duty 125 VA at 120/240 VAC; 60 W tungsten at 120/240 VAC NCA contact: Pilot duty 125 VA at 120 VAC, 250 VA at 240 VAC
Backplate Material Case and Cover Material	0.062 in. (1 mm) cold rolled steel High impact thermoplastic
Ambient Operating Conditions	-40 to 131°F (-40 to 5°C)
Ambient Storage Conditions	-40 to 185°F (-40 to 85°C)
Approximate Shipping Weight	1.80 lb (0.82 kg)
Agency Listings	UL Listed, File SA516, CCN SDFY UL Listed for Canada, File SA516, CCN SDFY7

Electronic Lube Oil and Differential Pressure Controls Code No. LIT-1900111

CST29A Adaptor Block for Carlyle® Compressors

Description

The Johnson Controls/PENN® CST29A Adaptor Block is designed for use on Carlyle® compressors (models O6CC, O6D, and O6E) equipped with an oil pump. The adaptor block allows for the installation of the P400 single point differential pressure switch for use with the P545NCB-82 electronic lube oil control.

Refer to the CST29A Adapter Block for Carlyle Compressors Product Bulletin (LIT-125730) for important product application information.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Description

CST29A-600C

Adaptor Block for Carlyle Compressor Series O6CC, O6D, and O6E;

Includes Allen-head bolts.

Accessories

Features

• simple installation— provides easy conversion of electromechanical lube oil control system to electronic equivalent

• designed specifically for Carlyle applications— applies to Carlyle compressor models O6CC, O6D, and O6E

Repair Information

If the CST29A Adaptor Block for Carlyle® Compressors fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement adaptor, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

CST29A Adaptor Block

Product Code Number	Description
P545NCB-82C	Electronic Lube Oil Pressure Control, 120 second delay before lockout, with P400AD-1 switch and WHA-P400-100 switch cable
P400AD-1C	Replacement Differential Pressure Switch with WHA-P400-100 Wire Harness Open at 7 ±1.0 psi, Close Less than or Equal to 2.0 psig above Open Point
KITP545-82C	Single Pack P545 with Adaptor Block and Allen-head Bolts
WHA-P400-100C	3-1/3 ft (1 m) Length Wiring Harness
WHA-P400-125C	4 ft (1-1/4 m) Length Wiring Harness
WHA-P400-250C	8 ft (2-1/2 m) Length Wiring Harness
WHA-P400-400C	14 ft (4-1/3 m) Length Wiring Harness
Carlyle Supplied Parts
06DA6800631	Adaptor Block Gasket for Carlyle Compressor Series O6CC, O6D, and O6E

Order this part from a Carlyle distributor. For information on the nearest Carlyle distributor, contact Carlyle at 1-800-462-2759.

Pressure Sensors and Accessories Code No. LIT-1927395

Replacement Timing Relays for P28 and P29 Lube Oil Controls

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Voltage	Reset	Alarm Circuit	Timing (Seconds)
RLY13A-616R	120/240 VAC	Manual	No	120
RLY13A-613R	12 VAC	Manual	No	120
RLY13A-609R	24 VAC or DC	Manual	No	120
RLY13A-608R	120/240 VAC	Automatic	No	90
RLY13A-602R	120/240 VAC	Manual	No	90
RLY13A-600R	120/240 VAC	Manual	No	60
RLY13A-617R	120/240 VAC	Manual	No	45
RLY13A-610R	120/240 VAC	Manual	No	30

Pressure Sensors and Accessories Code No. LIT-1927275

P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches

Description

P100 Series switches are encapsulated, nonadjustable, single-pole, single-throw (SPST), direct-mount switches for use with non-corrosive refrigerants. The switches are available with automatic reset in both open low and open high configurations and manual reset with open high action.

Refer to the P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-121485) for important product application information.

Features

• compact size and light weight allow for direct mounting

• trip-free manual reset (manual reset models); contacts cannot be overridden by continued depression of the reset button

• use with all non-corrosive refrigerants

• encapsulated switch, dust tight

• 1/4 in. Internal flare fitting with built-in Schrader type depressor is standard

• electrical connections are made to 48 in. leads

Applications

• low limit, high limit, and fan cycling control in commercial refrigeration

• ice machines

• food service equipment

Repair Information

If the P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switch

Technical Specifications

Standard Duty Electrical Contact Ratings

Switch Action-Model Numbers	SPST-P100AA, AC, AG, AJ, CA, CC, CG, CJ, DA, and DC		SPST-P100AP, CP
Motor Ratings	120V	240V	120V	240V
AC Full Load Ampere	5.8	2.9	6.0	6.0
AC Locked Rotor Ampere	34.8	15.0	36.0	36.0
Non-Inductive Ampere	–	–	–	–
Inductive Ampere	–	–	–	–
Pilot Duty	375 VA		375 VA

Heavy Duty Electrical Contact Ratings

Switch Action-Model Numbers	SPST-P100AE and CE				SPDT-P100EE
Motor Ratings	120V		240V		120V		240V
Contact Type	N.O.	N.C.	N.O.	N.C.	N.O.	N.C.	N.O.	N.C.
AC Full Load Ampere	13.0	13.0	10.0	10.0	5.8	13.0	2.9	10.0
AC Locked Rotor Ampere	65.0	60.0	45.0	45.0	34.8	60.0	17.4	45.0
Non-Inductive Ampere	13.0	25.0	10.0	25.0	10.0	25.0	5.0	25.0
Inductive Ampere	15.0	15.0	15.0	15.0	15.0	15.0	15.0	15.0
Pilot Duty	278 VA	125 VA	278 VA	125 VA	278 VA	125 VA	278 VA	125 VA

Pressure Sensors and Accessories

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-116

Selection Chart (Part 1 of 3)

P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches (Continued)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Setpoints – psig (kPa)

Replaces:

Opens

Closes

Ranco

Robert- shaw

Saginomiya

Danfoss

Klixon

Supco

Wilspec

International

Refrigeration Products

Gemline

P100AC-1C2

Open on Pressure Drop

5 (34)

20 (138)

MPL-7001

–

ACB-2UA318W

–

PS80-K2-F0305- 020-005

SLP0520

HR201A020005D

SLP0520

–

P100AP-354C

5 (34)

30 (207)

–

3100-002

–

SLP0530

–

P100AP-15C

10 (69)

25 (172)

HR00011A1R702

3100-050

ACB-2UA97W

061F7523

PS80-K2-F0307- 025-005

SLP1025

HR201A025010D

SLP1025

–

P100AP-201C

10 (69)

32 (221)

MPL-7011

3100-050

ACB-2UA101

–

SLP1032

–

SLP1032

–

P100AC-2C2

15 (103)

30 (207)

MPL-7002

–

P100AP-356C

20 (138)

45 (310)

–

3100-003

ACB-2UA40W

–

SLP2045

–

P100AP-12C

25 (172)

50 (345)

–

ACB-2UA143

–

PS80-K2-F0316- 050-005

SLP2550

HR201A050025D

SLP2550

–

P100AP-9C

25 (172)

80 (551)

MPL-7003

3101-003

–

PS80-K2-F0325- 080-005

SLP2580

HR201A080025D

SLP2580

–

P100AP-105C

30 (207)

60 (413)

–

3100-004

ACB-2UA94

–

SLP3560

–

P100AP-2C

35 (241)

60 (414)

MPL-7004

3100-004

–

SLP3560

–

SLP3560

–

P100AP-10C

40 (276)

60 (413)

HR00011A1R704

–

P100AP-357C

40 (276)

80 (551)

–

3100-052

ACB-2UA354W

–

PS80-K2-F0326- 080-005

SLP4080

HR201A080040D

SLP4080

–

P100AP-361C

50 (345)

90 (620)

–

PS80-KS-F0328- 090-005

SLP5090

HR201A090050D

SLP5090

–

P100AP-358C

75 (517)

100 (689)

–

ACB-2UA441W

–

SLP75100

–

P100AP-351C1

75 (517)

120 (827)

–

SFC75120

–

P100AP-352C1

110 (758)

170

(1,171)

–

SFC110170

–

P100AP-353C1

126 (868)

264

(1,819)

–

SFC125265

–

P100AP-3C1

150

(1,034)

225

(1,551)

MPF-7008

–

ACB-2UA685W

–

SFC150225

–

P100AP-359C1

165

(1,137)

215

(1,481)

–

3100-215

ACB-2UA48W

–

P100AP-4C1

170

(1,172)

250

(1,724)

–

ACB-2UA631W

–

SFC170250

–

P100AP-362C1

195

(1,344)

240

(1,654)

–

3100-080

–

P100AP-200C1

195

(1,344)

275

(1,895)

–

Pressure Sensors and Accessories

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-117

Selection Chart (Part 2 of 3)

P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches (Continued)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Setpoints – psig (kPa)

Replaces:

Opens

Closes

Ranco

Robert- shaw

Saginomiya

Danfoss

Klixon

Supco

Wilspec

International Refrigeration Products

Gemline

P100AP-354C1

Open on Pressure Drop

210

(1,447)

275

(1,895)

–

ACB-2UA319W

–

SFC210275

–

SFC210275

–

P100EE-79C

300

(2,068)

370

(2,551)

–

P100AP-332C1

300

(2,068)

400

(2,758)

MPF7010

–

ACB-2UA627W

061F7514

–

SFC300400

–

P100CP-157C

Open on Pressure Rise

225

(1,550)

150

(1,034)

–

P100CP-158C

250

(1,723)

150

(1,034)

–

PS80-K1-0336- 250-150

SHP250150

HR202A250150D

SHP250150

–

P100CP-159C

270

(1,860)

200

(1,378)

–

P100CC-9C2

275

(1,896)

175

(1,207)

–

3100-112

ACB-2UB724W

–

P100CP-91C

300

(2,067)

200

(1,378)

–

ACB-2UB723W

–

PS80-K1-0341- 300-200

–

HR202A300200D

SHP300200

–

P100CP-166C

325

(2,239)

225

(1,550)

–

061F6080

PS80-K1-0346- 320-230

SHP325225

HR202A325230D

–

P100CP-140C

350

(2,412)

245

(1,688)

–

3100-150

ACB-2UB273W

061F3212

PS80-K1-0348- 350-245

–

HR202A350245D

SHP350250

–

P100CP-160C

375

(2,584)

275

(1,895)

–

ACB-2UB191

061F7509

–

SHP375265

–

P100CP-161C

400

(2,756)

200

(1,378)

–

3100-152

–

PS80-K1-0357- 400-200

SHP400200

HR202A400200D

SHP400200

–

P100CP-162C

400

(2,756)

280

(1,929)

–

PS80-K1-0358- 400-280

SHP400280

HR202A400280D

SHP400280

–

P100EE-78C

400

(2,756)

300

(2,068)

–

P100CP-1C

400

(2,758)

300

(2,068)

MPH-7107

3100-151

ACB-2UB35

061FS14

PS80-K1-0359- 400-300

SHP400300

HR202A400300D

SHP400300

PC 151

P100CP-156C

410

(2,825)

290

(1,998)

–

P100CP-163C

425

(2,928)

300

(2,067)

–

PS80-K1-0360- 425-300

SHP425300

HR202A425300D

SHP425300

–

P100CP-2C

425

(2,930)

325

(2,241)

MPH-7108

3100-100

ACB-2UB282W

–

SHP425325

–

PC 100

P100CP-164C

450

(3,101)

250

(1,723)

–

PS80-K1-0363- 450-250

SHP450250

HR202A450250D

SHP450250

–

P100CP-38C

500

(3,447)

325

(2,241)

–

P100CP-165C

600

(4,134)

475

(3,273)

HR00011B1R704

–

061F7517

–

SHP600475

–

P100CP-85C

665

(4,585)

565

(3,895)

–

SHP665565

–

www.johnsoncontrols.com

R-118

Selection Chart (Part 3 of 3)

P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches (Continued)

The performance specifications are nominal and conform to acceptable industry standards. For applications at conditions beyond these specifications, consult the local Johnson Controls office.

Product Code Number

Switch Action

Setpoints – psig (kPa)

Replaces:

Opens

Closes

Ranco

Robert- shaw

Saginomiya

Danfoss

Klixon

Supco

Wilspec

International Refrigeration Products

Gemline

P100DA-35C

350

(2,413)

Lockout Manual Reset

–

ACBPC45M

–

P100DC-3C3

375

(2,586)

Lockout Manual Reset

–

SMR375

–

P100DA-1C

410

(2,827)

Lockout Manual Reset

–

3100-103

ACBPB115M

–

29PSL012-24

SMR410

HM202A410000D

SMR410

PC 103

P100DA-100C

Open on

415

(2,859)

Lockout Manual Reset

–

3100-103

–

29PSL004-1

–

HM202A415000D

SMR410

–

Pressure

P100DA-101C

440

(3,032)

Lockout Manual Reset

–

SMR440

–

SMR440

–

Rise

P100DA-2C

475

(3,275)

Lockout Manual Reset

–

3100-106

–

HM202A475000D

–

P100DA-86C

575

(3,964)

Lockout Manual Reset

–

SMR575

–

P100DA-81C

630

(4,343)

Lockout Manual

Reset

–

SMR630

–

1. Models are designed for condenser fan cycling.

Pressure Sensors and Accessories

1. Includes conduit clamp for 3/8 in. flexible metal conduit.
2. Includes conduit box with opening for 1/2 in. conduit connector.

Pressure Sensors and Accessories Code No. LIT-1900405

P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers

Description

The P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers are compact, economical, rugged, direct-mount pressure transducers designed for use in commercial refrigeration and air conditioning applications.

These transducers produce an analog signal based on the sensed pressure.

The P499 Series transducers feature environmentally protected electronics with stainless steel construction. The digitally compensated P499 transducers are highly accurate over a broad temperature range, resisting the effects of wide ambient temperature swings, high humidity, condensation, and icing.

The pressure port is machined from a solid piece of 17-4PH stainless steel. No O-rings, organic materials, or welds are exposed to the pressure media, allowing for a leak-proof, all-metal, sealed pressure system.

The P499 Series transducers operate with any corrosive or non-corrosive pressure medium that is compatible with 17-4PH

stainless steel, including water, condensate, carbon dioxide, glycol, most refrigerants (including ammonia), and many other compatible fluids and gases.

The P499 Series provides transducers in a variety of pressure ranges, covering most common refrigeration and air conditioning applications.

Features

• single-piece machined 17-4PH stainless steel pressure port provides a durable assembly that eliminates refrigerant loss due to O-ring or weld failures; resists damage due to physical shock, vibration, and pressure pulsations; enables use with non-corrosive or corrosive pressure media that is compatible with 17-4PH stainless steel.

• environmentally protected electronics withstand the effects of adverse conditions associated with typical HVAC/R applications, including freeze/thaw applications on suction lines.

• reliable, repeatable performance and long operating life minimizes service and replacement costs.

• many available pressure ranges provide a single line of transducers for all refrigeration and air conditioning application needs.

• 1% total error band provides high-accuracy performance.

• slender body design facilitates use of deep-socket wrenches for ease of installation; requires zero turning radius.

• CE and UL agency listings allow for global applications.

P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers; Style 47 Fitting Shown on the Left and Style 49 Fitting Shown on the Right

Refer to the P449 Series Electronic Pressure Transducer Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) for important product application information.

Repair Information

If the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducer fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement transducer, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Accessories

P499 transducers require wire harnesses for all models that do not have an integral cable.

Wire Harnesses with Packard Electrical Connectors

Product Code Number1	Length
WHA-PKD3-200C	6-1/2 ft (2.0 m)
WHA-PKD3-400C	13 ft (4.0 m)
WHA-PKD3-600C	19-5/8 ft (6.0 m)

1. Wire harnesses for P399 transducers and P499 transducers are interchangeable.

Selection Chart

0.5 to 4.5 VDC Ratiometric P499 Transducer Models with Packard Electrical Connections, psis

Product Code Number	Pressure Connection	Pressure Range1		Individual or Kit2
		Minimum Pressure (Pmin)	Maximum Pressure (Pmax)
P499RAPS100C	1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49)	-10 psis (-0.7 bar) [20 in. Hg]	100 psis (6.9 bar)	Individual
P499RAPS100K				Kit
P499RAPS102C		0 psis (0 bar)	200 psis (13.8 bar)	Individual
P499RAPS102K				Kit
P499RCPS100C	1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread (7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)	-10 psis (-0.7 bar) [20 in. Hg]	100 psis (6.9 bar)	Individual
P499RCPS100K				Kit
P499RAPS102C		0 psis (0 bar)	200 psis (13.8 bar)	Individual
P499RAPS102K				Kit

Transducer sealed and rated for IP67 harsh environments.
The Individual pack comes with a transducer only – you must order the wire harness separately. The Kit is packaged with a transducer, 6-1/2 ft (2 m) wire harness, and technical documentation.

Pressure Sensors and Accessories

P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers (Continued)

0.5 to 4.5 VDC Ratiometric P499 Transducer Models with Integral 2 m (6-1/2 ft) Shielded Cable, psis

Product Code Number

Pressure Connection

Pressure Range1

Minimum Pressure (Pmin)

Maximum Pressure (Pmax)

P499RCSS101C

1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread

(7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)

0 psis (0 bar)

100 psis (6.9 bar)

1. Transducer sealed and rated for IP67 harsh environments.

0.5 to 4.5 VDC Ratiometric P499 Transducer Models with Packard Electrical Connections, psi

Product Code Number	Pressure Connection	Pressure Range		Individual or Kit1
		Minimum Pressure (Pmin)	Maximum Pressure (Pmax)
P499RAP-101C	1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49)	0 psi (0 bar)	100 psi (6.9 bar)	Individual
P499RAP-101K				Kit
P499RAP-102C		0 psi (0 bar)	200 psi (13.8 bar)	Individual
P499RAP-105C		0 psi (0 bar)	500 psi (34.5 bar)	Individual
P499RAP-105K				Kit
P499RAP-107C		0 psi (0 bar)	750 psi (51.7 bar)	Individual
P499RAP-107K				Kit
P499RCP-101C	1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread (7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)	0 psi (0 bar)	100 psi (6.9 bar)	Individual
P499RCP-101K				Kit
P499RCP-105C		0 psi (0 bar)	500 psi (34.5 bar)	Individual
P499RCP-105K				Kit
P499RCP-107C		0 psi (0 bar)	750 psi (51.7 bar)	Individual
P499RCP-107K				Kit

1. The Individual pack comes with a transducer only – you must order the wire harness separately. The Kit is packaged with a transducer, 6-1/2 ft (2 m) wire harness, and technical documentation.

0 to 10 VDC P499 Transducer Models with Packard Electrical Connections, psi

Product Code Number	Pressure Connection	Pressure Range		Individual or Kit1
		Minimum Pressure (Pmin)	Maximum Pressure (Pmax)
P499VAP-101C	1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49)	0 psi (0 bar)	100 psi (6.9 bar)	Individual
P499VAP-101K				Kit
P499VAP-105C		0 psi (0 bar)	500 psi (34.5 bar)	Individual
P499VAP-105K				Kit
P499VAP-107C		0 psi (0 bar)	750 psi (51.7 bar)	Individual
P499VAP-107K				Kit
P499VCP-101C	1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread (7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)	0 psi (0 bar)	100 psi (6.9 bar)	Individual
P499VCP-101K				Kit
P499VCP-105C		0 psi (0 bar)	500 psi (34.5 bar)	Individual
P499VCP-105K				Kit
P499VCP-107C		0 psi (0 bar)	750 psi (51.7 bar)	Individual
P499VCP-107K				Kit

1. The Individual pack comes with a transducer only, you must order the wire harness separately. The Kit is packaged with a transducer, 6-1/2 ft (2 m) wire harness, and technical documentation.

4 to 20 mA P499 Transducer Models with Packard Electrical Connections, psi (Part 1 of 2)

Product Code Number	Pressure Connection	Pressure Range		Individual or Kit1
		Minimum Pressure (Pmin)	Maximum Pressure (Pmax)
P499AAP-101C	1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49)	0 psi (0 bar)	100 psi (6.9 bar)	Individual
P499AAP-101K				Kit
P499AAP-105C		0 psi (0 bar)	500 psi (34.5 bar)	Individual
P499AAP-105K				Kit
P499AAP-107C		0 psi (0 bar)	750 psi (51.7 bar)	Individual
P499AAP-107K				Kit

Pressure Sensors and Accessories

P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers (Continued)

4 to 20 mA P499 Transducer Models with Packard Electrical Connections, psi (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code Number	Pressure Connection	Pressure Range		Individual or Kit1
		Minimum Pressure (Pmin)	Maximum Pressure (Pmax)
P499ACP-101C	1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread (7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)	0 psi (0 bar)	100 psi (6.9 bar)	Individual
P499ACP-101K				Kit
P499ACP-105C		0 psi (0 bar)	500 psi (34.5 bar)	Individual
P499ACP-105K				Kit
P499ACP-107C		0 psi (0 bar)	750 psi (51.7 bar)	Individual
P499ACP-107K				Kit

The Individual pack comes with a transducer only, you must order the wire harness separately. The Kit is packaged with a transducer, 6-1/2 ft (2 m) wire harness, and technical documentation.

Technical Specifications

P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers
Pressure Ranges		-10 to 100 psis, 0 to 100 psi, 0 to 200 psi, 0 to 500 psi, 0 to 750 psi
Maximum Working Pressure		2x Pressure Range; short duration; infrequent, abnormal condition
Burst Pressure		5x Pressure Range
Vacuum		30 microns (0.03 mm Hg); short term
Media Compatibility		All media compatible with 17-4PH stainless steel, including ammonia
Output Signal		0.5 to 4.5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA
Supply Voltage	0.5 to 4.5 VDC Ratiometric Output	5.0 ±0.25 VDC, Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) or Class 2
	4 to 20 mA Output	9 to 30 VDC, SELV or Class 2
	0 to 10 VDC Output	12 to 30 VDC, SELV or Class 2
Direct-Mount Pressure Connections		1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49), 1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread (7/16-20 UNF) with Depressor (Style 47)
Temperature and Humidity	Storage	-40 to 257F (-40 to 125C)
	Operating	-40 to 185F (-40 to 85C)
	Compensated Range	-4 to 185F (-20 to 85C)
	Humidity	0 to 100% RH
Linearity		±0.25% Full Span best fit straight line
Accuracy		±1% Full Span (maximum) over compensated temperature range
Materials	Pressure Port	17-4PH stainless steel construction
	Packard Connector	40% glass-filled Polyetherimide (PEI)
Vibration		20G, 20 to 200 Hz
Shock		200G/11 ms
Compliance	United States	UL Listed, File E29374, CCN NKPZ UL Recognized for Use in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations, File E322274
	Canada	UL Listed, File E29374, CCN NKPZ7 UL Recognized for Use in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous Locations, File E322274
	Europe	CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc., declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
	Australia/ New Zealand	C-Tick Mark, Emissions Compliant

Pressure Sensors and Accessories Code No. LIT-1900005

R310A Series Current Sensing Switch

Description

The R310A Series Current Sensing Switch detects alternating current (AC) flow in a single circuit without being connected to that circuit. It may be used in any application where current detection is required.

The R310A replaces the R10A used with Johnson Controls/PENN® time delay oil failure cutout controls such as the P28, P45, and P445. These applications incorporate internal line breaking overload protection, where lockout due to overload cycling is unacceptable or undesirable. The

R310A switch is not intended to detect breakage of belts.

The R310A is molded in a high dielectric material, which permits mounting inside a starter or contactor.

Refer to the R310A Series Current Sensing Switch Product Bulletin (LIT-121536) for important product application information.

Features

• small size allows mounting in small enclosure

• solid-state switching contains no moving parts to fail

• low 0.5 ampere activation allows monitoring of most small equipment circuit loads

• high 200 ampere monitoring capacity allows monitoring of heavy duty equipment

• large 0.70 in. (18 mm) diameter sensor hole accepts large diameter wire sizes and multiple coilings of smaller diameter wire sizes

Applications

The R310A Current Sensing Switch is designed to sense alternating current in a conductor that passes through its opening. The R310A sensor closes an electronic switch if the alternating current in the conductor exceeds 0.5 amperes. Thus, the R310A switch may be used for several purposes:

• switch a pilot circuit

• energize a run signal on a device such as a fan, motor, or pump

• monitor motors and electrical loads for proper operation

• monitor on/off status of process motors

The R310A Series Current Sensing Switch is available in two models. The R310AD-1 switch is for use in low-voltage applications, such as with the P445 Electronic Lube Oil Control. The R310AE-2 switch is for use in high-voltage applications, such as with the P28 and

P45 Electromechanical Lube Oil Controls.

The R310A switch avoids nuisance lockouts by sensing the lack of current flow to the motor. Regardless of the reason for motor shutdown, the lube oil control time delay circuit is de-energized when the current flow in the motor supply line drops below 0.5 amperes.

In a typical application, the lube oil control does not lock out when the control circuit shuts off the compressor. However, if the compressor overheats and the internal thermal overload circuits open,

the compressor shuts itself down, which causes the oil pressure to drop. This drop in oil pressure will energize the lube oil control heater (P28, P45) or timer (P445), causing a

R310A Series Current Sensing Switch

nuisance lockout. In this situation, the

R310 switch senses the lack of current to the motor, and is used to de-energize the time delay heater (P28, P45) or electronic timer (P445) before a nuisance lockout occurs.

Repair Information

If the R310A Series Current Sensing Switch fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart Technical Specifications

Product Code Number

Description

R310AD-1C

Current Sensing Switch

Voltage switching capacity: 0 to 30 VAC Used with: P445 Electronic Lube Oil Control

R310AE-2C

Current Sensing Switch

Voltage switching capacity: 120 to 240 VAC Used with: P28 and P45 Electromechanical Lube Oil Controls

R310A Series Current Sensing Switch
Switch Action		SPST, normally open
Current Sensing Range	R310AD-1C	0.5 to 200 Amperes
	R310AE-2C	0.75 to 200 Amperes
Switch Threshold	R310AD-1C	0.5 Amperes
	R310AE-2C	0.75 Amperes
Sensor Supply Voltage		Induced from monitored conductor, isolation 600 VAC RMS
Switching Capacity (General Purpose)	R310AD-1C	0.1A at 30 VAC/DC
	R310AE-2C	0.5 at 250 VAC/DC
Output Polarity		Non-polarity sensitive output
Enclosure		NEMA 1
Ambient Operating Conditions		5 to 140°F (-15 to 60°C); 0 to 95% RH, noncondensing
Ambient Storage Conditions		-40 to 158°F (-40 to 70°C); 0 to 95% RH
Dimensions (H x W x D)		2.34 x 1.85 x 0.875 in. (59 x 46 x 22 mm)
Sensor Hole Size		7/10 in. (17 mm) Diameter
Agency Listings		UL Guide NRNT cUL Guide NRNT7

Pressure Sensors and Accessories Code No. LIT-1900108

Universal Mounting Brackets

Description

The 271-51 is the universal mounting bracket used with many Johnson Controls/PENN® products. BKT38A-601R contains one mounting bracket with screws. BKT38A-600R contains five 271-51 angle mounting brackets with screws.

Selection Chart

Product Code

Number

Description

271-51

Universal Mounting Bracket

BKT38A-600R

Five Universal Mounting Brackets with ten screws

271-51

Universal Mounting Bracket

Pressure Sensors and Accessories Code No. LIT-1900131

SEC99A UltraCap Armored Capillary

Description

The SEC99A UltraCap Armored Capillary is designed for use as a pressure connection in refrigeration and air conditioning applications. This small-orifice capillary minimizes pressure pulsation, and the brass armor sleeve improves resistance to abrasion caused by vibration. The copper capillary inside the armored sleeve allows no effusion of refrigerant to the environment.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Description
Schrader Depressor in One End
SEC99AA-18C	Two straight fittings Length: 18 in. (457 mm)
SEC99AA-24C	Two straight fittings Length: 24 in. (610 mm)
SEC99AA-36C	Two straight fittings Length: 36 in. (914 mm)
SEC99AA-48C	Two straight fittings Length: 48 in. (1,219 mm)
SEC99AA-60C	Two straight fittings Length: 60 in. (1,524 mm)
Schrader Depressor in Both Ends
SEC99AB-18C	One straight and one 90° fitting Length: 18 in. (457 mm)
SEC99AB-24C	One straight and one 90° fitting Length: 24 in. (610 mm)
SEC99AB-36C	One straight and one 90° fitting Length: 36 in. (914 mm)
SEC99AB-48C	One straight and one 90° fitting Length: 48 in. (1,219 mm)
SEC99AB-60C	One straight and one 90° fitting Length: 60 in. (1,524 mm)

UltraCap is designed for use with 1/4 in. SAE external flare fitting connectors, such as those found on the Johnson Controls/PENN® lines of pressure-actuated controls. Integral Schrader valve depressors are available.

UltraCap Armored Capillary is compatible with all common non-corrosive refrigerants. The UltraCap capillary is available in a variety of lengths, and in models with two straight fittings or with one straight fitting and one 90° elbow fitting.

Repair Information

If the SEC99A UltraCap Armored Capillary fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement capillary, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

SEC99AB and SEC99AA UltraCap Armored Capillaries

SEC99A UltraCap Armored Capillary
Capillary Diameters	Inside: 0.062 in. (1 mm); Outside: 0.125 in. (3 mm)
Temperature Range	-50 to 350°F (-46 to 177°C)
Burst Pressure	3,000 psig (20,685 kPa)
Maximum Working Pressure	600 psig (4,137 kPa)
Suggested Torque to Seal	8 to 10 lbft (10.9 to 13.6 Nm)
Fittings: Straight 90° Elbow Material	1/4 in. Internal Flare Connector with Schrader Depressor 1/4 in. Internal Flare Connector with Schrader Depressor Forged Brass Nut with Copper Stem
Agency Listings	UL Recognized: File SA9457, CCN SFCS2 UL Recognized for Canada: SA9457, CCN SFCS8

Refrigerant Sensors/Monitors Code No. LIT-1900954

RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector

Description

The RLD-H10PRO is a professional-grade leak detector for use by refrigeration and air conditioning technicians. This detector senses all CFC, HCFC, and HFC refrigerants and blends, such as R12, R22, R134a, R404a, R410a, R502, and R507 among others. The RLD-H10PRO is self-powered with a rechargeable battery and provides both manual and automatic compensation for background levels of refrigerant. A full line of accessories and maintenance kits are also available, including replacement sensors, tuneup kits, probe extensions, battery chargers, and leak vial bottles.

Refer to the RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector Product Bulletin (LIT-12012073) for important product application information.

Features

positive ion emission heated diode sensor provides the most sensitivity available today, while still detecting all halogenated refrigerant gases

Selection Chart

Product Code

Number

Description

RLD-H10PRO-1

Refrigerant leak detector and

charger

Accessories

• rechargeable battery with low and full charge LEDs enhances portability—no external power required

• high quality air pump supplies constant airflow to the sensor so it responds quickly to leaks; also helps the sensor recover quickly after exposure to a refrigerant so the leak can be verified

• switchable adjustment for manual or automatic balance allows users to choose their preferred method of compensation for background refrigerant levels

• visual and audible signal facilitates sensing in noisy equipment rooms with 360° visibility and a piercing tone. Frequency of noise and light indicates the magnitude of the leak.

• headset jack allows users to hear the leak detector response in noisy environments

• external calibration source and calibration indicators indicate when the sensor is working properly and serves as a reference point to judge leak size

Technical Specifications

RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector
Power Requirements	12 VDC internal battery, or 100 to 240 VAC input/18 V output wall adaptor (included) (RLD-H10-101).
Sensing Element Type	Positive ion emission heated diode
Approximate Sensitivity1	Stationary	0.006 oz./yr
	Moving (Per SAE J2791)	0.1 oz./yr
Automatic Background Adjustment	Mode selection for automatic or manual background zeroing Manual background zeroing provides the best sensitivity.
Leak Alarm	Audible alarm (through internal beeper or stereo headphone jack), visible red LED
Response Time	Approximately 1 second
Warmup Time	Approximately 2 minutes
Probe Length	Approximately 4-1/2 ft (1.4 m)
Ambient Operating Conditions	32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C); 5-90% RH, noncondensing
Ambient Storage Conditions	14 to 140°F (-10 to 60°C); 5-90% RH, noncondensing
Case	Rugged high-density polyethylene
Dimensions (H x W x D)	5-2/5 x 10-1/2 x 8-3/10 in. (137 x 267 x 211 mm)
Compliance	Europe: CE Mark Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
Shipping Weight	5.1 lb (2.3 kg)

RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector

Repair Information

If the RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector fails to operate within its specifications, contact Johnson Controls® application engineering at (414) 524-5535.

Product Code Number	Description
RLD-H10-100	14 inch flexible probe extension
RLD-H10-101	120 VAC power supply adaptor
RLD-H10-102	Cigarette lighter adaptor
RLD-H10-103	Replacement battery charger
RLD-H10-105	Belt pack battery
RLD-H10-600R	Tuneup kit: includes sensor, 100 filters, three airflow balls, three rubber probe tips, and leak vial
RLD-H10-601R	Replacement sensor
RLD-H10-602R	Maintenance kit: includes 100 filters, three airflow balls, three rubber probe tips, and leak vial
RLD-H10-603R	Replacement leak vial
RLD-H10-604R	Replacement for RLD-H10PRO internal battery
RLD-H10-606R	Clear plastic probe tip
RLD-H10-607R	Probe replacement assembly

1. Sensitivity for R12, R22, R134a, R410a, R404a, and R507 when unit is set to small leak setting, manual mode.

Refrigerant Sensors/Monitors Code No. LIT-1900116

RLD Refrigerant Leak Detector Accessories and Replacement Parts

Description

These parts are used on the RLD-H10G-1 and on the RLD-H10PRO-1.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Description Figure
RLD-H10-100	14 in. Flexible Probe Extension
RLD-H10-600R	Tune-up Kit; Includes: One Sensor, 100 Filters, Three Airflow Indicator Balls, Three Probe Tips, One Leak Vial
RLD-H10-601R	Replacement Sensor
RLD-H10-602R	Maintenance Kit; Includes: 100 Replacement Filters, Three Airflow Indicator Balls, Three Probe Tips
RLD-H10-603R	Replacement Leak Vial
RLD-H10-606R	Replacement Clear Plastic Probe Tip
RLD-H10-607R	Replacement Probe Assembly

Liquid Level and Flow Controls Code No. LIT-1922325

F59 Series Sump Pump Switch

Description

The F59 Series Controls are designed to start an electric motor on liquid level rise and stop the motor on liquid level drop. The control cuts in when upper weight is submerged approximately halfway, and cuts out when lower weight is approximately half-exposed.

Each switch includes 36 in. cable and two weights.

Refer to the F59 Series Liquid Level Switch for Sump Operations Product Bulletin

(LIT-125215) for important product application information.

Type F59A, F59H

F59A-2 Sump Pump Switch F59H-1 Sump Pump Switch

Line

Action on Rise in Liquid Level

f59.eps

F59 Series Action Diagram

Features

F59D-5 is equipped with a power cord and a piggyback style plug. The external prongs plug into the wall outlet, and the sump pump cord plugs into the internal end of the plug.

Applications

Use for On/Off control of sump pumps.

Technical Specifications

Electrical Ratings

Selection Charts

Product Code Number	Contact Action	Mounting	Range Adjuster
F59A-1C	Double-Pole, Single-Throw (DPST)	External mounting bracket	Drop cord wiring
F59A-2C	DPST	External mounting – includes universal mounting bracket and 24 in. strap for quick, easy mounting on the motor, on the pedestal or on the discharge pipe.	Drop cord wiring
F59H-1C	DPST	External mounting bracket	Conduit wiring –7/8 in. conduit openings in case

Replacement Parts

Product Code

Number

Replacement Weight Kit for F59 Series

WGT11A-600R

Two Weights (Floats), 40 in. Plastic Cable, Weights with 3 in. Polyethylene Cable

WGT11A-604R

Two Weights (Floats), 36 in. Monel Wire, Two Float Support Plates, Weights with 3 in. Monel Cable

Volts	Horsepower
F59A-1
120 VAC	1 hp
240 VAC	1 hp
32 VDC	1/4 hp
F59A-2
120 VAC	1 hp
240 VAC	1 hp
32 VDC	1/4 hp
F59D-5
120 VAC	1/2 hp
F59H-1
120 VAC	1 hp
240 VAC	1 hp
32 VDC	1/4 hp

Liquid Level and Flow Controls Code No. LIT-1900948

F261 Series Fluid Flow Switches

Description

The F261 Series Flow Switches respond to fluid flow in lines carrying water, ethylene glycol, or other nonhazardous fluids. These models also work in applications with swimming pool water and lubricating oils.

F261 Series Standard Flow Switches use a variety of paddle sizes to respond to fluid flow rates in applications with pipe sizes greater than 1 inch trade size.

Refer to the F261 Series Fluid Flow Switches Product Bulletin (LIT-12011987) for important product application information.

Selection Chart

F261 Series Standard Model Flow Switches

Features

Type 3R (NEMA) or Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure allows use in indoor or outdoor applications.
Viton® diaphragms allow use in fluid lines carrying chlorinated water, treated water, or other nonhazardous fluids.
low-flow operation on low-flow models actuates switch with less than

1.0 GPM (3.8 L/min) flow for water applications or 9.0 GPM (34.1 L/min) flow for steam applications.

maximum fluid pressure of 290 psig (20 bar) permits use in a wide range of pressure flow conditions.

Repair Information

If the F261 Series Flow Switch fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement F261 Series Flow Switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

F261 Flow Switch

Product Code Number	Description
F261KAH-V01C	Standard model flow switch with Type 3R (NEMA) enclosure; 1 in., 2 in., 3 in., and 6 in. stainless steel paddles, lock-tooth washer, and stainless steel paddle screw supplied uninstalled
F261MAH-V01C	Standard model flow switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure; 1 in., 2 in., 3 in., and 6 in. stainless steel paddles, lock-tooth washer, and stainless steel paddle screw supplied uninstalled
F261MAL-V01C	Standard model flow switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure; 1 in., 2 in., 3 in., and 6 in. stainless steel paddles, lock-tooth washer, and stainless steel paddle supplied uninstalled.

F261 Series Low-Flow Model Flow Switches

Product Code Number	Description
F261KEH-V01C	Low-flow model flow switch with Type 3R (NEMA) enclosure; 1/2 in. x 1/2 in. External NPTF inlet and outlet
F261KFH-V01C	Low-flow model flow switch with Type 3R (NEMA) enclosure; 3/4 in. x 3/4 in. External NPTF inlet and outlet
F261KFH-V02C	Low-flow model flow switch with Type 3R (NEMA) enclosure; 3/4 in. x 3/4 in. External NPTF inlet and outlet
F261MEH-V01C	Low-flow model flow switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure; 1/2 in. x 1/2 in. External NPTF inlet and outlet
F261MFH-V01C	Low-flow model flow switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure; 3/4 in x 3/4 in. External NPTF inlet and outlet

Replacement Paddle Parts

Product Code Number	Description
KIT21A-600	Stainless steel three-piece paddle (3 in., 2 in., and 1 in. segments)
KIT21A-601	Stainless steel 6 in. paddle
PLT52A-600R	Stainless steel three-piece paddle (3 in., 2 in., and 1 in. segments) and Stainless steel 6 in. paddle

Technical Specifications

F261xxH Series Standard Controls Electrical Ratings

Volts, 50/60 Hz	UL60730/UL1059				EN60730
Volts, 50/60 Hz	24	120	208	240	24	230
Horsepower	–	1	1	1	–	–
Full Load Amperes	–	16	10	10	–	8
Locked Rotor Amperes	–	96	60	60	–	48
Resistive Amperes	16	16	10	10	16	16
Pilot Duty VA	125	720	720	720	77	720

Liquid Level and Flow Controls

F261 Series Fluid Flow Switches (Continued)

UL Conformity Declaration Information

Information	Description
Purpose of Control	F261 Fluid Flow Switch
Construction of Control	Electronic independently mounted control
Number of Cycles	100,000 cycles
Method of Mounting Control	Mounting to sensed media vessel/orientation
Type 1 or Type 2 Action	Type 1.C (Microinterruption)
External Pollution Situation	Pollution degree 4
Internal Pollution Situation	Pollution degree 2
Rated Impulse Voltage	4,000 VAC
Ball Pressure Temperature	Enclosure: 266°F (130°C) Switch Component: 252°F (122°C)
Control Adjustment Instruction	–
Field Wiring Rating	Wire/Cord Temperature Ratings: 140°F (60°C) only permitted when ambient air and media are less than 113°F (45°C) 167°F (75°C) only permitted when ambient air and media are less than 140°F (60°C) 194°F (90°C) only permitted when ambient air is less than 140°F (60°C) and media is less than 167°F (75°C) 302°F (150°C) permitted when ambient air is less than 140°F (60°C) and media is less than 249°F (121°C)
Vessel Pressure	F261 Fluid Flow Switch: 290 psi (20 Bar)

F261 Series Fluid Flow Switches
Switch	Single-Pole, Double-Throw (SPDT)
Enclosure	UL: Type 3R or Type 4 CE: IP43 (IP23 with drain hole plug removed) or IP67
Wiring Connections	Three color-coded screw terminals and one ground terminal
Conduit Connection	One 7/8 in. (22 mm) hole for 1/2 in. trade size (or PG16) conduit
Pipe Connector	Standard: 1 in. 11-1/2 NPT Threads
Maximum Fluid Pressure	290 psi (20 bar)
Minimum Fluid Temperature1	-20°F (-29°C)
Maximum Fluid Temperature2	250°F (121°C)
Ambient Conditions	-40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E6688; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia/New Zealand Mark: RCM Compliant

Ensure that the low liquid temperature combined with the low ambient temperature does not lead to the freezing the liquid inside the body (or bellows, where appropriate). Please observe the liquid freezing point.
At higher ambient temperatures, the maximum allowed liquid temperature becomes lower. The temperature of the electrical switch inside should not exceed 158°F (70°C).

Liquid Level and Flow Controls Code No. LIT-1900949

F262 Airflow Switch

Description

The F262 Airflow Switch detects airflow or the absence of airflow by responding only to the velocity of air movement within a duct. The single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) control can be wired to open one circuit and close a second circuit for either signaling or interlock purposes.

Airflow failure during the normal operation of air handling systems may cause overheating, coil icing, or other conditions that may be detrimental to the equipment.

Refer to the F262 Airflow Switch Product Bulletin (LIT-12011988) for important product application information.

Application

The F262 switch detects airflow or the absence of airflow by responding only to the velocity of air movement within a duct. The SPDT control can be wired to open one circuit and close a second circuit for either signaling or interlock purposes.

Failure of airflow during the normal operation of air handling systems may cause overheating, coil icing, and other conditions that may be detrimental to the equipment.

Typical applications include:

Make-up air systems
Air cooling or heating processes
Exhaust systems

The control has a Type 3R (NEMA) enclosure with an integral mounting plate. A mounting plate gasket is supplied with each switch.

Features

Type 3R (NEMA) Polycarbonate enclosure allows use in indoor applications and provides dust protection and is approved for use in a plenum according to NEC
dependable dust-protected SPDT snap-acting PENN switch detects the presence or absence of airflow
large wiring space makes wiring convenient and easily accessible
easily accessible range adjustment screw allows easy field adjustment

F262 Airflow Control

Repair Information

If the F262 Airflow Switch fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement F262 Airflow Switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Charts

F262 Airflow Switch

Product Code Number

Description

F262KDH-01C

Airflow switch with a 2-1/8 in. wide x 6-7/8 in. long (54 mm x 175 mm) paddle installed and a

3-1/8 in. wide x 6-7/8 in. long (79 mm x 175 mm) paddle supplied with the control

Replacement Paddle Kits for F262 Switch

Product Code Number	Description
PLT112-1R	2-1/8 in. wide x 6-7/8 in. long (54 mm x 175 mm) paddle
PLT112-2R	3-1/8 in. wide x 6-7/8 in. long (79 mm x 175 mm) paddle

Technical Specifications

F262 Switch Electrical Ratings

Volts 50/60 Hz	UL60730				EN60730
Volts 50/60 Hz	24	120	208	240	24	230
Horsepower	–	1	1	1	–	–
Full Load Amperes	–	16	10	10	–	8
Locked Rotor Amperes	–	96	60	60	–	48
Resistive Amperes	16	16	10	10	16	16
Plot Duty VA	125	720	720	720	125	720

Liquid Level and Flow Controls

F262 Airflow Switch (Continued)

F262 Series Airflow Switch
Switch	SPDT
Enclosure	UL: Type 3R CE: IP43
Wiring Connections	Three color-coded screw terminals and one ground terminal
Conduit Connection	One 7/8 in. (22 mm) hole for 1/2 in. trade size (or PG16) conduit
Paddle Material	0.006 in. (0.15 mm) stainless spring steel
Maximum Air Velocity	2,000 FPM (10.16 m/s)
Maximum Duct Air Temperature	176°F (80°C)
Ambient Conditions	32 to 104°F (0 to 40°C)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E6688; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia/New Zealand Mark: RCM Compliant

Liquid Level and Flow Controls Code No. LIT-1900950

F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switches

Description

The F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switches are designed to maintain a liquid level in indoor or outdoor closed tanks that hold water or other nonhazardous liquids. When the liquid level in the tank rises above or falls below the required level, the single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switch closes one circuit and opens a second circuit.

Refer to the F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switches Product Bulletin (LIT-12011989) for important product application information.

Application

Use F263 Series Float Switches in closed tanks where a liquid level is to be maintained. A change in the liquid level opens or closes an electrical circuit.

Use F263MAP switches on indoor or outdoor tanks that hold water or other nonhazardous liquids at temperatures greater than the liquid’s freezing point and between -20°F

(-29°C) and 212°F (100°C). The maximum allowable liquid pressure is 150 psig (1,035 kpa).

Use F263MAC switches on indoor or outdoor tanks that hold water or other nonhazardous liquids at temperatures greater than the liquid’s freezing point and between -20°F

(-29°C) and 250°F (121°C). The maximum allowable liquid pressure is 100 psig

(690 kpa).

Note: Do not use these float switches with liquids that are lighter than water.

Features

Viton® diaphragm allows use in fluid lines carrying chlorinated water, treated water, or other nonhazardous liquids.
single-pole, double-throw switch provides control where liquid levels rise and fall
sturdy Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure allows for use in indoor or outdoor applications; inhibits the formation of moisture in low temperature applications.
solid polycarbonate float

(F263MAP models) provides greater resistance to corrosion

F263 Liquid Level Float Switch

Repair Information

If the F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switch fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement

F263 Switch, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number

Description

F263MAC-V01C

SPDT float switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure and copper float for liquid temperatures

-20 to 250°F (-29 to 121°C); maximum liquid pressure 100 psig (690 kPa)

F263MAP-V01C

SPDT float switch with Type 4 (NEMA) enclosure and polycarbonate float for liquid temperatures

-20 to 212°F (-29 to 100°C); maximum liquid pressure 150 psig (1,035 kPa)

Technical Specifications

F263 Switch Electrical Ratings

Volts 50/60 Hz	UL60730				EN60730
Volts 50/60 Hz	24	120	208	240	24	230
Horsepower	–	1	1	1	–	–
Full Load Amperes	–	16	10	10	–	8
Locked Rotor Amperes	–	96	60	60	–	48
Resistive Amperes	16	16	10	10	16	16
Plot Duty VA	125	720	720	720	125	720

Liquid Level and Flow Controls

F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switches (Continued)

F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switches
Switch	SPDT
Enclosure	UL: Type 4 (NEMA) CE: IP67
Wiring Connections	Three color-coded screw terminals and one ground terminal
Conduit Connection	One 7/8 in. (22 mm) hole for 1/2 in. trade size (or PG16) conduit
Pipe Connector	1 in. 11-1/2 NPT threads
Minimum Tank Diameter	9 in. (229 mm)
Maximum Liquid Pressure	100 psig (690 kPa) for copper float 150 psig (1,035 kPa) for polycarbonate float
Liquid Temperature Range	Minimum: -20°F (-29°C) or liquid freezing point Maximum: 212°F (100°C) polycarbonate, 250°F (121°C) copper
Ambient Conditions	Minimum: -40°F (-40°C) Maximum: 140°F (60°C)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E6688; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia/New Zealand Mark: RCM Compliant

Liquid Level and Flow Controls Code No. LIT-1922525

F61 and F62 Series Replacement Paddles

Selection Chart

Replacement Kit Number	Description
KIT21A-600	3-in-1 stainless steel paddle kit for F61 Series
KIT21A-601	6 in. stainless steel paddle kit for F61 Series
PLT112-1	Replacement paddle for F62AA-8
PLT112-2	Replacement paddle for F62AA-9

Liquid Level and Flow Controls Code No. LIT-1922350

F92 Series Air Volume Controls for Shallow Wells

Description

The F92 Series Air Volume Controls for Shallow Wells control the amount of air in the residential water storage tanks of shallow well water systems. Shallow wells are less than 25 ft. (7.6 m) deep.

F92 Series Controls automatically maintain air volume in the storage tanks of shallow well water systems by allowing room air to enter into the air charging section of the pump when the water level in the tank rises (loss of air volume).

F92 Controls open the air valve on a rise in tank water level to permit charging air into the storage tank with pressures up to

80 psig (552 kPa).

Refer to the F92 Series Air Volume Controls for Shallow Wells Product Bulletin (Part No. 24-7664-2993) for important product application information.

Features

sturdy Noryl (high performance thermoplastic) body resists mechanical damage and corrosion.
brass internal operating parts minimize corrosion.
pressure tested plastic float provides long operating life.
optional pressure gauge tapping allows mounting of a pressure gauge.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Description
F92A-4C	Air Volume Control for Shallow Wells, opens on pressure rise, barbed fitting on charger valve
F92B-1C	Air Volume Control for Shallow Wells, opens on pressure rise, 1/4-18 PTF SAE short gage tap, 0.016 in. (0.5 mm) valve orifice. Use this model in applications where excessive airflow may reduce water pumping capacity.
F92B-2C	Air Volume Control for Shallow Wells, opens on pressure rise, 1/4-18 PTF SAE short gage tap

Technical Specifications

F92 Series Air Volume Control for Shallow Wells

Application

Water storage tanks in residential water systems rely on a volume of air in the tank to provide system pressure, making it important to control the amount of air in the tank:

Too little air in the tank results in rapid pump cycling — a problem common in shallow well systems (less than 25 ft [7.6 m] deep).
Too much air in the tank results in air entering the distribution system — a problem common in deep well systems

(more than 25 ft [7.6 m] deep).

Repair Information

If the F92 Series Air Volume Controls for Shallow Wells fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement F92 Series control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

F92 Series Air Volume Control for Shallow Wells
Body Material	30% glass-filled Noryl thermoplastic
Float Material	Plastic with brass rod
Maximum Tank Pressure	80 psig (552 kPa)
Shipping Weight	Individual: 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Bulk pack (30): 30.9 lb (4.08 kg)
Tank Connector Size	1-1/4 in. external NPT
Air Flow Restrictor Orifice	F92B-1C Model: 0.016 in. (0.5 mm)
Snifter Line Connection	Flare fitting for 3/16 in. (5 mm) tubing

Liquid Level and Flow Controls Code No. LIT-1922355

F93 Series Air Volume Controls for Deep Wells

Description

The F93 Series Air Volume Controls for Deep Wells control the amount of air in the residential water storage tanks of deep well water systems. Deep wells are more than 25 ft (7.6 m) deep.

F93 Series Controls automatically maintain air volume in the storage tanks of deep well water systems by allowing air to escape from the tank and into the surrounding room when the water level in the tank drops (increase of air volume).

F93 deep well controls open the air valve on a fall in tank water level to bleed excess air from the tank at pressures up to 100 psig (690 kPa).

The F93H has a minimum pressure release valve to avoid lowering tank pressure below 25 psig (172 kPa). Use this model on applications where water may be rapidly drained.

Refer to the F93 Series Air Volume Controls for Deep Wells Product Bulletin (Part No. 24-7664-3000) for important product application information.

Features

sturdy Noryl (high performance thermoplastic) body resists mechanical damage and corrosion.
brass internal operating parts minimize corrosion.
pressure tested plastic float provides long operating life.
optional pressure gauge tapping allows mounting of a pressure gauge.
certification for Federal Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) meets the US Federal standards of the Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Description
F93A-1C	Air Volume Control for Deep Wells, opens on pressure drop, no gage tap, no pressure release valve
F93B-1C	Air Volume Control for Deep Wells, opens on pressure drop, 1/4-18 PTF SAE short gage tap, no pressure release valve
F93H-1C	Air Volume Control for Deep Wells, opens on pressure drop, 1/4-18 PTF SAE short gage tap, with 25 psig (172 kPa) minimum air pressure release valve. Use this model in applications where water may be rapidly drawn from the system.

Technical Specifications

F93 Series Air Volume Control for Deep Wells

Application

Water storage tanks in residential water systems rely on a volume of air in the tank to provide system pressure, making it important to control the amount of air in the tank:

Too little air in the tank results in rapid pump cycling – a problem common in shallow well systems (less than 7.6 m [25 ft] deep).
Too much air in the tank results in air entering the distribution system — a problem common in deep well systems

(more than 7.6 m [25 ft] deep).

Repair Information

If the F93 Series Air Volume Controls for Deep Wells fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement F93 Series control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

F93 Series Air Volume Control for Deep Wells
Body Material	30% glass-filled Noryl thermoplastic
Float Material	Plastic with brass rod
Maximum Tank Pressure	100 psig (690 kPa)
Shipping Weight	Individual: 0.25 lb (0.11 kg) Bulk pack (30): 30.9 lb (4.08 kg)
Tank Connector Size	1-1/4 in. external NPT
Compliance	United States Federal Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) Compliant, Underwriters Laboratories Classified in Accordance with NSF/ANSI 372 (File MH59894)

Motor Speed Controls Code No. LIT-1900595

P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control

Description

The P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control is a cost-effective, weather-resistant, durable motor speed control. The P266 Series Controls are designed for approved single-phase, Permanent Split-Capacitor (PSC) motors commonly used in a wide variety of refrigeration and air conditioning condenser fan applications.

The P266 Series Controls are designed to replace the Johnson Controls® P66 Series and P215 Series fan speed controls, providing additional features and flexibility, greater energy efficiency, and longer motor life in a compact, rugged, weather-resistant package.

P266 Series Controls are available for 208 through 575 VAC 50/60 Hz range applications. P266 Series controls have

current ratings from 4 to 12 A, depending on the voltage and model.

Some P266 Series Controls provide optional control of up to three auxiliary (fixed-speed) fans or fan stages. In addition, some models provide two additional high-voltage triacs that allow you to split the source power to the main and auxiliary windings, and connect a

low-speed capacitor to increase efficiency at low-speed operation.

Refer to the P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control Product Bulletin (LIT-12011534) for important product application information.

Features

one or two durable, accurate, stainless steel, remote-mount pressure transducers
available in 208/240 VAC (8 or 12 A), 380/460 VAC (4 A), or 460/575 VAC (4 A)
wide, adjustable pressure throttling range
optional auxiliary fan control
optional low-speed capacitor mode
NEMA 3R, (IP54) enclosure with integral metal heat-sink and stand-off mounting feet

Application

The P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control, in conjunction with a P266 Series Electronic Pressure Transducer, is a pressure-actuated, digital electronic motor speed control designed for approved

single-phase, PSC motors used in a wide variety of HVAC/R applications.

The P266 Series Fan Speed Control regulates supply voltage to the fan motor in response to the condenser refrigerant pressure and maintains the appropriate fan speed (air movement) through the condenser regardless of the ambient temperature or air delivery variations.

The P266 Series control is housed in a NEMA 3R (IP54) rainproof enclosure for outdoor applications.

The P266 Series control is an energy efficient and effective alternative to On/Off fan-cycling controls, multiple-speed motors, temperature fan-speed controls, modulating air-damper systems, condenser flood-back systems, and other condenser pressure control methods.

P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control

P266 Series Fan Speed Control applications include:

computer room air conditioning
commercial refrigeration
commercial air conditioning

Repair Information

If a P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement P266 Series control, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Charts

P266 Series Fan Speed Control Model and Kit Product Code Numbers, Descriptions, and Details (Part 1 of 2)

Product Code Number	Description	Transducer Model Included in Kit	Voltage (VAC)	Maximum Output Amperes	High VAC Triacs	Available Auxiliary Fan Control Circuits1
P266AAA-100C2	P266 Fan Speed Control (only)	N/A	208/240	8	3	0
P266ABA-100C2	P266 Fan Speed Control (only)	N/A	208/240	8	3	3
P266ACA-100C2	P266 Fan Speed Control (only)	N/A	208/240	8	1	0
P266ADA-100C2	P266 Fan Speed Control (only)	N/A	208/240	8	1	3
P266BGA-100C2	P266 Fan Speed Control (only)	N/A	460/575	4	2	0
P266BHA-100C2	P266 Fan Speed Control (only)	N/A	460/575	4	2	3
P266BCA-100C2	P266 Fan Speed Control (only)	N/A	460/575	4	1	0
P266BDA-100C2	P266 Fan Speed Control (only)	N/A	460/575	4	1	3
P266CHA-100C2	P266 Fan Speed Control (only)	N/A	380/460	4	2	3
P266ABA-1K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6.6 ft) cable	P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psig)	208/240	8	3	3
P266ABA-3K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6.6 ft) cable	P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psig)	208/240	8	3	3

Motor Speed Controls

P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control (Continued)

P266 Series Fan Speed Control Model and Kit Product Code Numbers, Descriptions, and Details (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code Number	Description	Transducer Model Included in Kit	Voltage (VAC)	Maximum Output Amperes	High VAC Triacs	Available Auxiliary Fan Control Circuits1
P266ABA-2K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with two P266 Pressure Transducers and two 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cables	P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi)	208/240	8	3	3
P266ABA-4K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with two P266 Pressure Transducers and two 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cables	P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi)	208/240	8	3	3
P266BHA-1K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi)	460/575	4	2	3
P266BHA-3K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi)	460/575	4	2	3
P266BHA-2K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with two P266 Pressure Transducers and two 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cables	P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi)	460/575	4	2	3
P266BHA-4K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with two P266 Pressure Transducers and two 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cables	P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi)	460/575	4	2	3
P266EAA-1K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi)	208/240	8	3	0
P266EAA-3K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi)	208/240	8	3	0
P266EBA-1K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi)	208/240	8	3	3
P266EBA-3K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi)	208/240	8	3	3
P266ECA-1K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi)	208/240	8	1	0
P266ECA-3K	P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi)	208/240	8	1	0
P266EDA-1K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi)	208/240	8	1	3
P266EDA-3K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi)	208/240	8	1	3
P266EEA-1K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi)	208/240	12	1	0
P266EEA-3K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-2C, 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi)	208/240	12	1	0
P266EFA-1K2	P266 Fan Speed Control with Internal Transformer and one P266 Pressure Transducer and one 2 m (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable	P266SNR-1C, 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi)	208/240	12	1	3

24 VAC Class 2 at 1/4 A.
Factory default settings: Start Voltage is set to 40% of the supply line-voltage. End Voltage is set to 95% of the supply line-voltage. Start Pressure is set to 44% of the P266 Transducer’s total pressure range. End Pressure is set to 51% of the P266 Transducer’s total pressure range.

P266 Series SNR Electronic Pressure Transducers

Product Code

Number

Description

P266SNR-1C

Electronic Pressure Transducer: 0 to 35 bar (0 to 508 psi) total range with a 1/4 in. SAE Internal Flare connection and a 2 meter

(6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable.

P266SNR-2C

Electronic Pressure Transducer: 0 to 52 bar (0 to 754 psi) total range with a 1/4 in. SAE Internal Flare connection and a 2 meter (6 ft 7-1/5 in.) cable.

Motor Speed Controls

P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control (Continued)

Technical Specifications

P266xxx-x Series Single Phase Condenser Fan Speed Controls
Input Supply Power	208/240 VAC 50/60 Hz, 380/460 VAC 50/60 Hz, or 460/575 VAC 50/60 Hz, depending on model (Refer to the label inside the P266 Series control housing cover for rated voltage range and model-specific wiring diagram.)
Short Circuit Current Rating	Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 5,000 rms symmetrical amperes, 600 Volts maximum when protected by Class H Fuses.
Low-Voltage Power Supply	P266A, P266B, and P266C Types: External 24 VAC Class 2, 20 VA Supply Transformer P266E Types: Low-voltage power for P266 control is provided by an onboard transformer. Note: When auxiliary fan starters are connected to P266E type controls, you must provide an external Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) AC supply to power the fan starters.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 60C (-40 to 140F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 85C (-40 to 185F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Low-Voltage Connections	1/4 in. Quick-Connect terminals, 30 m (100 ft) maximum wiring runs
Input Transducer	P266SNR-x Pressure Transducer: 5 VDC for 0.5 to 4.5 VDC ratiometric analog signal
Enclosure Type	NEMA 3R, IP54
Case Construction	Aluminum die casting
Cover Construction	UV Stabilized Polycarbonate
Dimensions (HxWxD)	159 x 177 x 70 mm (6-1/4 x 7 x 2-3/4 in.)
Weight	Heaviest model weight: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb) Approximate shipping weight: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus, File E244421; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class A limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc., declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.
	Australia: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

Motor Speed Controls Code No. LIT-1900622

P66/S66 Series Controls to P266 Series Controls Replacement Guide

P66/S66 to P266 Series Controls Cross-Reference (Part 1 of 4)

P66/S66 to P266 Series Controls Cross-Reference (Part 2 of 4)

Product Code Number	Operating Range (psig)	ETR (psig)	Start Voltage (%)	Replacement Control1 (see notes)	Transducer Sold Separately (see notes)
P66AAB-1	190/250	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-2	190/250	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-3	180/240	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-4	135/165	30	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-5	90/120	30	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-6	170/230	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-7	85/115	30	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-8	190/250	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-9	170/230	60	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-10	190/250	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-11	140/200	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-12	220/280	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-13	60/90	30	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-14	220/280	60	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-15	190/250	60	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-16	140/170	30	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-17	160/190	30	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-18	180/240	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-19	115/145	30	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-20	220/280	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-21	220/280	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-22	140/170	30	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-23	160/190	30	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-24	160/190	30	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4

Product Code Number	Operating Range (psig)	ETR (psig)	Start Voltage (%)	Replacement Control1 (see notes)	Transducer Sold Separately (see notes)
P66AAB-25	180/240	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-26	220/280	60	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-27	85/115	30	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-28	135/165	30	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-29	190/250	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-30	170/230	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-31	115/145	30	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-32	140/200	60	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-33	115/215	60	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-34	320/410	90	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-2C4
P66AAB-35	230/320	90	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-36	190/250	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAB-37	320/410	90	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-2C4
P66AAB-38	360/450	90	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-2C4
P66AAD-1	160/220	60	25	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAD-2	190/250	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAD-3	190/250	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAD-4	180/240	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66AAD-5	160/190	30	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66ABB-20	220/280	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66ABB-21	220/280	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66ABB-22	140/170	30	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66ABB-23	160/190	30	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66ABB-24	190/250	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4

Motor Speed Controls

P66/S66 Series Controls to P266 Series Controls Replacement Guide (Continued)

P66/S66 to P266 Series Controls Cross-Reference (Part 3 of 4)

Product Code Number	Operating Range (psig)	ETR (psig)	Start Voltage (%)	Replacement Control1 (see notes)	Transducer Sold Separately (see notes)
P66ABB-25	190/250	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66ABB-26	170/230	60	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66ABB-27	190/250	60	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C4
P66ABB-28	320/410	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-2C4
P66BAB-1	190/250	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5
P66BAB-2	190/250	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5
P66BAB-3	170/230	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5
P66BAB-4	190/250	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5
P66BAB-5	190/250	60	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5
P66BAB-6	220/280	60	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5
P66BAB-7	190/250	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5

Factory default start voltage is 40%.
For 208/240 Volt applications
For 460/480 Volt applications
Use one transducer.
Use two transducers.
0 to 5 VDC input, not 0 to 10 VDC
Hard start not available.

NA = Not applicable

NR = No replacement available

P66/S66 to P266 Series Controls Cross-Reference (Part 4 of 4)

Product Code Number	Operating Range (psig)	ETR (psig)	Start Voltage (%)	Replacement Control1 (see notes)	Transducer Sold Separately (see notes)
P66BAB-8	170/230	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5
P66BAB-9	320/410	90	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-2C5
P66BAB-10	360/450	90	40	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-2C5
P66BBB-1	190/250	60	16	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5
P66BAD-1	160/220	60	25	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5
P66BAD-2	190/250	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5
P66BAD-3	190/250	60	10	P266ACA-100C2 P266BCA-100C3	P266SNR-1C5
S66AA-1	NA	NA	50	P266ACA-100C6	NA
S66DC-1	NA	NA	40	NR	NA
S66FA-1	NA	NA	50	P266ACA-100C6,7	NA

Motor Speed Controls Code No. LIT-1900956

VFD68 Variable Frequency Drives

Description

The VFD68 Variable Frequency Drive provides three-phase motor speed control in a variety of HVAC/R applications. The

VFD68 drive is designed primarily for condenser fan speed control on HVAC and refrigeration condensing units, but can also be set up to control a variety of pumps, blowers, and fans.

The VFD68 drive accepts an input signal from P499 Electronic Pressure Transducer, or other devices that provide a 0 to 5 VDC,

0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA signal.

The application-specific design of the VFD68 drive provides a simple interface, which makes the drive easy to understand and operate.

You can quickly and easily reconfigure the VFD68 drive to control variable speed pumps in cooling and heating applications, or to control variable speed supply fans in VAV applications.

The VFD68 drive is an RS485, RTU-compliant ModBus® slave device and can be integrated into a ModBus network.

Refer to the VFD68 Variable Frequency Drives Product Bulletin (LIT-12012068) for important product application information.

Features

Selectable input types allows use with

0 to 5 VDC (ratiometric), 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA input signals from transducers, sensors, and controllers.

High input signal selection of two similar inputs (230 or 460 volt models only) provides fan speed control of dual circuit condensing units, based on the highest pressure circuit.
Compact design provides for easy and flexible installation.
Three-phase, 230, 460, or 575 VAC models can control a wide variety of three-phase motors ranging up to 10hp.
Simple and advanced end-user settings provide quick and simple application setup and operation, as well as advanced setup parameters for custom applications.

Applications

The VFD68 drive accepts input signals from a variety of pressure transducers, temperature sensors, and low-voltage controllers to provide continuous response to changing condenser load conditions.

The VFD68 drive allows the system to:

maintain optimum condenser head pressure
operate in low ambient temperature conditions down to -40ºC (-40ºF)
reduce short-cycling, which occurs when using
use On/Off fan controls
maintain a more stable evaporator temperature
operate more efficiently, reducing electricity cost.

The VFD68 drive can also:

help optimize compressor operation, reduce wear, and extend compressor life by stabilizing the condenser head pressures
reduce motor repair and replacement costs by eliminating the condenser fan

short-cycling

extend refrigerated product life and provide more consistent comfort cooling by stabilizing evaporator temperatures

Selecting a Motor

IMPORTANT: When selecting the motor, do not exceed the maximum output current rating of the VFD68 drive

Motors used with the VFD68 drive must:

be AC induction three-phase motors that are UL Recognized and CSA Certified, or equivalent
be rated for: 230 VAC at 50/60 Hz;

460 VAC at 50/60 Hz; or 575 VAC at 60 Hz

have an Inverter Rating (460 VAC motors)
have Insulation Class F or better

The VFD68 drive is intended for use with variable speed motors that are rated for 40:1 operation.

VFD68BBB Variable Frequency Drive

A VFD68 drive can control multiple motors wired in parallel; however, the sum of the Full Load Amperes (FLA) ratings for the motors must not exceed the maximum output current rating of the VFD68 drive, including any

de-rating due to altitude, temperature, or a combination of both.

IMPORTANT: Do not control both

single-phase and three-phase motors with the same VFD68 drive.

Repair Information

If the VFD68 Variable Frequency Drive fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement VFD68 Drive, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Motor Speed Controls

VFD68 Variable Frequency Drives (Continued)

Selection Charts

230 VAC ±10% Production Models

Product Code Number	Description
VFD68BBB-2C	VFD68 Drive; 0.1 kw (1/8 hp); 128 x 68 x 81 mm (5 x 2-11/16 x 3-3/16 in.)
VFD68BCB-2C	VFD68 Drive; 0.2 kw (1/4 hp); 128 x 68 x 81 mm (5 x 2-11/16 x 3-3/16 in.)
VFD68BDC-2C	VFD68 Drive; 0.4 kw (1/2 hp); 128 x 68 x 113 mm (5 x 2-11/16 x 4-7/16 in.)
VFD68BFD-2C	VFD68 Drive; 0.75 kw (1 hp); 128 x 68 x 133 mm (5 x 2-11/16 x 5-1/4 in.)
VFD68BGG-2C	VFD68 Drive; 0.5 kw (2 hp); 128 x 108 x 136 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 5-5/16 in.)
VFD68BHG-2C	VFD68 Drive; 2.2 kw (3 hp); 128 x 108 x 136 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 5-5/16 in.)
VFD68BJK-2C	VFD68 Drive; 3.7 kw (5 hp); 128 x 170 x 142 mm (5 x 6-11/16 x 5-5/8 in.)
VFD68BKL-2C	VFD68 Drive; 5.5 kw (7-1/2 hp); 150 x 220 x 155 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 6-1/8 in.)
VFD68BLL-2C	VFD68 Drive; 7.5 kw (10 hp); 150 x 220 x 155 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 6-1/8 in.)
VFD68BMP-2C	VFD68 Drive; 11 kw (15 hp); 260 x 220 x 190 (10-1/4 x 8-11/16 x 7-1/2)
VFD68BNP-2C	VFD68 Drive; 15 kw (20 hp); 260 x 220 x 190 (10-1/4 x 8-11/16 x 7-1/2)

460 VAC ±10% Production Models

Product Code Number	Description
VFD68CDF-2C	VFD68 Drive; 0.4 kw (1/2 hp); 128 x 108 x 130 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 5-1/8 in.)
VFD68CFF-2C	VFD68 Drive; 0.75 kw (1 hp); 128 x 108 x 130 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 5-1/8 in.)
VFD68CGG-2C	VFD68 Drive; 1.5 kw (2 hp); 128 x 108 x 136 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 5-5/16 in.)
VFD68CHH-2C	VFD68 Drive; 2.2 kw (3 hp); 128 x 108 x 156 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 6-1/8 in.)
VFD68CJJ-2C	VFD68 Drive; 3.7 kw (5 hp); 128 x 108 x 166 mm (5 x 4-1/4 x 6-1/2 in.)
VFD68CKL-2C	VFD68 Drive; 5.5 kw (7-1/2 hp); 150 x 220 x 155 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 6-1/8 in.)
VFD68CLL-2C	VFD68 Drive; 7.5 kw (10 hp); 150 x 220 x 155 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 6-1/8 in.)
VFD68CMP-2C	VFD68 Drive; 11 kw (15 hp); 260 x 220 x 190 (10-1/4 x 8-11/16 x 7-1/2)
VFD68CNP-2C	VFD68 Drive; 15 kw (20 hp); 260 x 220 x 190 (10-1/4 x 8-11/16 x 7-1/2)

575 VAC +5/-10% Production Models

Product Code Number	Description
VFD68DFM-2C	VFD68 Drive; 0.75 kw (1 hp); 150 x 140 x 136 mm (5-15/16 x 5-1/2 x 5-5/16 in.)
VFD68DGM-2C	VFD68 Drive;1.5 kw (2 hp); 150 x 140 x 136 mm (5-15/16 x 5-1/2 x 5-5/16 in.)
VFD68DHM-2C	VFD68 Drive; 2.2 kw (3 hp); 150 x 140 x 136 mm (5-15/16 x 5-1/2 x 5-5/16 in.)
VFD68DJN-2C	VFD68 Drive; 3.7 kw (5 hp); 150 x 220 x 148 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 5-13/16 in.)
VFD68DKN-2C	VFD68 Drive; 5.5 kw (7-1/2 hp); 150 x 220 x 148 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 5-13/16 in.)
VFD68DLN-2C	VFD68 Drive; 7.5 kw (10 hp); 150 x 220 x 148 mm (5-15/16 x 8-11/16 x 5-13/16 in.)

Accessories

Product Code

Number

Description

Accessory Information

P499RAPS100K

P499RCPS100K

Electronic Pressure Transducer (-10 to 100 psis [sealed for wet

and freeze/thaw applications] Range) and WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness

Product code numbers ending in K are P499 kit models that

include one P499 Pressure Transducer model and a

WHA-PKD3-200C (6-1/2 ft [2 m]) Wire Harness. To order a single P499 Pressure Transducer model (without a

WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness), replace the K with a C at the end of the P499 product code number.

P499RxP type models are 0.5 to 4.5 VDC ratiometric pressure transducers with Packard style electrical connections.
P499RAP type models have a 1/8 in. 27 NPT external thread (Style 49) pressure connection.
P499RCP type models have a 1/4 in. SAE 45° flare internal thread (7/16-20 UNF) with depressor (Style 47) pressure connection.
Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) for more information on P499 Pressure Transducer models and the associated wire harnesses.

P499RAPS102K

P499RCPS102K

Electronic Pressure Transducer (0 to 200 psis [sealed for wet and

freeze/thaw applications] Range) and one WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness

P499RAP-101K

P499RCP-101K

Electronic Pressure Transducer (0 to 100 psig Range) and

WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness

P499RAP-102C

Electronic Pressure Transducer (0 to 200 psig Range)

P499RAP-105K

P499RCP-105K

Electronic Pressure Transducer (0 to 500 psig Range) and

WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness

P499RAP-107K

P499RCP-107K

Electronic Pressure Transducer (0 to 750 psig Range) and

WHA-PKD3-200C Wire Harness

WHA-PKD3-200C

Wire Harness with Pigtail Leads, 6-1/2 ft (2 m)

WHA-PKD3-400C

Wire Harness with Pigtail Leads, 13 ft (4 m)

WHA-PKD3-400C

Wire Harness with Pigtail Leads, 19-5/8 ft (6 m)

Motor Speed Controls

VFD68 Variable Frequency Drives (Continued)

Technical Specifications

VFD68 Variable Frequency Drive
Input Power Voltage/Frequency	230 VAC, 50 HZ (208/230 VAC, 60 Hz); 400 VAC, 50 Hz (460 VAC, 60 Hz); 575 VAC, 50 Hz; Continuous Duty
Output Voltage/Frequency	230 VAC, 50 HZ (208/230 VAC, 60 Hz); 400 VAC, 50 Hz (460 VAC, 60 Hz); 575 VAC, 50 Hz; Continuous Duty
Input Devices	Johnson Controls/PENN® P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers
PWM Carrier Frequency	Adjustable 0.7 to 15 kHz
Motor Requirements	Three-phase NEMA Design B motors required; Inverter-rated motors recommended
Overload Capacity	150% of ampere rating for 1 minute
Start/Stop	Use STF input to start or stop the motor
Ambient Conditions	Storage: -40 to 65ºC (-40 to 149ºF), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing
	Operating: -40 to 50ºC (-40 to 122ºF), 0 to 95% RH noncondensing
	Altitude: 1,000 m (3,300 ft) maximum without derating
Enclosures	UL Type 1 (NEMA) fan cooled (230 VAC 1 hp and lower models do not have a fan)
Maximum High Voltage Wire Length	Up to 100 m (328 ft) between the VFD68 drive and the motor (using the appropriate wire gauge)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed, UL 508C, CSA-C22.2 No. 14, File E244421; Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits Europe: CE Mark- Johnson Controls Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevent provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive. Australia: Regulatory Compliance Mark (RCM)
Dimensions (H x W x D)	Minimum: 128 x 68 x 81 mm (5 x 2-11/16 x 3-3/16 in.) Maximum: 260 x 220 x 190 mm (10-1/4 x 8-11/16 x 7-1/2 in.)
Shipping Weight	0.5 to 3.8 kg (1.1 to 8.38 lb)

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1927325

V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves

Description

The V43/V243 Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valves are designed to regulate water flow through the condenser of large refrigerated cooling systems. These

pilot-operated valves open on an increase in refrigerant head pressure and provide modulating operation.

The V43/V243 water regulating valves are available for commercial and maritime applications.

V43 valves are available for non-corrosive low- and medium-pressure refrigerants such as R-134A, R-404A, R-502, and R-507.

Specially designed V43 valves are also available for ammonia service (R-717).

V243 valves are available for non-corrosive high-pressure refrigerants such as R410A.

Commercial V43/V243 valves are constructed with a cast iron body, brass internal parts, and bronze seat material.

Valve Construction and Pressure Type

Designator	Construction and Pressure Type
A	Commercial Service with Iron Body, Open on Pressure Increase, V43
B	Maritime Service with Brass Body, Open on Pressure Increase, V43
C	Navy Service with Brass Body, Open on Pressure Increase, V43
G	Commercial Service with Iron Body, Open on Pressure Increase, V243
H	Maritime Service with Brass Body, Open on Pressure Increase, V243

Flange Size

To resist the corrosive action of sea water, the V43/V243 maritime and navy models are constructed with a red brass body, bronze and monel interior parts, and monel seat material.

Refer to the V43/V243 Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valves Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-125683) for important product information.

Features

built-in pilot valve allows more precise throttling
easy adjustment allows service and adjustment without breaking line connections
drain plug allows water to be drained during shutdown to reduce the possibility of freeze-up
mesh monel screen protects pilot valve from items such as dirt and scale and is easily removed for cleaning and servicing without breaking any line connections

V43 Pressure Actuated Valve

Selection Charts

When ordering V43 valves, specify the complete product code number including an optional companion flange and gasket kit. A companion flange and gasket kit is required to mount the water lines to commercial type V43/V243 water-regulating valves.

Designator	Flange Size
S	2 in.
T	2-1/2 in.
V	3 in.
W	4 in.

V43 Series Pressure Actuated Water Valves (except NAVSEA valves)

Product Code Number	Pipe Size (in.)	Inlet and Outlet	Opening Point Adjustment Range psig (kPa)	Shipping Wt. lb (kg)
Commercial Type – Non-Corrosive Refrigerants (R)
V43AS-1C	2	Four Hole ASME Flanged	70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)	59 (26.76)
V43AS-2C			160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)
V43AT-1C	2-1/2		70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)	65 (29.48)
V43AT-2C			140 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)
V43AV-1C	3		70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)	90 (40.82)
V43AV-2C			160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)	90 (40.82)
V43AW-2C	4	Eight Hole ASME Flanged		142 (64.41)
Commercial Type – Ammonia (R)
V43AV-5C	3		160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)	90 (40.82)
Maritime Type – Non-Corrosive Refrigerants (R)
V43BS-6C	2	Four Hole ASME Flanged	70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)	59 (26.76)
V43BS-7C			160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)
V43BT-6C	2-1/2		70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)	65 (29.48)
V43BT-7C			140 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)
V43BV-10C	3		70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)	90 (40.82)
V43BV-7C			140 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

Valves and Valve Accessories

V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Selection Charts (Continued)

V43 Series Pressure Actuated Water valves, Navy NAVSEA Certified

Product Code Number	Pipe Size (in.)	Inlet and Outlet	Pressure Connector	Opening Point Adjustment Range – psig (kPa)	Shipping Wt, lb (kg)
Navy NAVSEA Certified – Non-Corrosive Refrigerants (R)
V43BS-3C	2	Four Hole ASME Flange	1/4 in. External Flared Connector	70 to 150 (483 to 1,034)	59 (26.76)
V43CS-1C		Six Hole Navy Flange
V43CS-2C			Internal Sweat Connector
V43BT-3C	2-1/2	Four Hole ASME Flange	1/4 in. External Flared Connector		65 (29.48)
V43CT-2C		Six Hole Navy Flange
V43BV-4C	3	Four Hole ASME Flange	Internal Sweat Connector		90 (40.82)
V43CV-1C		Eight Hole Navy Flange	1/4 in. External Flared Connector
V43CV-2C			Internal Sweat Connector
V43BW-7C	4	Eight Hole ASME Flange	1/4 in. External Flared Connector		142 (64.41)
V43BW-2C				140 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

V243 Series Pressurized Actuated Water Valves

Product Code Number	Pipe Size (in.)	Inlet and Outlet	Opening Point Adjustment Range – psig (kPa)	Shipping Weight, lb (kg)
Commercial Type – High Pressure Refrigerants
V243GS-1C	2	Four Hole ASME Flange	200 to 400 (1,379 to 2,758)	59 (26.76)
V243GT-1C	2-1/2			65 (29.48)
V243GV-1C	3			90 (40.82)
V243GW-1C	4	Eight Hole ASME Flange		142 (64.41)
Maritime Type – High Pressure Refrigerants
V243HS-1C	2	Four Hole ASME Flange	200 to 400 (1,379 to 2,758)	59 (26.76)
V243HT-1C	2-1/2			65 (29.48)
V243HV-1C	3			90 (40.82)
V243HW-1C	4	Eight Hole ASME Flange		142 (64.41)

Accessories

Kit Code Number	Water Valve Size (in.)	Shipping Weight, lb (kg)
KIT14A-6131, 2	2	11.8 (5.4)
KIT14A-6141, 2	2-1/2	16.5 (7.5)
FLG15A-6001, 3	3	20 (9.1)
FLG15A-6011, 3	4	34 (15.4)

Commercial valves only.
These are the parts included in the flange and gasket kit for the 2-inch and 2-1/2 inch valves.
These are the parts included in the flange and gasket kit for the 3-inch and 4-inch valves.

A companion flange and gasket kit is required to mount the water lines to commercial type V43/V243 water-regulating valves.

Ring Gasket (Two)

Cast Iron Flange (Two)

Cast Iron Flange (Two) Machine Bolt (Eight)

Hex Nut (Eight)

Machine Bolt (Eight)

Hex Nut (Eight)

FIG:FLG15A

KIT14A FLG15A

Valves and Valve Accessories

V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Repair and Replacement Information

If a V43/V243 Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valve fails to operate within its specifications, replacement sensing elements, internal parts, and diaphragms are available for valve repair.

To obtain replacement parts, kits, instructions, and details, contact your nearest Johnson Controls® distributor at

http://cgproducts.johnsoncontrols.com/dist_locate/locateDIST.asp. For replacement parts, see Repair Parts and Parts Kits.

Repair Parts (Part 1 of 2)

Model	Diaphragm Kit	Seat Disc and Diaphragm Kit	Seat Repair Kit	Screen Repair Kit	Push Rod Kit1	Sensing Element Kit	Disc Body Kit
V43AS-1C	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-602R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-600R	SEP88A-600R	DBK11A-600R
V43AS-2C	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-602R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-600R	SEP88A-601R	DBK11A-600R
V43AS-5C	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-602R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-600R	SEP87A-600R	DBK11A-600R
V43AT-1C	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-603R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-601R	SEP88A-600R	DBK11A-601R
V43AT-2C	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-603R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-601R	SEP88A-601R	DBK11A-601R
V43AT-5C	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-603R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-601R	SEP87A-600R	DBK11A-601R
V43AV-1C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-606R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-601R	SEP88A-600R	DBK11A-602R
V43AV-2C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-606R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-601R	SEP88A-601R	DBK11A-602R
V43AV-5C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-606R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-601R	SEP87A-600R	DBK11A-602R
V43AW-1C	DPM18A-603R	DSC16A-603R	STT19A-608R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-600R	DBK11A-603R
V43AW-2C	DPM18A-603R	DSC16A-603R	STT19A-608R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-601R	DBK11A-603R
V43AW-5C	DPM18A-603R	DSC16A-603R	STT19A-608R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-602R	SEP87A-600R	DBK11A-603R
V43BS-1C1	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-602R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-600R	DBK11A-600R
V43BS-2C1	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-602R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-601R	DBK11A-600R
V43BS-3C	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-600R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-600R
V43BS-6C	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-600R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-600R
V43BS-7C	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-600R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-601R	DBK10A-600R
V43BT-1C1	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-603R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-600R	DBK11A-601R
V43BT-2C1	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-603R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-601R	DBK11A-601R
V43BT-3C	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-605R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-602R
V43BT-6C	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-605R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-602R
V43BT-7C	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-605R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-601R	DBK10A-602R
V43BV-1C1	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-606R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-600R	DBK11A-602R
V43BV-2C1	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-606R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-601R	DBK11A-602R
V43BV-4C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-607R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-601R
V43BV-5C1	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-606R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-600R	DBK11A-602R
V43BV-6C1	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-606R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-601R	DBK11A-602R
V43BV-7C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-607R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-601R	DBK10A-601R
V43BV-8C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-607R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-601R
V43BV-9C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-607R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-601R	DBK10A-601R
V43BV-10C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-607R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-601R
V43BW-1C	DPM18A-603R	DSC16A-603R	STT19A-609R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-603R
V43BW-2C	DPM18A-603R	DSC16A-603R	STT19A-609R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-601R	DBK10A-603R
V43BW-5C	DPM18A-603R	DSC16A-603R	STT19A-609R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-603R
V43BW-6C	DPM18A-603R	DSC16A-603R	STT19A-609R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-601R	DBK10A-603R
V43BW-7C	DPM18A-603R	DSC16A-603R	STT19A-609R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-603R
V43CS-1C	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-600R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-600R
V43CS-2C	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-600R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-600R
V43CS-3C	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-600R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-604R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-600R
V43CT-1C	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-605R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-602R
V43CT-2C	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-605R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP86A-600R	DBK10A-602R
V43CV-1C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-607R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP86A-600R	DBK10A-601R
V43CV-2C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-607R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP88A-600R	DBK10A-601R

Valves and Valve Accessories

V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Repair Parts (Part 2 of 2)

Model	Diaphragm Kit	Seat Disc and Diaphragm Kit	Seat Repair Kit	Screen Repair Kit	Push Rod Kit1	Sensing Element Kit	Disc Body Kit
V243GS-1C	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-602R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-600R	SEP90A-600R	DBK11A-600R
V243GT-1C	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-603R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-601R	SEP90A-600R	DBK11A-601R
V243GV-1C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-606R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-601R	SEP90A-600R	DBK11A-602R
V243GW-1C	DPM18A-603R	DSC16A-603R	STT19A-608R	SCN10A-600R	ROD18A-600R	SEP90A-600R	DBK11A-603R
V243HS-1C	DPM18A-600R	DSC16A-600R	STT19A-600R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP90A-600R	DBK10A-600R
V243HT-1C	DPM18A-601R	DSC16A-601R	STT19A-605R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP90A-600R	DBK10A-601R
V243HV-1C	DPM18A-602R	DSC16A-602R	STT19A-607R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-603R	SEP90A-600R	DBK10A-602R
V243HW-1C	DPM18A-603R	DSC16A-603R	STT19A-609R	SCN10A-601R	ROD18A-602R	SEP90A-600R	DPK10A-603R

1. Replacement push rod kit requires a seat repair kit and/or a diaphragm kit when replaced.

Parts Kits

The following valves, manufactured after date code 8702, contain monel interior trim. Order replacement kits as listed in Repair Parts or

V43xx and V243xx Series Repair Parts Kits Technical Bulletin (LIT-121690).

Parts Kits

Valve Model	Order Parts Kits for:
V43BS-1C	V43BS-6C
V43BS-2C	V43BS-7C
V43BT-1C	V43BT-6C
V43BT-2C	V43BT-7C
V43BV-1C	V43BV-10C
V43BV-2C	V43BV-7C
V43BV-5C	V43BV-10C
V43BV-6C	V43BV-9C

Dimensions

Symbol	2 Inch	2-1/2 Inch	3 Inch	4 Inch
A1	9-1/2 in. (241 mm)	10-3/4 in.(273 mm)	11-3/4 in. (298 mm)	14 in. (356 mm)
B	7-1/2 in. (191 mm)	8 in. (203 mm)	9 in. (229 mm)	10-3/4 in. (273 mm)
C	4-3/4 in. (121 mm)	5-1/2 in. (140 mm)	6 in. (152 mm)	7-1/2 in. (191 mm)
D	6 in. (152 mm)	7 in. (178 mm)	7-1/2 in. (191 mm)	9 in. (229 mm)
E	2-1/8 in. (54 mm)	2-5/8 in. (67 mm)	3-1/8 in. (80 mm)	4-1/8 in. (105 mm)
F2	15-1/4 in. (387 mm)	15-9/16 in. (395 mm)	16-9/16 in. (421 mm)	18-7/32 in. (462 mm)
F3	15-29/32 in. (404 mm)	16-7/32 in. (412 mm)	17-7/32 in. (437 mm)	18-7/8 in. (479 mm)
G	3/4 in. (19 mm) Diameter (Four)	3/4 in. (19 mm) Diameter (Four)	3/4 in. (19 mm) Diameter (Four)	3/4 in. (19 mm) Diameter (Eight)
H	3-5/8 in. (92 mm)	3-15/16 in. (100 mm)	4-1/4 in. (108 mm)	5-1/16 in. (128 mm)

Flange face to flange face.
These are the measurements for the V43 valves.
These are the measurements for the V243 valves.

Valves and Valve Accessories

V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Six- and Eight- Flange Hole Configurations

V43/V243 Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valves Dimensions

FIG:Dimensions

V43 Capacity Flow Charts

CAPACITY CHART FOR 2 in. VALVE

Low Pressure Refrigerants

CAPACITY CHART FOR 3 in. VALVE

Low Pressure Refrigerants

Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi) Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

10 20 30 50

50 40

40 30

10 10

0 0

50 40

40 30

10 10

0 0

10 20 30 50

50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450

Water Flow (GPM)

Medium Pressure Refrigerants

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

Water Flow (GPM)

Medium Pressure Refrigerants

CAPACITY CHART FOR 2-1/2 in. VALVE

Low Pressure Refrigerants

Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

CAPACITY CHART FOR 4 in. VALVE

Low Pressure Refrigerants

Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

10 20 30 50

50 40

40 30

10 10

0 0

50 40

40 30

10 10

0 0

5 10 20 30 50

50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450

Water Flow (GPM)

Medium Pressure Refrigerants

150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350

Water Flow (GPM)

Medium Pressure Refrigerants

Valves and Valve Accessories

V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

V243 Capacity Flow Charts

CAPACITY CHART FOR 2 in. VALVE

CAPACITY CHART FOR 3 in. VALVE

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)

2 5 10 14.5 20 2530

40 50 60

2 5 10 14.5

20 25 30 40 50 60

50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450

Water Flow (GPM)

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

Water Flow (GPM)

CAPACITY CHART FOR 2-1/2 in. VALVE

CAPACITY CHART FOR 4 in. VALVE

Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi) Water Pressure Available Across Valve (psi)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise Above Valve Opening Point (psig)

2 5 1014.5 20 2530 40

50 60

2 5 10

14.5

20 25 30

40 50 60

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900

Water Flow (GPM)

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300

Water Flow (GPM)

Technical Specifications

V43/V243 Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves
Maximum Water Supply Pressure			150 psig (1,034 kPa)
V43 Maximum Head Pressure			300 psig (2,068 kPa)
V243 Maximum Head Pressure			630 psig (4,344 kPa)
Head Pressure Range (Opening Points)	V43	Low Pressure Refrigerants	R-134A – 70 to 150 psig (482 to 1,034 kPa)
		Medium Pressure Refrigerants	R-22, R-502, R404A – 160 to 260 psig (1,103 to 1,793 kPa)
		Ammonia	160 to 260 psig (1,103 to 1,793 kPa)
	V243	High Pressure	200 to 400 psig (1,379 to 2,758 kPa)
Factory Settings1	V43	Low Pressure Refrigerants	90 psig (621 kPa)
		Medium Pressure Refrigerants	180 psig (1,241 kPa)
		Ammonia	180 psig (1,241 kPa)
	V243	High Pressure	200 psig (1,379 kPa)
Maximum Water Supply Temperature			160°F (71°C)
Valve Body Material		Commercial	Cast iron
Valve Body Material		Maritime	Red brass
Internal Parts Material		Commercial	Brass
Internal Parts Material		Maritime	Bronze, Monel
Seat Material		Pilot	Monel
Seat Material		Main Valve	Commercial – Bronze, Maritime – Monel
Seat Disc Material			Buna N™
Packing – Bellows Assembly			Brass stem, stainless steel spring, synthetic rubber boot
Pressure Connection Refrigerant Side		Non-Corrosive	1/4 in. SAE External Flare
Pressure Connection Refrigerant Side		Ammonia	1/4 in. FNPT

1. Factory opening setpoint for the valve is adjustable.

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1927350

V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve

Description

The V46 is a pressure actuated modulating valve that is suitable for use either on closed or open systems. Direct acting valves open on pressure increase. This type of valve is primarily used to regulate the flow of water or glycol to a water cooled condenser on a refrigeration system.

Refer to the V46 Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valve Product Bulletin (LIT-125687) for important product application information.

Features

no close fitting or sliding parts in water passages
minimizes chatter or water hammer
free movement of all parts provides smooth pressure modulation
refrigerant adjustment is not affected by water pressure
withstands high hydraulic shock without damage
range spring does not come in contact with cooling water
easy manual flushing, if required
3/8, 1/2, and 3/4 in. valves may be disassembled and reassembled without detaching from the refrigeration system or

V46AA-1 Water Regulating Valve

Repair Information

V46AT-1 Water Regulating Valve

without pumping down

Applications

This valve is designed to modulate flow of water or glycol to a water cooled condenser on a refrigeration system.

If the V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve fails to

operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement valve, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

ice machines
computer room air conditioning units

Selection Chart

ice cream machines
refrigeration cases

Product Code Number1	Pipe Size (In.)	Inlet and Outlet	Opening Point Range – psig (kPa)	Pressure Element Style2	Seat Repair Kit	Replacement Power Elements
Commercial Type, Standard Flow – Non-Corrosive Refrigerant
V46AA-1C	3/8 NPT	Threaded	70 to 260 (483 to 1,793)	30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45)	STT14A-600R	SEP91A-600R and SEC99AA-36C3
V46AA-50C	3/8 NPT			1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5)	STT14A-600R	SEP91A-600R
V46AB-1C	1/2 NPT			30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45)	STT15A-602R	SEP91A-602R and SEC99AA-36C3
V46AB-25C	1/2 NPT			1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5)	STT15A-602R	SEP91A-602R
V46AC-1C	3/4 NPT			30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45)	STT16A-601R	SEP91A-601R and SEC99AA-36C3
V46AC-26C	3/4 NPT			1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5)	STT16A-601R	SEP91A-601R
V46AD-1C	1 NPT			30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45)	STT17A-609R	SEP91A-603R and SEC99AA-36C3
V46AD-13C	1 NPT			1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5)	STT17A-609R	SEP91A-603R
V46AE-1C	1 1/4 NPT			30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45)	STT17A-610R	SEP91A-603R and SEC99AA-36C3
V46AE-17C	1 1/4 NPT			1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5)	STT17A-610R	SEP91A-603R
V46AJ-2C	1/2	Union		48 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 46)	STT15A-602R	SEP77A-605R
V46EK-2C	3/4				STT16A-601R	SEP127A-600R
V46AL-2C	1				STT17A-609R	SEP107A-602R
V46AM-2C	1-1/4				STT17A-610R	SEP107A-602R
V46AR-1C	1 1/2	Four Hole ASME Flange		30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45)		SEP91A-603R and SEC99AA-36C3
V46AR-10C	1 1/2			1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5) (see Note below)		SEP91A-603R
V46AS-1C	2		70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)		STT18A-600R	SEP81A-602R
V46AS-2C	2		160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)		STT18A-600R	SEP81A-601R
V46AT-1C	2-1/2		70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)		STT18A-601R	SEP81A-602R
V46AT-2C	2-1/2		160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)		STT18A-601R	SEP81A-601R

Valves and Valve Accessories

V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve (Continued)

Product Code Number1	Pipe Size (In.)	Inlet and Outlet	Opening Point Range – psig (kPa)	Pressure Element Style2	Seat Repair Kit	Replacement Power Elements
Commercial Type, Low Flow – Non-Corrosive Refrigerants4
V46DA-2C	3/8 NPT	Threaded	70 to 260 (483 to 1,793)	30 in Capillary; 1/4 in. Flare Nut (Style 45)	STT14A-603R	SEP91A-600R and SEC99AA-36C5
Commercial Type – Ammonia
V46AC-8C	3/4 NPT	Threaded	100 to 200 (690 to 1,379)	1/4 in. Internal NPT (Style 15)	STT16A-601R	SEP70A-601R
V46AD-4C	1 NPT				STT17A-609R	SEP70A-604R
V46AE-4C	1-1/4 NPT				STT17A-610R
V46AR-2C	1-1/2	Four Hole ASME Flange			STT17A-610R
V46AS-3C	2				STT18A-600R	SEP70A-605R
V46AT-3C	2 1/2				STT18A-601R	SEP70A-605R
Maritime Type – Non-Corrosive Refrigerants
V46BA-2C	3/8 NPT	Threaded	70 to 260 (483 to 1,793)	30 in. Capillary with Sweat Connection (Style 34)	STT14A-601R	SEP13A-602R
V46BB-2C	1/2 NPT				STT15A-603R	SEP13A-600R
V46BC-2C	3/4 NPT				STT17A-613R	SEP13A-603R
V46BD-2C	1 NPT				STT17A-611R	SEP50A-600R
V46BE-2C	1-1/4 NPT				STT17A-612R	SEP50A-600R
V46BS-4C	2	Four Hole ASME Flange	160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)		STT18A-602R	SEP50A-601R
V46BT-4C	2-1/2	Four Hole ASME Flange	160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)		STT18A-602R	SEP50A-601R
NAVSEA Certified – Non-Corrosive Refrigerants
V46CG-1C	3/8	Threaded	70 to 260 (483 to 1,793)	30 in. Capillary with Sweat Connection (Style 34)	STT14A-601R	SEP13A-602R
V46CH-2C	3/8	Sweat Connector
V46CH-4C	3/8
V46CH-5C	3/8
V46CJ-2C	1/2	Sweat Connector			STT15A-603R	SEP13A-600R
V46CN-2C	3/4	Four Hole Navy Flange			STT17A-613R	SEP13A-603R
V46CP-2C	1				STT17A-611R	SEP50A-600R
V46CQ-2C	1-1/4				STT17A-612R
V46BR-2C	1-1/2	Four Hole ASME Flange
V46CR-2C	1-1/2	Six Hole Navy Flange
V46BS-3C	2	Four Hole ASME Flange	70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)		STT18A-602R	SEP50A-601R
V46CS-3C	2	Six Hole Navy Flange	70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)
V46CS-4C	2	Six Hole Navy Flange	160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)
V46BT-3C	2-1/2	Four Hole ASME Flange	70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)
V46CT-3C	2-1/2	Six Hole Navy Flange	70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)
V46CT-4C	2-1/2	Six Hole Navy Flange	160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)

Refer to V46 Series Valve Sizing Information — 90% Open Method (LIT-1927400). Then specify the code number from this chart. Refer to the Accessories chart on the following page for companion flange kit code numbers.
Standard capillary length on Style 45 and Style 34 elements is 30 inches
Replacement element supplied with 1/4 in. external SAE connector. Order SEC99AA Capillary Kit with 2 flare nuts separately, if needed.
Low water flow valve – 2.5 GPM max.
Replacement element supplied with 1/4 in. external SAE connector. Order SEC99AA Capillary Kit with 2 flare nuts separately, if needed.

Note: Use only on valves specified.

Valves and Valve Accessories

V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve (Continued)

Accessories (Companion Flanges and Gaskets)

Ring Gasket (Two)

Cast Iron Flange (Two)

Hex

Machine

Product Code Number		Water Valve Size (in.)
Flange Gasket (One Gasket per Package)	Companion Flange Kit (See Diagram)	Water Valve Size (in.)
246-423	KIT14A-6121	1-1/2 in.
246-424	KIT14A-6131	2 in.
246-425	KIT14A-6141	2-1/2 in.

Nut (Eight) Bolt (Eight)

1. For commercial valves only

Note: Flange has NPT (National Pipe Thread)

Companion Flange Kit

Technical Specifications

V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valves
Maximum Water Temperature		170°F (77°C)
Valve Body	Commercial	3/8 to 3/4 in. cast brass, 1 in. and larger cast iron with a special finish
	Navy and Maritime	Cast naval bronze with Monel® interior parts

Pressure Range Specification

Refrigerant	Opening Point Range1 – psig (kPa) V46A B, C, D	Maximum Permissible Pressure psig (kPa)
		Water		Refrigerant
		Static	P Across Valve
Non-Corrosive Refrigerants (R12, R22, R134a, R502, R404a, R507)
All Range Valve	70 to 260 (483 to 1,793)	150 (1,034)	60 PST	320 (2,206)
All Range with High Overpressure				370 (2,551)
3/8 in. Extended All Range	70 to 300 (483 to 2,068)			440 (3,034)
Valves 2 in. or Larger
R12, R134a – 2 and 2-1/2 in. Low Range	70 to 170 (483 to 1,172)	150 (1,034)	60 PST	230 (1,586)
R22, R502, R404a, R507 – 2 and 2-1/2 in. High Range	160 to 260 (1,103 to 1,793)			320 (2,206)
Other Refrigerants
Ammonia R717	100 to 200 (690 to 1,379)	150 (1,034)	60 PST	320 (2,206)

1. Direct acting valve ranges indicate the valve opening point.

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1927335

V46N Series Reverse Acting Valve

Description

The V46N Series are reverse acting pressure actuated modulating valves used on either open or closed loop coolant systems.

Reverse acting valves open on a refrigerant pressure decrease. They are generally used in parallel with a direct acting valve for heat pump applications or for bypass operation.

Refer to the V46 Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Product Bulletin (LIT-125687) for important product application information.

Selection Chart

Applications

bypass systems
water cooled heat pumps in parallel with direct acting valve

Repair Information

If the V46N Series Reverse Acting Valve fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement valve, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

V46 Series Reverse Acting Valve

Product Code Number1	Pipe Size In.	Inlet and Outlet	Opening Point Range psig (kPa)	Pressure Element Style	Seat Repair Kit	Replacement Power Elements
Commercial Type – Non-Corrosive Refrigerants (R)
V46NA-1C	3/8 NPT	Threaded	90 to 280 (621 to 1,931)	30 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut + Schrader Valve depressor (Style 45)	STT14A-600R	SEP91A-600R & SEC99AA-36C2
V46NA-4C			40 to 1003 (276 to 690)
V46NB-1C	1/2 NPT		90 to 280 (621 to 1,931)		STT15A-602R	SEP91A-602R & SEC99AA-36C2
V46NB-2C			40 to 1003 (276 to 690)
V46NC-1C	3/4 NPT		90 to 280 (621 to 1,931)		STT16A-601R	SEP91A-601R & SEC99AA-36C2
V46NC-2C			40 to 1003 (276 to 690)
V46ND-1C	1 NPT		90 to 280 (621 to 1,931)		STT17A-609R	SEP91A-603R & SEC99AA-36C2
V46ND-2C			40 to 1003 (276 to 690)
V46NE-1C	1-1/4 NPT		90 to 280 (621 to 1,931)		STT17A-610R
V46NE-2C			40 to 1003 (276 to 690)

Refer to V46 Series Valve Sizing Information — 90% Open Method (LIT-1927400), and then specify the code number from this chart.
Maximum bellows overpressure is 320 psig (2,206 kPa). Replacement element provided with 1/4 in. external SAE connector. Order SEC37A capillary kit with two flare nuts, separately if needed. Use only on valves specified.
For heat pump application.

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1927400

V46 Series Valve Sizing Information—90% Open Method

To Select Water Valve Size:

300 Flow Chart 1136

See the Flow Chart for selection of water valves. Carefully follow the steps as outlined below.

Determine maximum water flow required. The manufacturer of the condensing unit will usually provide tables, or calculations can be made from the following:
1. Maximum Btu per hour to be removed. (Be sure to add heat gains in refrigeration equipment and heat of compression. If figures are not available, it is customary to add 25% to the load for these heat gains.)

Water Flow In Gallons/Minute

1. Incoming water temperature at time of maximum load.
2. Outlet water temperature; this must be lower than condensing temperature of the refrigerant

– use condensing unit manufacturer’s data, or assume 10° difference.

v46size.eps

1. Flow (gallons/min) =

l 6 L 6L9l ln

Onll6l l6Wb6L9lnL6 – l l6l l6Wb6L9lnL6

Draw horizontal line across upper half of flow chart through flow required as determined by Step 1d above.
Determine the available system pressure for use with the valve by the following appropriate method:

Open System:

Available System Pressure = Inlet Pressure – condenser pressure drop – friction losses in piping.

200

100

Refrig. Head Press. Above Opening PT. (PSI)

Valve Size

3/8 in. thru 1-1/2 in.

2 in., 2-1/2 in.

Refrigerant

All-range R-12, R-500, R-22, R-502,

Ammonia, R-12, R-500

2-1/2

1-1/2

1-1/4

3/4

1/2

757

379

341

303

256

227

Water Flow In Liters/Minute

189

151

114

3/8

3.8

Closed System:

Available System Pressure = Inlet Pressure – static head – condenser pressure drop – friction

(14)

60 414

losses in piping.

50 2

5 10

20 30

40 50 6

345

The available system pressure is represented by the curve in the lower half of the flow chart.

4 Draw a horizontal line from 55 psi head pressure

rise above opening point (valve approximately	40	276
90% open) to the available system pressure. If the
point falls between two curves, use the curve to
the left (this gives an automatic safety factor). 5 From the point where the horizontal line intersects	30	207
the available system pressure curve, draw a

(34)

(69)

(138)

(207)

(276)

(345) (414)

vertical line upwards until it intersects with the horizontal line from Step 2.

If the intersection falls on a valve size curve, this is the valve size.
If the intersection falls between two curves, use the curve to the left for the required valve size.

20 138

10 69

0 0

Water Pressure Drop Through Valve PSI (kPa)

Flow Chart, V46 Valve

flowch1

Refrig. Head Press. Above Opening PT. (kPa)

Example:

The required flow of an R404A system is found to be 40 GPM (151 l/m).

City water pressure is 40 psig (276 kPa) and manufacturer’s table gives drop through condenser and accompanying piping and valves at 15 psi (103 kPa) drop through installed piping approximately 5 psi (35 kPa), leaving a net pressure drop available of 20 psi.

Draw a line through 40 GPM (151 l/m) – see dotted line, upper half of flow chart.
Size valves at 55 psi head pressure rise above opening point (valve is approximately 90% open).
Draw a line through 55 psi (375 kPa) – see dotted line, lower half of flow chart.
Available water pressure drop through valve

= 40 – 20 = 20 psi (276 – 137 = 137 kPa).

Draw vertical line upward from this point to flow line – circle on flow chart marks this intersection.
Since the intersection falls between curves for 1 in. and 1-1/4 in. valves, choose the larger size. A 1-1/4 in. valve is required.

V46 Series Valve Dimensions

Valves and Valve Accessories

Code No. LIT-1927410

Roughing-in Dimensions

(A)

(E)

(D)

(C)

(B)

(G)

(F)

Commercial Service: V46 Threaded Connection Dimensions

Valve Size	Dimensions in Inches
Valve Size	A	B	C	D	E	F	G
3/8 in.	2-5/8	6-3/4	3-1/8	1-1/2	1-1/4	13/32	3-7/32
1/2 in.	3-1/8 (3-1/4)1	7-13/32	3-3/8	1-27/32	1-1/2	13/32	3-5/8
3/4 in.	3-3/8 (3-5/8)1	7-7/8	3-7/8	2-1/32	1-3/4	13/32	3-21/32
1 in.	4-1/2 (4-7/8)1	10-3/4	5-1/2	2-25/32	2	1/2	4-3/4
1-1/4 in.	4-7/8	11-1/8	5-3/4	2-5/8	2-3/8	1/2	4-29/32

1. Values in parenthesis are for maritime valves. All other dimensions remain the same.

V46 Series Threaded Type Valves

(E)

(G)

(H)

(A)

(D)

(C)

(B)

(I)

v46tbfg4.eps

(F)

Flange Type Valves

v46tbfg5.eps

Commercial Service: V46 Flange Connection Dimensions

Valve

Size

Dimensions in Inches

V46 Flange Specifications

No. of Holes

Hole Size

Bolt Circle

1-1/2 in.

5-5/16

11-1/8

5-3/4

9/16

1-7/8

2-5/8

1/2

4-29/32

5/8

3-7/8

2 in.

6-5/8

6-15/32

5/8

2-1/4

3-1/2

1/2

6-1/8

3/4

4-3/4

2-1/2 in.

6-3/4

13-1/2

6-3/8

3/4

2-23/32

3-1/2

1-1/32

6-3/32

3/4

5-1/2

Maritime Service: ASME Flange Connection Dimensions

Valve

Size

Dimensions in Inches

ASME Flange Specifications

No. of Holes

Hole Size

Bolt Circle

1-1/2 in.

5-5/16

10-1/2

5-5/8

9/16

1-7/8

2-5/8

1/2

5/8

3-7/8

2 in.

6-3/8

13-1/8

6-1/2

1/2

2-3/4

3-1/2

5/8

3/4

4-3/4

2-1/2 in.

6-3/4

13-1/8

6-1/2

11/16

2-3/4

3-1/2

5/8

3/4

5-1/2

Navy BuShips Service: Navy Flange Connection Dimensions

Valve

Size

Dimensions in Inches

Navy Flange Specifications

No. of Holes

Hole Size

Bolt Circle

3/4 in.

4-3/16

7-3/4

7/16

3-13/16

1-1/8

2-1/32

1/2

3-5/16

9/16

2-11/16

1 in

5-5/16

4-1/2

1/2

4-1/4

1-1/4

2-5/8

1/2

9/16

3-1/8

1-1/4 in.

5-5/16

9-11/32

4-11/16

1/2

4-1/2

1-5/8

2-5/8

1/2

4-5/32

9/16

3-3/8

1-1/2 in.

5-5/16

10-7/32

5-3/4

1/2

5-1/16

1-7/8

2-5/8

1/2

9/16

3-15/16

2 in.

6-3/8

14-1/8

6-13/32

1/2

5-9/16

2-3/4

3-1/2

7/16

7-9/32

9/16

4-7/16

2-1/2 in.

6-3/8

14-5/16

6-1/2

1/2

6-1/8

2-3/4

3-1/2

5/8

7-3/16

9/16

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1927330

V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Valve

Description

The V47 is a temperature actuated modulating valve that regulates the flow of water or glycol to maintain a desired temperature. Three temperature ranges for each valve size are available.

Many valves come with a removable bypass plug that can be replaced by the bypass orifice provided separately with each valve.

Valve action is open on temperature increase. For open on temperature decrease models, contact Application Engineering.

Refer to the V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Water Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-125690) for important product application information.

Selection Chart

Features

no close fitting sliding parts in water passages
range spring does not come in contact with the cooling water
easy manual flushing, if required
valve design minimizes chatter and water hammer

Repair Information

If the V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Valve fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement valve, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

V47 Series Valve

Product Code Number1	Pipe Size, in.	Range (Opening Point) °F	Bulb Size, in. (Dia. length)	Std Bypass Orifice Dia., in.	Seat Repair Kit	Replacement Sensing Element	Bulb Well Number Order Separately
V47AA-1C	3/8	115 to 180 Heating	11/16 x 3-1/4	0.062	STT14A-600R	SET29A-622R	WEL18A-602R
V47AA-2C	3/8	160 to 230 Heating	11/16 x 3-1/4	0.062	STT14A-600R	SET29A-623R	WEL18A-602R
V47AA-3C	3/8	75 to 135 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 6	0.062	STT14A-600R	SET29A-601R	WEL17A-601R
V47AA-26C2	3/8	20 to 65 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 63	–	STT14A-600R	–	WEL17A-601R
V47AB-2C	1/2	75 to 135 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 103	–	STT15A-602R	SET29A-602R	WEL17A-600R
V47AB-3C	1/2	115 to 180 Heating	11/16 x 3-1/4	0.062	STT15A-602R	SET29A-624R	WEL18A-602R
V47AB-4C	1/2	160 to 230 Heating	11/16 x 3-1/4	0.062	STT15A-602R	SET29A-625R	WEL18A-602R
V47AB-5C	1/2	75 to 135 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 10	0.062	STT15A-602R	SET29A-602R	WEL17A-600R
V47AB-27C4	1/2	40 to 85 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 103	Yes5	STT15A-602R	–	WEL17A-600R
V47AC-3C	3/4	115 to 180 Heating	11/16 x 3-1/4	0.062	STT16A-601R	SET29A-626R	WEL18A-602R
V47AC-4C	3/4	160 to 230 Heating	11/16 x 3-1/4	0.062	STT16A-601R	SET29A-627R	WEL18A-602R
V47AC-6C	3/4	75 to 135 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 10	0.062	STT16A-601R	SET29A-604R	WEL17A-600R
V47AC-8C	3/4	75 to 135 Heating	11/16 x 3-1/4	–	STT16A-601R	SET98A-621R	WEL18A-602R
V47AC-40C	3/4	40 to 85 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 10	Yes5	STT16A-601R	–	WEL17A-600R
V47AD-1C	1	75 to 135 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 16-1/4	0.093	STT17A-609R	SET29A-605R	–
V47AD-2C	1	115 to 180 Heating	11/16 x 6	0.093	STT17A-609R	SET29A-629R	WEL17A-601R
V47AD-3C	1	160 to 230 Heating	11/16 x 6	0.093	STT17A-609R	SET29A-630R	WEL17A-601R
V47AD-19C	1	40 to 85 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 16-1/4	0.093	STT17A-609R	–	–
V47AE-1C	1-1/4	75 to 135 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 16-1/4	0.093	STT17A-610R	SET29A-605R	–
V47AE-2C	1-1/4	115 to 180 Heating	11/16 x 6	0.093	STT17A-610R	SET29A-629R	WEL17A-601R
V47AE-3C	1-1/4	160 to 230 Heating	11/16 x 6	0.093	STT17A-610R	SET29A-630R	WEL17A-601R
V47AE-13C	1-1/4	40 to 85 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 16-1/4	Yes5	STT17A-610R	–	–
V47AR-1	1-1/26	75 to 135 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 16-1/4	0.093	STT17A-610R	SET29A-605R	–
V47AR-2	1-1/26	115 to 180 Heating	11/16 x 6	0.093	STT17A-610R	SET29A-629R	WEL17A-601R
V47AR-3	1-1/26	160 to 230 Heating	11/16 x 6	0.093	STT17A-610R	SET29A-630R	WEL17A-601R
V47AS-1	26	115 to 160 Heating	11/16 x 10	0.125	STT18A-600R	SET29A-632R	WEL17A-600R
V47AS-2	26	160 to 205 Heating	11/16 x 10	0.125	STT18A-600R	SET29A-633R	WEL17A-600R
V47AS-3	26	75 to 115 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 43	0.125	STT18A-600R	SET29A-606R	–
V47AS-13C	26	40 to 85 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 43	Yes5	STT18A-600R	–	–
V47AT-1	2-1/26	115 to 160 Heating	11/6 x 10	0.125	STT18A-601R	SET29A-632R	WEL17A-600R
V47AT-2	2-1/26	160 to 205 Heating	11/6 x 10	0.125	STT18A-601R	SET29A-633R	WEL17A-600R
V47AT-3	2-1/26	75 to 115 Cross Ambient	11/16 x 43	0.125	STT18A-601R	SET29A-606R	–

Standard capillary is 6 ft (Style 4)
2 ft capillary
Style 1 bulb (does not include 1/2 in. external NPT fitting)
4 ft capillary
Solid plug installed, orifice available separately
ASME Flange

Note: For more information on Bulb Wells, refer to Bulb Wells (LIT-1922135).

Valves and Valve Accessories

V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Valve (Continued)

Accessories (Companion Flanges and Gaskets)

Product Code Number		Water Valve Size (in.)
Flange Gasket (One Gasket per Package)	Companion Flange Kit (See Diagram)	Water Valve Size (in.)
246-423	KIT14A-612	1-1/2 in.
246-424	KIT14A-613	2 in.
246-425	KIT14A-614	2-1/2 in.

Ring Gasket (Two)

Cast Iron Flange (Two)

Hex Nut (Eight)

Machine Bolt (Eight)

Note: Flanges have NPT (National Pipe Thread).

Technical Specifications

V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Valves
Maximum Bulb Temperature	20F° (-6.7 C°) above temperature range
Maximum Water Temperature	170°F (77°C)
Maximum Supply Water Pressure	150 psig (1,034 kPa)
Capillary	Nylon Armor1
Temperature Bulb Style 42 (pictured)	(1/2 in. NPT closed tank immersion)

Companion Flange Kit Metric Conversion

For capillary length, refer to the selection chart on the previous page.

°F	°C
20 to 65	-6 to 18
40 to 85	4 to 29
75 to 115	24 to 46
75 to 135	24 to 57
115 to 160	46 to 71
115 to 180	46 to 82
160 to 205	71 to 96
160 to 230	71 to 110

V47AA-26, V47AB-2, V47AB-27 — Temperature Bulb Style 1 (no 1/2 in. NPT external fitting)

V47 Valve Sizing Information

To Select Water Valve Size, see the flow chart for

300 1136

2-1/2

selection of water valves. Carefully follow the steps as outlined below.

Determine the maximum water flow required. Draw a horizontal line through this flow across the upper half of the flow chart.
Use the following method to determine the temperature rise above the opening point.
1. Valve closing point is the highest temperature at which it is desired to have no flow through the valve.
2. Valve opening point is about 5F° above the closing point.
3. Determine the temperature the valve is to maintain, this is the operating temperature.
4. Subtract the opening temperature from the operating temperature. This is the temperature rise above the opening point.
Determine the available system pressure for use with the valve by the following appropriate method:

Open System:

Available System Pressure = Inlet Pressure – condenser pressure drop – friction losses in piping. Closed System:

Available System Pressure = Inlet Pressure –

200

100

Water Flow Gal. / Min.

2 5 10

1-1/2

1-1/4

3/4

1/2

3/8

20 30 40 (345)

757

379

349

303

265

227

189

151

114

Water Flow L/Min.

3.8

static head – condenser pressure drop-friction losses in piping.

The available system pressure is represented by

the curve in the lower half of the flow chart.

Temperature

(14)

(34)

(69)

(138)

(207)

(276)

-1

60 Temperature

In the lower half of the flow curve, draw a horizontal line from the temperature above the opening point (Step 2d) to the available system pressure (Step 3). If the point falls between two pressure drop curves, use the curve to the left (this gives an automatic factor of safety).
From this point, draw a vertical line until it intersects the flow line from Step 1.
If the intersection falls on a valve size curve, this is the valve size.
If the intersection falls between two curves, use the curve to the left for the required valve size.

Rise 24 Above

Opening Point o

( F)

Flow Chart, V47 Valve

(414)

-4 Rise Above

Opening Point o

( C)

-8

-11

v47_flowchart.eps

-14

-18

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1900107

V47N Series Reverse Acting Valve

Description

The V47N Series are reverse-acting, temperature-actuated, modulating valves that regulate the flow of water or glycol to maintain a desired temperature. Reverse-acting valves open on a drop in temperature. They are generally used in parallel with direct-acting valves for hand pump applications or for bypass operation.

Refer to the V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Water Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-125690) for important product application information.

Applications

• bypass systems

• water-cooled heat pumps in parallel with a direct-acting valve

V47N Series Reverse Acting Valve

Selection Charts

V47N Series Reverse Acting Valve

Product Code Number1	Pipe Size & Connector	Opening Point Range	Factory-set Opening Point	Bulb Size, In.	Standard Bypass Orifice
V47NB-1C	1/2 in. Screw	85 to 155°F	105°F	11/16 x 3-1/4	—
V47NC-1C	3/4 in. Screw	85 to 155°F	105°F	11/16 x 3-1/4
V47NR-1C	1-1/2 in. Flange	45 to 85°F	55°F	11/16 x 16-1/4

1. Refer to sizing information in V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Valve (LIT-1927330), then specify the code number from this chart.

Repair Parts and Accessories

Parts For:	Product Code Number
Parts For:	Seat Repair Kit	Replacement Sensing Element	Bulb Well Number (Order Separately)
V47NB-1C	STT15A-602R	—	WEL18A-602R (Brass)
V47NC-1C	STT16A-601R	—	WEL18A-602R (Brass)
V47NR-1C	STT17A-610R	SET29A-605R	—

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1927345

V48 Series Three-Way Water Regulating Valve

Description

V48 Series valves are designed specifically for condensing units cooled either by atmospheric or forced draft cooling towers.

Refer to the V48 Series 3-Way Water Regulating Valves for Cooling Tower Systems Product Bulletin (LIT-121705) for important product application information.

Applications

V48 Series valves are used on single or multiple condenser hook-ups to the tower to provide the most economical and efficient use of the tower.

Repair Information

If the V48 Series Three-Way Water Regulating Valve fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement valve, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart (Non-Corrosive Refrigerants)

V48 Series Three-Way Water Regulating Valve

Product Code Number	Pipe Size, In.	Range Opening Point of Normally Closed Side psi (kPa)	Pressure Element Style	Water Supply Pressure	Inlet and Outlet Ports	Max Bellows Overpressure	Seat Repair Kit	Replacement Sensing Element
V48AB-1C	1/2	85 to 110 (586 to 758)	30 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut (Style 45)1	150 psig (1,034 kPa)	Threaded	230 psig (1,586 kPa)	STT15A-605R	SEP91A-602R SEC99AA-36C2
V48AB-2C	1/2	145 to 190 (1,000 to 1,310)				320 psig (2,206 kPa)	STT15A-605R	SEP91A-602R SEC99AA-36C2
V48AC-1C	3/4	85 to 110 (586 to 758)				230 psig (1,586 kPa)	STT16A-604R	SEP91A-601R SEC99AA-36C2
V48AC-2C	3/4	145 to 190 (1,000 to 1,310)				320 psig (2,206 kPa)	STT16A-604R	SEP91A-601R SEC99AA-36C2
V48AD-1C	1	85 to 110 (586 to 758)				230 psig (1,586 kPa)	STT17A-616R	SEP91A-603R SEC99AA-36C2
V48AD-2C	1	145 to 190 (1,000 to 1,310)				320 psig (2,206 kPa)	STT17A-616R
V48AE-1C	1-1/4	85 to 110 (586 to 758)				230 psig (1,586 kPa)	STT17A-617R
V48AE-2C	1-1/4	145 to 190 (1,000 to 1,310)				320 psig (2,206 kPa)	STT17A-617R
V48AF-1C	1-1/2	85 to 110 (586 to 758)	1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5)			230 psig (1,586 kPa)	STT17A-604R	SEP81A-602R
V48AF-2C	1-1/2	145 to 190 (1,000 to 1,310)	1/4 in. External Flare Fitting (Style 5)			320 psig (2,206 kPa)	STT17A-604R	SEP81A-601R
V48AJ-2C	1/2		30 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut (Style 45)		Union	320 psig (2,206 kPa)	STT15A-605R	SEP77A-605R
V48EK-2C	3/4		30 in. capillary with 1/4 in. flare nut (Style 46)			370 psig (2,551 kPa)	STT16A-604R	SEP127A-600R
V48AL-2C	1					320 psig (2,206 kPa)	STT17A-616R	SEP107A-602R
V48AM-2C	1-1/4					320 psig (2,206 kPa)	STT17A-617R	SEP107A-602R

Standard capillary length on Style 45 elements is 30 inches
Replacement element supplied with 1/4 in. external SAE connector. Order SEC99AA capillary kit with two flare nuts separately if needed. Use only on valves specified.

Technical Specifications

V48 Series Factory Settings

Refrigerant (R)	Factory Settings psig (kPa)
Refrigerant (R)	Opening Press. Port 1 to Port 2	Closing Press. Port 1 to Port 3
Low Pressure (R-12, R134a, etc.)	95 (655)	120 (896)
Medium Pressure (R-22, R404A, etc.)	165 (1,138)	215 (1,482)

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1900163

V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves

Description

The V146 Series Two-Way Pressure- Actuated Water-Regulating Valves regulate water flow to control refrigerant head pressure in systems with water-cooled condensers. The V146 valves are ideal for applications with system water pressures of up to 350 psig (24.1 bar), such as high-rise buildings.

V146EK and V146AL valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 70 to 260 psi (4.8 to

17.9 bar). V146EK and V146AL valves are available in a 3/4 in. and 1 in. size. Use these valves with standard, non-corrosive refrigerants.

V146GK1 and V146GL1 valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to

27.6 bar). The V146GK1 and V146GL1 valves are available in 3/4 in. and 1 in. size for use with standard, non-corrosive, high-pressure refrigerants.

Refer to the V146 Series 2-Way

Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-121709) for important product application information.

Features

• no close-fitting or sliding parts in water passages

• high-pressure design

• pressure-balanced design

• corrosion-resistant material for internal parts

• accessible range spring

• take-apart construction

Applications

V146 Series Valve

Port 1

Port 2

Pressure connection and capillary

as specified

3/4 in. V146EK Valves

High Refrigerant Pressure 3/4 in. V146GK1 Valves

Port 1

Port 2

FIG:V146_rnddim

FIG:V146GK_dim

Valves and Valve Accessories

V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Valve Dimensions, Inches (Millimeters)

Product Code Number	Nominal Valve Size	A	B	C	D	E
V146EK-1C	3/4 in.	3-3/8 (86)	2-3/16 (55)	7-3/16 (183)	4-3/16 (106)	3 (76)
V146GK1-001C	3/4 in.	3-3/8 (86)	2-3/16 (55)	8 (204)	4-3/16 (106)	3-13/16 (98)
V146AL-1C	1 in.	4-3/4 (121)	2-13/16 (72)	10 (254)	5-15/16 (151)	4-1/16 (103)
V146GL1-001C	1 in.	4-3/4 (121)	2-13/16 (72)	10-1/2 (267)	5-15/16 (151)	4-9/16 (116)

Port 1

Port 2

Port 1

Port 2

Pressure connection and capillary as specified.

FIG:V146AL_dim

FIG:V146GL_dim

1 in. V146AL Valves

High Refrigerant Pressure 1 in. V146GL1 Valves

Selection

To make a rough field estimate of the size of valve for an application, find the valve size by locating a point on a flow chart that satisfies these requirements:

• water flow required by the condenser (Flow)

• refrigerant head pressure rise (PRISE)

• available water pressure (PAVAIL)

Follow these steps, and use the information obtained to locate a point on one of the flowcharts that satisfies all three steps.

Take the water flow required by the condenser (Flow) from information provided by the manufacturer of the condensing unit. If the manufacturer’s information is unavailable, use the following information to make a rough approximation of maximum water flow in gallons per minute (gpm) (cubic meters per hour [m3/hr]):

• System Capacity (Tons of Refrigeration)

• Outlet Water Temperature (Temp. Outlet)

• Inlet Water Temperature (Temp. Inlet)

Calculate the flow using the following formula:

Flow = Tons of Refrigeration x 30 (Temp.Outlet – Temp.Inlet )

FIG:flw_eqn

Flow Required

Note: If the outlet temperature is unknown, assume it to be 10F (5.6C) above the inlet temperature.

Determine refrigerant head pressure rise above the valve opening point (PRISE) using the following steps:
1. The Valve Closing Pressure (PCLOSE) is equal to the refrigerant pressure at the highest ambient temperature the refrigeration equipment experiences in the Off cycle. Use a

Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected to find this pressure.

1. To approximate the Valve Opening Pressure (POPEN), add about 7 psi (0.5 bar) for EK and AL models or 10 psi (0.7 bar) for GL1 or GK1 models to the Valve Closing Pressure.

Valves and Valve Accessories

V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

POPEN = PCLOSE +7 psi (0.5 bar)

P = P +10 psi (0.7 bar)

FIG:V14x_eqn_opn_prssr

The maximum recommended differential water pressure across a valve is 60 psi (4.1 bar).

Flow (gpm)








			Pressure Drop Through Valve (psi)

OPEN CLOSE

Valve Opening Pressure, EK and AL Models (Top) or GK1 and GL1 Models (Bottom)

1. From the Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected, read the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure (PCOND) (operating head pressure) corresponding to the selected

condensing temperature.

1. Subtract the Valve Opening Pressure from the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure. This gives the head pressure rise.

FIG:eqn_hd_prssr_rs

PRISE = PCOND – POPEN

010 15 20 25

30 35

40 45 50

FIG:V146EK_chrt

55 60

Figure 1: Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise

Determine the available water pressure to the valve (PAVAIL) using the following steps. This is the actual water pressure available to force water through the valve.
1. Determine the minimum inlet pressure (PIN). This is the water pressure from city water mains, pumps, or other sources.
2. Pressure drop through condenser (PCOND) is the difference in water pressure between the condenser inlet and the condenser outlet. Obtain this information from the condenser manufacturer.
3. Estimate or calculate the pressure drop through all associated piping (PLOSS).
4. Subtract the PCOND and PLOSS from PIN. The result is PAVAIL.

Flow (gpm)

Cooling Tower

Pump

2-Way Valve

oss 2

Loss

Condenser

FIG:2wy_prss_drp

FIG:V146AL_chrt

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psi)

3/4 in. V146EK Valve














			Pressure Drop Through Valve (psi)
			Pressure Drop Through Valve (psi)

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

P Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psi)

1 in. V146AL Valve

L 1

PCOND = P1 – P2

+ P + …

P = PLoss 1 Loss 2 LOSS

PAVAIL = PIN – ( PCOND + PLOSS)

Available Water Pressure

Select the proper valve size from the flowcharts by locating a point on a chart that satisfies the flow, the head pressure rise above opening point, and the pressure drop across the valve.

Use these equations to convert between U.S. and S.I. units.

• 1 dm3/s = 3.6 m3/h = 15.9 U.S. gal. /min. = 13.2 U.K. gal. /min.

• 1 bar = 100 kPa = 0.1 MPa  1.02 kg/cm2 = 0.987 atm  14.5 psi

Valves and Valve Accessories

V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (bar)

0.7

Flow

10 (0.7)

Pressure Drop Through Valve, psi (bar)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

60 (4.1)

50 (3.4)

40 (2.8)

30 (2.1)

25 (1.7)

20 (1.4)

1.7

2.7

3.7

4.7

5.7

6.7

Flow

(GPM)

(m3/hr) 10

10 20 30 40

50 60 70 80

90 100

FIG:V146GK1_chrt

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psig)

High Refrigerant Pressure 3/4 in. V146GK1 Valves

Flow GPM

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (bar)

Flow m3/hr

1.3

2.3

3.3

4.3

5.3

6.3

7.3

60 (4.1)

50 (3.4)

40 (2.8)

30 (2.1)

25 (1.7)

20 (1.4)

10 (1.0)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

Pressure Drop Through Valve psig (m3/hr)

16.2

14.2

12.2

10.2

8.2

6.2

4.2

2.2

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psig)

0.2

High Refrigerant Pressure 1 in. V146GL1 Valves

FIG:V146GL_chrt

Valves and Valve Accessories

V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Style 5 Style 46

1/4-in. SAE External Flare Connector

Copper Capillary with

1/4-in. SAE Internal Flare Connector (Includes Valve Stem Depressor)

Pressure Connection Styles

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Nominal Valve Size	Inlet and Outlet Ports	Pressure Connection Style	Shipping Weight, lb (kg)
V146EK-1C	3/4 in.	Union (Sweat)	46	4.3 (2.0)
V146GK1-001C	3/4 in.	Union (Sweat)	5	4.3 (2.0)
V146AL-1C	1 in.	Union (Sweat)	46	9.3 (4.0)
V146GL1-001C	1 in.	Union (Sweat)	5	9.3 (4.0)

Repair Information

If the V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valve fails to operate within its specifications, refer to the V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-1201709) for a list of repair parts available.

Technical Specifications

V146 Series 2-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves
Maximum Refrigerant Pressure	V146EK: 370 psi (25.5 bar) V146AL: 320 psi (22.1 bar)
Maximum Working Pressure	V146GK1, V146GL1: 630 psi (43.4 bar)
Opening Point Adjustment Range	V146EK, V146AL: 70 to 260 psi (4.8 to 17.9 bar) V146GK1, V146GL1: 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar)
Factory-Set Opening Point	V146EK, V146AL: 165 psi (11.4 bar) V146GK1, V146GL1: 275 psi (19.0 bar)
Media	350 psi (24.1 bar) maximum, -4F to 170F (-20C to 77C) glycol/water or liquids with low freezing points that are compatible with valve materials

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1900164

V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves

Description

The V148 Series Three-Way

Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves regulate water flow to control refrigerant head pressure in systems with single or multiple water-cooled condensers. The V148 valves are designed for applications with system water pressures of up to 350 psi (24.1 bar), such as high-rise buildings.

V148EK and V148AL valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 145 to 190 psi (10.0 to

13.1 bar). V148EK and V148AL valves are available in 3/4 in. and 1 in. sizes. Use these valves with standard, non-corrosive refrigerants.

V148GK1 and V148GL1 valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to

1. bar). The V148GK1 and V148GL1 Valves are available in 3/4 in. and 1 in. sizes for use with standard, non-corrosive,

high-pressure refrigerants.

Refer to the V148 Series 3-Way

Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-121712) for important product application information.

Features

• no close-fitting or sliding parts in water passages

• high water pressure design

• pressure-balanced design

• corrosion-resistant material for internal parts

• accessible range spring

• take-apart construction

Applications

V148 Series Valve

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Plugged

Pressure connection and capillary as specified

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Plugged

Pressure connection and capillary as specified

3/4 in. V148EK Valve 1 in. V148AL Valve

FIG:V148EK_075_dim

FIG:V148AL_100_dim

Valves and Valve Accessories

V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Valve Dimensions, Inches (Millimeters)

Model	Nominal Valve Size	A	B	C	D	E	F
V148EK-1C	3/4 in.	3-3/8 (86)	2-3/16 (56)	9 (229)	4-3/16 (106)	1-3/4 (44)	3 (76)
V148GK1-001C	3/4 in.	3-3/8 (86)	2-3/16 (56)	9-13/16 (249)	4-3/16 (106)	1-3/4 (44)	3-13/16 (97)
V148AL-1C	1 in.	4-3/4 (121)	2-3/4 (71)	12 (305)	5-15/16 (151)	2 (51)	4 (102)
V148GL1-001C	1 in.	4-3/4 (121)	2-3/4 (71)	12-1/2 (318)	5-15/16 (151)	2 (51)	4-1/2 (115)

3/4 in. High Refrigerant Pressure V148GK1 Valves

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Plugged

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Plugged

FIG:V148GK1_075_dim

FIG:V148GL1_100_dim

1 in. High Refrigerant Pressure V148GL1 Valves

Selection

To make a rough field estimate of the size of valve for an application, find the valve size by locating a point on a flow chart that satisfies these requirements:

• water flow required by the condenser (Flow)

• refrigerant head pressure rise (PRISE)

• available water pressure (PAVAIL)

Follow these steps, and use the information obtained to locate a point on one of the flowcharts that satisfies all three steps.

Take the water flow required by the condenser (Flow) from information provided by the manufacturer of the condensing unit. If the manufacturer’s information is unavailable, use the following information to make a rough approximation of maximum water flow in gallons per minute (gpm) (cubic meters per hour [m3/hr]):

• System Capacity (Tons of Refrigeration)

• Outlet Water Temperature (Temp. Outlet)

• Inlet Water Temperature (Temp. Inlet)

Calculate the flow using the following formula:

Flow = Tons of Refrigeration x 30 (Temp.Outlet – Temp.Inlet )

FIG:flw_eqn

Flow Required

Note: If the outlet temperature is unknown, assume it to be 10F (5.6C) above the inlet temperature.

Determine refrigerant head pressure rise above the valve opening point (PRISE) using the following steps:
1. The Valve Closing Pressure (PCLOSE) is equal to the refrigerant pressure at the highest ambient temperature the

refrigeration equipment experiences in the Off cycle. Use a Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected to find this pressure.

1. To approximate the Valve Opening Pressure (POPEN), add about 7 psi (0.5 bar) for EK and AL models or 10 psi (0.7 bar) for GK1 and GL1 models to the Valve Closing Pressure.

Valves and Valve Accessories

V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

POPEN = PCLOSE +7 psi (0.5 bar) POPEN = PCLOSE +10 psi (0.7 bar)

FIG:V14x_eqn_opn_prssr

Valve Opening Pressure, EK and AL Models (Top) or GK1 and GL1 Models (Bottom)

1. From the Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant

Use these equations to convert between U.S. and S.I. units.

1 dm3/s = 3.6 m3/h = 15.9 U.S. gal. /min. = 13.2 U.K. gal. /min.
1 bar = 100 kPa = 0.1 MPa  1.02 kg/cm2 = 0.987 atm  14.5 psi

Flow (gpm)






			Pressure Drop Through Valve						(psi)

selected, read the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure (PCOND) 30 30

(operating head pressure) corresponding to the selected

condensing temperature. 25 20

1. Subtract the Valve Opening Pressure from the Refrigerant

Condensing Pressure. This gives the head pressure rise. 20 15

FIG:eqn_hd_prssr_rs

PRISE = PCOND – POPEN

FIG:V148EK_chrt

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise

Determine the available water pressure to the valve (PAVAIL) using the following steps. This is the actual water pressure available to force water through the valve.
1. Determine the minimum inlet pressure (PIN). This is the water pressure from city water mains, pumps, or other sources.
2. Pressure drop through condenser (PCOND) is the difference in water pressure between the condenser inlet and the condenser outlet. Obtain this information from the condenser manufacturer.
3. Estimate or calculate the pressure drop through all associated

Flow

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psi)

3/4 in. V148EK Valve

piping (PLOSS).

1. Subtract the PCOND and PLOSS from PIN. The result is PAVAIL.

FIG:3wy_prss_drp

Cooling Tower

Pump

3-Way

(gpm)

55 30










			Pressure Drop Through Valve (psi)
			Pressure Drop Through Valve (psi)

45 20

40 15

30 10

25 7

FIG:V148AL_chrt

Valve

P2 P1 10

Condenser

P P 5

Loss 2

Loss 1

Balancing Valve Bypass Line

LOSS

Loss 1 Loss 2

+ P

+ …

PCOND = P1 – P2

10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psi)

1 in. V148AL Valve

PAVAIL= PIN – ( PCOND + PLOSS)

Available Water Pressure

Select the proper valve size from the flowcharts by locating a point on a chart that satisfies the flow, the head pressure rise above opening point, and the pressure drop across the valve.

Valves and Valve Accessories

V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Flow (GPM)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (bar)

0.7 1.7 2.7 3.7 4.7 5.7 6.7

Flow (m3/hr)

60 (4.1)

50 (3.4)

Pressure Drop Through Valve psi (bar)

40 (2.8)

30 (2.1)

25 (1.7)

20 (1.4)

10 (0.7)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

0 0

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

FIG:V148GK1

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psig)

High Refrigerant Pressure 3/4 in. V148GK1 Valve

Flow GPM

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (bar)

1.3 2.3 3.3 4.3 5.3 6.3 7.3

60 (4.1)

50 (3.4)

40 (2.8)

Flow m3/hr 16.2

14.2

30 (2.1)

50 25 (1.7)

20 (1.4)

10 (1.0)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

Pressure Drop Through Valve psig (m3/hr)

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

FIG:V148GL_chrt

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise (psig)

12.2

10.2

8.2

6.2

4.2

2.2

0.2

High Refrigerant Pressure 1 in. V148GL1 Valve

Valves and Valve Accessories

V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves (Continued)

Style 5

Style 46

Copper Capillary with

1/4-in. SAE External Flare Connector 1/4-in. SAE Internal Flare Connector

(Includes Valve Stem Depressor)

Pressure Connection Styles

Selection Chart

Product Code Number	Nominal Valve Size	Inlet and Outlet Ports	Pressure Connection Style	Shipping Weight, lb (kg)
V148EK-1C	3/4 in.	Union (Sweat)	46	7 (3.2)
V148GK1-001C	3/4 in.	Union (Sweat)	5	7 (3.2)
V148AL-1C	1 in.	Union (Sweat)	46	12 (5.4)
V148GL1-001C	1 in.	Union (Sweat)	5	12 (5.4)

Repair Information

If the V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valve fails to operate within its specifications, refer to the V148 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves Product Bulletin (LIT-121712) for a list of repair parts available.

Technical Specifications

V148 Series 3-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves
Maximum Refrigerant Pressure	V148EK: 370 psig (25.5 bar) V148AL: 320 psig (22.1 bar)
Maximum Working Pressure	V148GK1, V148GL1: 630 psig (43.4 bar)
Factory-Set Opening Point (Port 1 to Port 2)	V148EK, V148AL: 165 psig (11.4 bar) V148GK1, V148GL1: 275 psig (19.0 bar)
Opening Point Adjustment Range (Port 1 to Port 2)	V148EK, V148AL: 145 to 190 psi (10.0 to 13.1 bar) V148GK1, V148GL1: 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar)
Throttling Range	V148EK, V148AL: 70 psig (4.8 bar) V148GK1, V148GL1: 100 psig (6.9 bar)
Media	350 psi (24.1 bar) maximum, -4F to 170F (-20C to 77C) glycol/water or liquids with low freezing points that are compatible with valve materials

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1900575

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants

Description

The V246 Series Two-Way

Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants come in two types of control action: direct acting and reverse acting. V246 valves regulate water flow to control refrigerant head pressure in systems with water-cooled condensers.

The V246 Series Valves are available in 3/8 in. through 2 in. sizes and have a maximum allowable water pressure of 150 psig

(10.3 bar). Direct acting V246 valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 200 to 400 psi

(13.8 to 27.6 bar), and reverse acting valves have a range of 135 to 300 psi

(9.3 to 20.7 bar). V246 valves may be used with standard non-corrosive refrigerants.

Maritime models, which have nickel copper (Monel®) internal parts, are available for applications where the media may be corrosive to the internal parts.

Selection Charts

Refer to the V246 Series 2-Way

Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants Product Bulletin (LIT-12011514) for important product application information.

Features

• no close fitting or sliding parts in water passages

• accessible range spring

• take-apart construction

• pressure-balanced design

• corrosion-resistant material for internal parts

Repair Information

If the V246 Series Two-Way

Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valve for High Pressure Refrigerants fails to operate within its specifications, refer to the V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated

Water-Regulating Valves for High Pressure Refrigerants Product Bulletin (LIT-12011514) for a list of repair parts available.

V246 Series Water-Regulating Valve

North American Standard Production Models

Product Code Number	Construction	Valve Size and Connection	Element Style	Shipping Weight, lb (kg)
V246GA1-001C	Direct Acting1, Commercial	3/8 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	1.8 (0.8)
V246GB1-001C	Direct Acting1, Commercial	1/2 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	3.0 (1.4)
V246GC1-001C	Direct Acting1, Commercial	3/4 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	3.7 (1.7)
V246GD1-001C	Direct Acting1, Commercial	1 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	9.3 (4.2)
V246GE1-001C	Direct Acting1, Commercial	1-1/4 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	10 (4.5)
V246GM1-001C	Direct Acting1, Commercial	1-1/4 in. Union Sweat	Style 5	10 (4.5)
V246GR1-001C	Direct Acting1, Commercial	1-1/2 in. Flange	Style 5	13.6 (6.2)
V246GS1-001C	Direct Acting1, Commercial	2 in. Flange	Style 5	27 (12.3)
V246HA1-001C	Direct Acting1, Maritime	3/8 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	1.8 (0.8)
V246HB1-001C	Direct Acting1, Maritime	1/2 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	3.0 (1.4)
V246HC1-001C	Direct Acting1, Maritime	3/4 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	4.3 (2.0)
V246HD1-001C	Direct Acting1, Maritime	1 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	9.5 (4.3)
V246HE1-001C	Direct Acting1, Maritime	1-1/4 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	10.3 (4.7)
V246HR1-001C	Direct Acting1, Maritime	1-1/2 in. ASME Flange	Style 5	13.6 (6.2)
V246HS1-001C	Direct Acting1, Maritime	2 in. ASME Flange	Style 5	27 (12.3)
V246KA1-001C	Direct Acting1, Commercial, Low Flow	3/8 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	1.8 (0.8)
V246NA1-001C	Reverse Acting2, Commercial	3/8 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	1.8 (0.8)
V246NB1-001C	Reverse Acting2, Commercial	1/2 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	3.0 (1.4)
V246NC1-001C	Reverse Acting2, Commercial	3/4 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	3.7 (1.7)
V246ND1-001C	Reverse Acting2, Commercial	1 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	9.3 (4.2)

The range is 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar).
The range is 135 to 300 psi (9.3 to 20.7 bar).

European Standard Production Models (Part 1 of 2)

Product Code Number	Construction	Valve Size and Connection	Element Style	Shipping Weight, kg (lb)
V246GA1A001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	3/8 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228	Style 5	0.8 (1.8)
V246GB1A001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1/2 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228	Style 5	1.4 (3.0)
V246GC1A001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	3/4 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228	Style 5	1.7 (3.7)
V246GD1B001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7	Style 5	4.2 (9.3)
V246GE1B001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1-1/4 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7	Style 5	4.5 (10)

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

European Standard Production Models (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code Number	Construction	Valve Size and Connection	Element Style	Shipping Weight, kg (lb)
V246GR1B001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1-1/2 in. Flange, DIN2533	Style 5	6.2 (13.6)
V246GS1B001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	2 in. Flange, DIN2533	Style 5	12.3 (27)
V246HA1B001C	Direct Acting, Maritime	3/8 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228	Style 5	0.8 (1.8)
V246HB1B001C	Direct Acting, Maritime	1/2 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228	Style 5	1.4 (3.0)
V246HC1B001C	Direct Acting, Maritime	3/4 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228	Style 5	2.0 (4.3)
V246HD1B001C	Direct Acting, Maritime	1 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228	Style 5	4.3 (9.5)
V246HE1B001C	Direct Acting, Maritime	1-1/4 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228	Style 5	4.7 (10.3)
V246HR1B001C	Direct Acting, Maritime	1-1/2 in. Flange, DIN86021	Style 5	6.2 (13.6)
V246HS1B001C	Direct Acting, Maritime	2 in. Flange, DIN86021	Style 5	12.3 (27)

Valve Sizing Information

Each application is unique and requires specific engineering data to properly size and design a system to fulfill the appropriate requirements. Typically, a valve is replaced with another valve of the same size in a properly sized and engineered system. In North America, contact Johnson Controls/PENN® Refrigeration Application Engineering at 1-800-275-5676 to obtain specific engineering data. In other areas, contact the local Johnson Controls® sales office to obtain specific engineering data.

To make a rough field estimate of the size of valve for an application, find the valve size needed by locating a point on a flow chart that satisfies these requirements:

• water flow required by the condenser (Flow)

• refrigerant head pressure rise (PRISE)

• available water pressure (PAVAIL)

Follow these steps, and use the information obtained to locate a point on one of the flowcharts that satisfies all three steps.

1. Take the water flow required by the condenser (Flow) from information provided by the manufacturer of the condensing unit. If the manufacturer’s information is unavailable, use the following information to make a rough approximation of water flow in gallons per minute (gpm) [cubic meters per hour (m3/hr)]:

• System Capacity (Tons of Refrigeration)

• Outlet Water Temperature (Temp. Outlet)

• Inlet Water Temperature (Temp. Inlet) Calculate the flow using the following formula:

Tons of Refrigeration x 30

POPEN = PCLOSE +10 psi (0.7 bar)

FIG:eqn_opn_pr

Valve Opening Pressure

1. From the Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected, read the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure (PCOND) (operating head pressure) corresponding to the selected

condensing temperature.

1. Subtract the Valve Opening Pressure from the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure. This gives the head pressure rise.

FIG:eqn_hd_prssr_rs

PRISE = PCOND – POPEN

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise

Determine the available water pressure to the valve (PAVAIL) using the following steps. This is the actual water pressure available to force water through the valve.
1. Determine the inlet pressure (PIN). This is the water pressure from city water mains, pumps, or other sources.
2. Pressure drop through condenser (PCOND) is the difference in water pressure between the condenser inlet and the condenser outlet. Obtain this information from the condenser manufacturer.
3. Estimate or calculate the pressure drop through all associated piping (PLOSS).
4. Subtract the PCOND and PLOSS from PIN. The result is PAVAIL.

FIG:2wy_prss_drp

Flow =

(Temp.Outlet – Temp.Inlet)

Pump

2-Way Valve

Condenser

oss 2

Loss

Cooling Tower

FIG:flw_eqn

Flow Required

Note: If the outlet temperature is unknown, assume it to be 10F (6C) above the inlet temperature.

Determine refrigerant head pressure rise above the valve opening point (PRISE) using the Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise figure and the following steps:
1. The Valve Closing Pressure (PCLOSE) is equal to the refrigerant pressure at the highest ambient temperature the refrigeration equipment experiences in the Off cycle. Use a

Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected to find this pressure.

1. To approximate the Valve Opening Pressure (POPEN), add about 10 psi (0.7 bar) to the Valve Closing Pressure.

Note: Add about 20 psi (1.4 bar) for 3/8 in. valves.

L 1

PCOND= P1 – P2

P = P + P + …

LOSS Loss 1 Loss 2

PAVAIL= PIN – ( PCOND + PLOSS)

Available Water Pressure

4. Select the proper valve size from the flowcharts by locating a point on a chart that satisfies the flow, the head pressure rise above opening point, and the pressure drop across the valve.

Metric Conversions

Use these equations to convert between U.S. and S.I. units.

• 1 dm3/s = 3.6 m3/h = 15.9 U.S. gal. /min. = 13.2 U.K. gal. /min.

• 1 bar = 100 kPa = 0.1 MPa  1.02 kg/cm2 = 0.987 atm  14.5 psi

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

V246 Flowcharts

The maximum recommended differential water pressure across a valve is 60 psig (4.1 bar).

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

Flow (gpm)

3.0

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.2 4.9 5.5 6.2 6.9 7.6 8.3

Flow (m3/hr)

5 (0.3)

60 (4.1)

50 (3.4)

40 (2.8)

30 (2.1)

20 (1.4)

4.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

Pre

ssure Dro

PAvail p Throug

h Valve p

2 (0.1)

sig (bar)

2.5 0.6

2.0 0.5

1.5 0.3

1.0 0.2

0.5 0.1

0.0 0.0

FIG:V246_3.8 in. Low graph

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

3/8 in. Direct Acting Low-Flow Valve Flowchart

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

Flow (gpm)

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.2 4.9 5.5 6.2 6.9 7.6 8.3

60 (4.1)

50 (3.4)

40 (2.8)

30 (2.1)

20 (1.4)

4.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

Pre

ssure Dr

PAvail op Throu

h Valve p

sig (bar)

Flow (m3/hr)

16 3.6

14 3.2

12 2.7

10 2.3

8 1.8

6 1.4

4 0.9

2 0.5

FIG:V246_3.8 in. graph

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

3/8 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

0.0

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

Flow (gpm)

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.2 4.9 5.5 6.2 6.9 7.6 8.3

60 (4.1)

50 (3.4)

40 (2.8)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

ig (bar)

30 (2.1)

20 (1.4)

4.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

Pres

sure Dro

PAvail p Through

Valve ps

Flow (m3/hr)

25 5.7

20 4.5

15 3.4

10 2.3

5 1.1

FIG:V246_0.5 in. graph

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1/2 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

0.0

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

Flow (gpm)

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.2 4.9 5.5 6.2 6.9 7.6 8.3

				60 (4.1)
				50 (3.4) 40 (2.8)
				30 (2.1)
			1	20 (1.4) 4.5 (1.0)
				10 (0.7)
				5 (0.3) 2 (0.1)
Pr	ssure Dr	PAvai op Throu	l gh Valve p	sig (bar)

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

3/4 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

Flow (m3/hr)

6.8

5.7

4.5

3.4

2.3

1.1

0.0

FIG:V246_0.75 in. graph

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

Flow (gpm)

FIG:V246_1.0 in. graph

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.2 4.9 5.5 6.2 6.9 7.6 8.3

Flow (m3/hr)

13.6

11.4

9.1

6.8

4.5

2.3


				60 (4.1) 50 (3.4)
				40 (2.8) 30 (2.1)
				20 (1.4)
			1	4.5 (1.0) 10 (0.7)
				5 (0.3) 2 (0.1)
Pre	ssure Dro	PAvail p Throug	h Valve p	sig (bar)

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

0.0

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

Flow (gpm)

120

100

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.2 4.9 5.5 6.2 6.9 7.6 8.3


				60 (4.1) 50 (3.4)
				40 (2.8) 30 (2.1)
				20 (1.4)
			1	4.5 (1.0) 10 (0.7)
				5 (0.3) 2 (0.1)
Pre	ssure Dro	PAvail p Throug	h Valve p	sig (bar)

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

FIG:V246_1.25 in. graph

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1-1/4 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

27.3

22.7

18.2

13.6

9.1

4.5

0.0

Flow (m3/hr)

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

Flow (gpm)

120

100

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.2 4.9 5.5 6.2 6.9 7.6 8.3


				60 (4.1) 50 (3.4)
				40 (2.8) 30 (2.1)
				20 (1.4)
				14.5 (1.0) 10 (0.7)
				5 (0.3) 2 (0.1)
Pre	ssure Dro	PAvail p Throug	h Valve p	sig (bar)

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1-1/2 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

Flow (m3/hr)

27.3

22.7

18.2

13.6

9.1

4.5

0.0

FIG:V246_1.5 in. graph

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( bar )

Flow (gpm)

120

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.2 4.9 5.5 6.2 6.9 7.6 8.3

27.3

60 (4.1)

50 (3.4)

40 (2.8)

30 (2.1)

20 (1.4)

4.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

ressure D

PAvai rop Throu

gh Valve

psi (bar)

Flow (m3/hr)

100 22.7

80 18.2

60 13.6

40 9.1

20 4.5

FIG:V246_2 in. graph

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

2 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

0.0

Valves and Valve Accessories

Dimensions

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

A B

D C

Port 1 Port 2

FIG:V246_thrdd

FIG:V246_anglbdy

V246 Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

V246 Angle-Body Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

V246 Screw Connection Valves Dimensions
Valve Size	Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)
	A	B	C	D	E
3/8 in.	2-5/8 (67)	1-5/8 (41)	6-1/2 (166)	3-1/2 (89)	3 (77)
1/2 in.	3-1/16 (78)	2 (51)	7-3/16 (182)	3-13/16 (96)	3-3/8 (86)
3/4 in.	3-3/8 (86)	2-3/16 (55)	8 (203)	4-3/16 (106)	3-13/16 (98)
1 in.	4-3/4 (121)	2-13/16 (71)	10-1/2 (267)	5-15/16 (151)	4-9/16 (116)
1-1/4 in.	4-3/4 (121)	2-13/16 (71)	10-7/8 (276)	6-1/8 (156)	4-3/4 (121)
V246 Angle-Body Screw Connection Valves Dimensions
Valve Size	Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)
	A	B	C	D	E
3/8 in.	2-3/4 (70)	1-5/8 (41)	6-15/16 (176)	3-5/8 (92)	3-1/8 (80)
1/2 in.	3-1/8 (80)	2 (51)	7-1/2 (191)	3-7/8 (98)	3-1/2 (88)
3/4 in.	3-9/16 (90)	2-1/8 (55)	8-9/16 (217)	4-5/16 (110)	4 (101)

FIG:V246_unnbdy

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Port 1

Port 2

V246 Union Sweat Connection Valves Dimensions

FIG:flng_bdy

Valve Size	Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)
Valve Size	A	B	C	D	E
1-1/4 in.	4-3/4 (121)	2-13/16 (71)	10-7/8 (276)	6-1/8 (156)	4-3/4 (121)

V246 Flange Valve Dimensions

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

V246 Flange Valve, Commercial Service – Dimensions

Valve Size	Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)
Valve Size	A	B	C	D	E	F	G	H
1-1/2 in.	5-5/16 (135)	9/16 (14)	6-1/8 (156)	4-3/4 (121)	10-7/8 (276)	5-1/4 (133)1	2-5/8 (67)	1-7/8 (48)
2 in.	6-5/8 (168)	5/8 (16)	7-1/8 (181)	6-1/8 (156)	13-1/4 (336)	6-3/16 (157)2	3-1/2 (89)	2-1/4 (57)

The dimensions on the European versions are 5-29/32 in. (150 mm).
The dimensions on the European versions are 6-1/2 in. (165 mm).

V246 Flange Valve, Commercial Service – Flange Specifications

Valve Size	Regional Version	Number of Holes	Hole Size	Bolt Circle
1-1/2 in.	North American	4	5/8 in. (16 mm)	3-7/8 in. (98 mm)
2 in.	North American	4	3/4 in. (19 mm)	4-3/4 in. (121 mm)
1-1/2 in.	European, DIN2533 Flanges	4	18 mm	110 mm
2 in.	European, DIN2533 Flanges	4	18 mm	125 mm

V246 Flange Valve, Maritime Service – Dimensions

Valve Size	Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)
Valve Size	A	B	C	D	E	F	G	H
1-1/2 in.	5-5/16 (135)	9/16 (14)	6-1/8 (156)	4-3/4 (121)	10-7/8 (276)	5-1/4 (133)1	2-5/8 (67)	1-7/8 (48)
2 in.	6-3/8 (162)	5/8 (16)	7-1/8 (181)	6-1/8 (156)	13-1/4 (337)	6 (152)2	3-1/2 (89)	2-3/4 (70)

The dimensions on the European versions are 5-29/32 in. (150 mm).
The dimensions on the European versions are 6-1/2 in. (165 mm).

V246 Flange Valve, Maritime Service – Flange Specifications

Valve Size	Regional Version	Number of Holes	Hole Size	Bolt Circle
1-1/2 in.	North American	4	5/8 in. (16 mm)	3-7/8 in. (98 mm)
2 in.	North American	4	3/4 in. (19 mm)	4-3/4 in. (121 mm)
1-1/2 in.	European, DIN86021 Flanges	4	18 mm	110 mm
2 in.	European, DIN86021 Flanges	4	18 mm	125 mm

Materials

North American V246 Materials

Nominal Valve Size:		3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)	1 in. to 2 in. (Commercial)	Maritime (All Sizes)
Material		3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)	1 in. to 2 in. (Commercial)	Maritime (All Sizes)
Body		Cast brass	Cast iron/rust resisting finish	Cast bronze
Seat		Aluminum Bronze	Aluminum bronze	Monel
Disc		BUNA-N	BUNA-N	BUNA-N
Disc Cup		Brass	Brass	Monel
Disc Stud		Brass	Brass	Monel
Stem/Extension Sleeve		Brass	Brass	Monel
Diaphragms		Nylon reinforced BUNA-N	Nylon reinforced BUNA-N	Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
Refrigerant Contact
Pressure Element	Cup	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel
	Bellows	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel
	Bellows Ring	Steel/nickel plated	Steel/nickel plated	Steel/nickel plated

Valves and Valve Accessories

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

European V246 Materials

Nominal Valve Size:		3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)	1 in. to 2 in. (Commercial)	Maritime (All sizes)
Material		3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)	1 in. to 2 in. (Commercial)	Maritime (All sizes)
Body		Hot forged brass	Cast iron/rust resisting finish	Cast bronze
Seat		Aluminum bronze	Aluminum bronze	Monel
Disc		BUNA-N	BUNA-N	BUNA-N
Disc Cup		Brass	Brass	Monel
Disc Stud		Brass	Brass	Monel
Stem/Extension Sleeve		Brass	Brass	Monel
Diaphragms		Nylon reinforced BUNA-N	Nylon reinforced BUNA-N	Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
Refrigerant Contact
Pressure Element	Cup	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel
	Bellows	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel
	Bellows Ring	Steel/nickel plated	Steel/nickel plated	Steel/nickel plated

Technical Specifications

V246 Series 2-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants
Factory-Set Opening Point	Direct Acting 200 psig (13.8 bar), Reverse Acting 165 psig (11.4 bar)
Maximum Working Pressure	630 psig (43.4 bar)
Opening Point Adjustment Range	Direct Acting 200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar), Reverse Acting 135 to 300 psi (9.3 to 20.7 bar)
Media	150 psig (10.3 bar) Maximum, -4F to 170F (-20C to 77C) glycol/water or liquids with low freezing points that are compatible with valve materials

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1900576

Description

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants

Features

The V248 Series Three-Way

Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants regulate water flow and control refrigerant head pressure in systems with single or multiple water-cooled condensers.

V248 valves have an adjustable opening point in a refrigerant pressure range of 200 to

400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar). V248 valves are available in 1/2 in. through 1-1/2 in. size for use with standard, non-corrosive,

high-pressure refrigerants.

Maritime models, which have nickel copper (Monel®) internal parts, are available for applications where the media may be corrosive to the internal parts.

Refer to the V248 Series 3-Way

Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants Product Bulletin (LIT-12011515) for important product application information.

• no close fitting or sliding parts in water passages

• accessible range spring

• take-apart construction

• pressure-balanced design

• corrosion-resistant material for internal parts

Repair Information

If the V248 Series Three-Way

Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants fails to operate within its specifications, refer to the V248 Series 3-Way Pressure-Actuated

Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants Product Bulletin (LIT-12011515) for a list of repair parts available.

Selection Charts

North American Standard Production Models – Range 200 to 400 psi

V248 Screw Connection Valve

Product Code Number	Construction	Valve Size and Connection	Element Style	Shipping Weight, lb (kg)
V248GB1-001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1/2 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	5.0 (2.3)
V248GC1-001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	3/4 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	6.5 (3.0)
V248GD1-001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	12.0 (5.4)
V248GE1-001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1-1/4 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	16.0 (7.2)
V248GF1-001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1-1/2 in. NPT Screw	Style 5	25.0 (11.3)
V248GK1-001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	3/4 in. Union Sweat	Style 5	7.0 (3.2)
V248GL1-001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1 in. Union Sweat	Style 5	12.0 (5.4)
V248GM1-001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1-1/4 in. Union Sweat	Style 5	13.7 (6.2)

European Standard Production Models – Range 13.8 to 27.8 bar

Product Code Number	Construction	Valve Size and Connection	Element Style	Shipping Weight, lb (kg)
V248GB1B001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1/2 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7	Style 5	5.0 (2.3)
V248GC1B001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	3/4 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7	Style 5	6.5 (3.0)
V248GD1B001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7	Style 5	12.1 (5.5)
V248GE1B001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1-1/4 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7	Style 5	16.0 (7.2)
V248GF1B001C	Direct Acting, Commercial	1-1/2 in. BSPT Screw, ISO 7	Style 5	25.0 (11.3)
V248HC1B001C	Direct Acting, Maritime	3/4 in. BSPP Screw, ISO 228	Style 5	6.5 (3.0)

Valves and Valve Accessories

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Applications

To make a rough field estimate of the size of valve for an application, find the valve size needed by locating a point on a flow chart that satisfies these requirements:

• water flow required by the condenser (Flow)

• refrigerant head pressure rise (PRISE)

• available water pressure (PAVAIL)

Follow these steps, and use the information obtained to locate a point on one of the flowcharts that satisfies all three steps.

• System Capacity (Tons of Refrigeration)

• Outlet Water Temperature (Temp. Outlet)

• Inlet Water Temperature (Temp. Inlet)

PRISE = PCOND – POPEN

Refrigerant Head Pressure Rise

FIG:eqn_hd_prssr_rs

Determine the available water pressure to the valve (PAVAIL) using the following steps. This the actual water pressure available to force water through the valve.
1. Determine the minimum inlet pressure (PIN). This is the water pressure from city water mains, pumps, or other sources.
2. Pressure drop through condenser (PCOND) is the difference in water pressure between the condenser inlet and the condenser outlet. Obtain this information from the condenser manufacturer.
3. Estimate or calculate the pressure drop through all associated piping (PLOSS).
4. Subtract the PCOND and PLOSS from PIN. The result is PAVAIL.

FIG:3wy_prss_drp

Cooling Tower

Pump

Calculate the flow using the following formula:

Tons of Refrigeration x 30

P2 P1

Condenser

Valve

Flow = P P

FIG:flw_eqn

(Temp.Outlet – Temp.Inlet)

Flow Required

Note: If the outlet temperature is unknown, assume it to be 10F (6C) above the inlet temperature.

Determine refrigerant head pressure rise above the valve opening point (PRISE) using the following steps:
1. The Valve Closing Pressure (PCLOSE) is equal to the

Loss 2

Loss 1

Balancing Valve Bypass Line

PCOND= P1 – P2

LOSS

Loss 1 Loss 2

+ P

+ …

Available Water Pressure

PAVAIL= PIN – ( PCOND + PLOSS)

refrigerant pressure at the highest ambient temperature the refrigeration equipment experiences in the Off cycle. Use a Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected to find this pressure.

1. To approximate the Valve Opening Pressure (POPEN), add about 10 psig (0.7 bar) to the Valve Closing Pressure.

POPEN = PCLOSE +10 psi (0.7 bar)

FIG:eqn_opn_prssr

4. Select the proper valve size from the flowcharts by locating a point on a chart that satisfies the flow, the head pressure rise above opening point, and the pressure drop across the valve.

Metric Conversions

Use these equations to convert between U.S. and S.I. units.

- 1 dm3/s = 3.6 m3/h = 15.9 U.S. gal. /min. = 13.2 U.K. gal. /min.
- 1 bar = 100 kPa = 0.1 MPa  1.02 kg/cm2 = 0.987 atm  14.5 psig

Valve Opening Pressure

1. From the Pressure-Temperature Chart for the refrigerant selected, read the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure (PCOND) (operating head pressure) corresponding to the selected

condensing temperature.

1. Subtract the Valve Opening Pressure from the Refrigerant Condensing Pressure. This gives the head pressure rise.

Valves and Valve Accessories

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

V248 Flowcharts

The maximum recommended differential water pressure across a valve is 20 psig (1.4 bar).

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise (bar)

Flow (gpm) 18

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9

4.1

Pressure Drop Through Valve, psig (bar)

20 (1.4)

14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

3.4

Flow (m³/hr)

12 2.7

9 2.0

6 1.4

3 0.7

FIG:V248_0.5 in. graph

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1/2 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

0.0

Flow (gpm)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise (bar)

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9

20 (1.4)

Pressure Drop Through Valve, psig (bar)

14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

5.7

Flow (M³/hr)

20 4.5

15 3.4

10 2.3

5 1.1

FIG:V248_0.75 in. graph

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

3/4 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

0.0

Valves and Valve Accessories

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Flow 50 (gpm)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise (bar)

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9

11.4

Pressu

re Drop

20 (1.4)

Throug

psig

h Valve,

(bar)

14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

9.1

6.8

4.5

Flow (m³/hr)

10 2.3

FIG:V248_1.0 in. graph

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

0.0

Flow (gpm)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise (bar)

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9

15.9

Pressu

re Drop

20 (1.4)

Throug

psig

h Valve,

(bar)

14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

13.6

11.4

Flow (m³/hr)

40 9.1

30 6.8

20 4.5

10 2.3

FIG:V248_1.25 in. graph

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1-1/4 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

0.0

Flow (gpm)

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise (bar)

0.7 1.4 2.1 2.8 3.5 4.1 4.8 5.5 6.2 6.9

Pressu Throug

re Drop h Valve,

20 (1.4)

psig

(bar)

14.5 (1.0)

10 (0.7)

5 (0.3)

2 (0.1)

18.2

15.9

13.6

11.4

9.1

6.8

4.5

2.3

0.0

Flow (m³/hr)

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110

FIG:V248_1.5 in. graph

Refrigerant Head Pressure Above Opening PRise ( psig )

1-1/2 in. Direct Acting Valve Flowchart

Valves and Valve Accessories

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

Port 1

Port 2 C

Port 3

Plugged

Port 1

Port 2

Port 3

Plugged

V248 1/2 in. Through 1-1/4 in. Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

FIG:V248_thdd

FIG:V248_unbdy

V248 Union Sweat Connection Valves Dimensions

V248 1-1/2 in. Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

PORT 3

PORT 1

PORT 2

FIG:V248_3 way valve

Valves and Valve Accessories

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

V248 1/2 in. Through 1-1/4 in. Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

Valve Size	Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)
Valve Size	A	B	C	D	E	F
1/2 in.	3-1/16 (78)	2 (51)	8-11/16 (220)	3-13/16 (96)	1-1/2 (38)	3-3/8 (86)
3/4 in.	3-3/8 (86)	2-3/16 (55)	9-3/4 (248)	4-3/16 (106)	1-3/4 (44)	3-13/16 (98)
1 in.	4-3/4 (121)	2-13/16 (71)	12-1/2 (318)	5-15/16 (151)	2-1/16 (52)	4-1/2 (114)
1-1/4 in.	4-3/4 (121)	2-13/16 (71)	13-1/4 (336)	6-1/8 (156)	2-3/8 (60)	4-3/4 (121)

V248 Union Sweat Connection Valves Dimensions

Valve Size	Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)
Valve Size	A	B	C	D	E	F
3/4 in.	3-3/8 (86)	2-3/16 (55)	9-3/4 (248)	4-3/16 (106)	1-3/4 (44)	3-13/16 (98)
1 in.	4-3/4 (121)	2-13/16 (71)	12-1/2 (318)	5-15/16 (151)	2-1/16 (52)	4-1/2 (114)
1-1/4 in.	4-3/4 (121)	2-13/16 (71)	13-1/4 (336)	6-1/8 (156)	2-3/8 (60)	4-3/4 (121)

V248 1-1/2 in. Screw Connection Valves Dimensions

Valve Size	Dimensions in Inches (Millimeters)
Valve Size	A	B	C	D	E	F
1-1/2 in.	6 (152)	3-1/2 (89)	15-1/4 (382)	8 (203)	9-5/16 (237)	6-7/8 (175)

Valves and Valve Accessories

Materials

V248 Series Three-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants (Continued)

North American V248 Materials

Nominal Valve Size:		3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)	1 in. to 1-1/2 in. (Commercial)	Maritime (All Sizes)
Material		3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)	1 in. to 1-1/2 in. (Commercial)	Maritime (All Sizes)
Body		Cast brass	Cast iron/rust resisting finish	Cast bronze
Seat		Aluminum bronze	Aluminum bronze	Monel
Disc		BUNA-N	BUNA-N	BUNA-N
Disc Cup		Brass	Brass	Monel
Disc Stud		Brass	Brass	Monel
Stem/Extension Sleeve		Brass	Brass	Monel
Diaphragms		Nylon reinforced BUNA-N	Nylon reinforced BUNA-N	Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
Refrigerant Contact
Pressure Element	Cup	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel
	Bellows	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel
	Bellows Ring	Steel/nickel plated	Steel/nickel plated	Steel/nickel plated

European V248 Materials

Nominal Valve Size:		3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)	1 in. to 1-1/2 in. (Commercial)	Maritime (All Sizes)
Material		3/8 in. to 3/4 in. (Commercial)	1 in. to 1-1/2 in. (Commercial)	Maritime (All Sizes)
Body		Hot forged brass	Cast iron/rust resisting finish	Cast bronze
Seat		Aluminum bronze	Aluminum bronze	Monel
Disc		BUNA-N	BUNA-N	BUNA-N
Disc Cup		Brass	Brass	Monel
Disc Stud		Brass	Brass	Monel
Stem/Extension Sleeve		Brass	Brass	Monel
Diaphragms		Nylon reinforced BUNA-N	Nylon reinforced BUNA-N	Nylon reinforced BUNA-N
Refrigerant Contact
Pressure Element	Cup	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel
	Bellows	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel	300 Series stainless steel
	Bellows Ring	Steel/nickel plated	Steel/nickel plated	Steel/nickel plated

Technical Specifications

V248 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants
Maximum Working Pressure	630 psig (43.4 bar)
Factory-Set Opening Point (Port 1 to Port 2)	275 psig (19.0 bar)
Opening Point Adjustment Range (Port 1 to Port 2)	200 to 400 psi (13.8 to 27.6 bar)
Throttling Range	120 psi (8.3 bar) for 1/2 in. size 100 psi (6.9 bar) for 3/4 in., 1 in., and 1-1/4 in. sizes 140 psi (9.6 bar) for 1-1/2 in. size
Media	150 psig (10.3 bar) maximum, -4F to 170F (-20C to 77C) glycol/water or liquids with low freezing points that are compatible with valve materials

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1927340

STT Water Valve Renewal Kit for V46, V47, and V48 Series Valves

Description

These renewal kits include a seat, disc, diaphragms, and all additional internal parts required to recondition the valves.

Selection Chart

Valve Size (in.)	Commercial Kit		Monel Kit	Diaphragm Kits Only for All Types
Valve Size (in.)	For Series V46A, V46N, V47A, V47N Product Code Numbers	For Series V48 Product Code Numbers	For Series V46B, V46C, V47B, V47C Product Code Number	Diaphragm Kits Only for All Types
3/8	STT14A-600R	–	STT14A-601R	–
1/2	STT15A-602R	STT15A-605R	STT15A-603R	–
3/4	STT16A-601R	STT16A-604R	STT17A-613R	–
1	STT17A-609R	STT17A-616R	STT17A-611R	DPM17A-600R
1-1/4	STT17A-610R	STT17A-617R	STT17A-612R	DPM17A-600R
1-1/2	STT17A-610R	STT17A-604R	STT17A-612R	DPM17A-601R
2	STT18A-600R	–	STT18A-602R
2-1/2	STT18A-601R	–	STT18A-602R

Valves and Valve Accessories Code No. LIT-1900112

Companion Flanges and Gaskets for V43, V46, and V47 Series Valves

Description

Companion flanges and gaskets are sold individually or in kits. The kits contain two flange gaskets, two cast iron flanges with NPT (National Pipe Thread), eight hex nuts, and eight machine bolts.

Cast Iron Flange (Two)

Valve Size	Valve Series
Valve Size	V43 Series	V46 Series	V47 Series
Flange Gaskets (One gasket per package)
1-1/2 in.	—	246-423
2 in.		246-424
2-1/2 in.		246-425
Companion Flange Kits (See diagram)
1-1/2 in.	—	KIT14A-6121	KIT14A-612
2 in.	KIT14A-6131	KIT14A-6131	KIT14A-613
2-1/2 in.	KIT14A-6141	KIT14A-6141	KIT14A-614
3 in.	FLG15A-6001	—	—
4 in.	FLG15A-6011	—	—

Selection Chart

Flange

Gasket (Two)

Hex Nut (Eight)

Companion Flange Kit

Machine Bolt (Eight)

- 1. Commercial val ves only

Repair Information

If the Companion Flanges and Gaskets for V43, V46, and V47 Series Valves fail to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement flange or gasket, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

Relays and Transformers

Code No. LIT-1922175

Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Series Transformers

Description

The Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Series Transformers provide 24 VAC power for loads of 40 VA through 300 VA. These transformers are designed for use on digital controllers, gas controls, ignition systems, motor actuators, staging controls, and most other 24 VAC HVAC/R control systems.

The Y6x Series meets the requirements of UL 1585, UL 506, and CSA C22.2 No. 66,

providing compliance in both the United States and Canada. The Y63, Y64, Y65, and Y66 transformers are listed as Class 2 transformers (UL 1585, CSA C22.2 No. 66). The Y69 is listed as a general purpose transformer (UL 506, CSA C22.2 No. 66).

Refer to the Series Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Transformers Product Bulletin

(LIT-125755) for important product application information.

Features

- split-bobbin design provides best primary/secondary isolation
- multi-tap primaries reduce stocking requirements and offer application flexibility
- choice of foot, plate, or conduit hub mounting provides mounting flexibility
- choice of primary voltages meets a wide range of power requirements from 24 VAC through 480 VAC
- color-coded lead wires provide simplicity and standardization
- cULus listed or cURus recognized meets US and Canadian requirements for Class 2 transformers (Y63, Y64, Y65, and Y66) and general purpose transformers (Y69)
- built-in, easy-reset circuit breakers eliminate replacement time and cost caused by burn-out (Y63, Y64, Y66, and Y69)
- open frame Y65 models serve as ideal models when end bells are not required

Y65 Series Transformer

Repair Information

Do not make any field repairs to transformers. For a replacement transformer, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® distributor or sales representative.

Selection Chart

Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Series Transformers (Part 1 of 2)

Product Code Number	Primary Voltage VAC	Secondary Voltage VAC	Primary Connection	Secondary Connection	Mounting	Agency Requirement
40 VA Capacity Transformers with Energy Limiting Type Overload Protection
Y65G13-0	24	24	External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	External Fitting 30 in. secondary leads	Foot	cULus Class 2
Y65A13-0	120	24	External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	External Fitting 30 in. secondary leads	Foot	cULus Class 2
Y65A21-0	120	24	End bell holes 8 in. primary leads	Three screw terminals (one is blind)	4 in. x 4 in. plate	cULus Class 2
Y65T31-0	120/208/240	24	External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	Three screw terminals (one is blind)	Foot 4 in. x 4 in. plate1	cULus Class 2
Y65T42-0	120/208/240	24	Common External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	Common External Fitting 8 in. secondary leads	Hub 4 in. x 4 in. plate1	cURus Class 2
Y65T54-0	120/208/240	24	8 in. primary leads	8 in. secondary leads	Foot-skeleton	cURus Class 2
Y65S13-0	208/240	24	External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	External Fittings 30 in. secondary leads	Foot	cULus Class 2
Y65F13-0	277/480	24	External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	External Fitting 30 in. secondary leads	Foot	cULus Class 2
Y65F42-0	277/480	24	Common External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	Common External Fitting 8 in. secondary leads	Hub 4 in. x 4 in. plate1	cURus Class 2
50 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers
Y63T22-0	120/208/240	24	End bell Hole 8 in. primary leads	End bell Hole 8 in. secondary leads	4 in. x 4 in. plate	cURus Class 2
Y63T31-0	120/208/240	24	External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	Three screw terminals (one is blind)	Foot 4 in. x 4 in. plate1	cULus Class 2
Y63F22-0	277/480	24	End bell Hole 8 in. primary leads	End bell Hole 8 in. secondary leads	4 in. x 4 in. plate	cURus Class 2

Relays and Transformers

Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Series Transformers (Continued)

Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, and Y69 Series Transformers (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code Number	Primary Voltage VAC	Secondary Voltage VAC	Primary Connection	Secondary Connection	Mounting	Agency Requirement
75 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers
Y66T12-0	120/208/240	24	Common External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	Common External Fitting 8 in. secondary leads	Foot	cURus Class 2
Y66T13-0	120/208/240	24	External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	External Fitting 30 in. secondary leads	Foot	cULus Class 2
Y66F12-0	277/480	24	Common External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	Common External Fitting 8 in. secondary leads	Foot	cURus Class 2
Y66F13-0	277/480	24	External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	External Fitting 30 in. secondary leads	Foot	cULus Class 2
92 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers
Y64T15-0	120/208/240	24	External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	Internal Fitting 30 in. secondary leads	Foot	cULus Class 2
Y64T21-0	120/208/240	24	End bell holes 8 in. primary leads	Three screw terminals (one is blind)	Plate	cULus Class 2
Y64T22-0	120/208/240	24	End bell Hole 8 in. primary leads	End bell Hole 8 in. secondary leads	Plate	cURus Class 2
300 VA Capacity Transformers with Circuit Breakers
Y69T15-0	120/208/240	24	External Fitting 8 in. primary leads	Internal Fitting 30 in. secondary leads	Foot	cULus Power Transformer

1. 4 in. x 4 in. plate and nut packed with transformer.

Technical Specifications

Series Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66, Y69 Transformers
Input Power Requirements	24 to 480 VAC at 60 Hz
Full Load Secondary Voltage	23.5 VAC (Nominal)
Open Circuit Secondary Voltage (No Load)	27.0 VAC (Nominal)
Full Load Secondary VA Rating	Series Y63 Y64 Y65 Y66 Y69	Volt-Amperes 50 VA 92 VA 40 VA 75 VA 300 VA
Finish	End bells, frame, feet, and mounting plates are corrosion resistant
Ambient Operating Temperature	-40 to 104°F (-40 to 40°C)
Ambient Storage Temperature	-40 to 140°F (-40 to 60°C)
Shipping Weight	Y63 Y64 Y65 Y66 Y69	3.0 lb/1.4 kg 4.0 lb/1.8 kg 2.0 lb/0.9 kg 3.0 lb/1.4 kg 11.0 lb/5.0 kg
Agency Compliance	UL Listed Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66; File E95575, CCN’s XOKV (US) and XOKV7 (Canada) UL Recognized Y63, Y64, Y65, Y66; File E95575, CCN’s XOKV2 (US) and XOKV8 (Canada) UL Listed Y69; File E95138, CCN’s XPTQ (US) and XPTQ7 (Canada) All transformers are Class 2 except the Y69 (300 VA), which is listed as a power transformer.

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900549

System 450™ Series Modular Controls

Description

System 450™ is a family of modular, digital electronic controls that is easily assembled and set up to provide reliable temperature, pressure, and humidity control for a wide variety of HVAC/R applications, commercial process applications, and industrial process applications.

The System 450 control system is designed to replace System 350™ and System 27 control systems, and to provide many additional features and benefits with fewer than twenty model variations.

System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable

out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.

System 450 Control Modules with Communications enable you to connect System 450 control systems to Modbus® or Ethernet networks for remote monitoring and setup. The Modbus communications control module is an RS485, RTU-compliant slave device. The Ethernet communications control module has an integral web server that can deliver web pages by means of a direct connection, on your LAN, or across the Internet.

System 450 Reset Control Modules provide many of the features of the standard models for temperature and humidity control. In addition, these modules provide setpoint reset, real-time setback scheduling, and run-time balancing (equal run time) capability.

The System 450 Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output has a single self-selecting analog output to optimize and extend the controlled speed range of variable speed electronically commutated (EC) motors.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information.

- System 450™ Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
- System 450™ Series Modular Control Systems with Standard Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011459)
System 450™ Series Modular Control Systems with Reset Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011842)
System 450™ Series Modular Control Systems with Communications Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011826)

Features

durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with

plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall mount capability eliminate field wiring between modules and allow you to quickly and easily design, assemble, install, and upgrade your control systems.

versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
control Modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your

System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.

System 450 Control System with a Control, Power, and Expansion Module

multipurpose, all-in-one control modules enable simple

stand-alone, single-module control systems that are temperature, pressure, and humidity capable out of the box and easy to set up in the field to replace a wide variety of OEM HVAC/R and process controls.

an extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors, and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
high input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.
differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.

The Reset Control modules have additional features:

adjustable minimum and maximum setpoint temperatures (reset control modules only) enable compliance with the manufacturer’s specifications for your controlled HVAC/R and process equipment.
selectable shutdown-high and shutdown-low temperature settings (reset control modules only) saves you energy by shutting down controlled equipment when the ambient temperature either rises or drops to a point where heating or cooling is no longer required.
real time clock and adjustable setback temperature (reset control modules only) save you energy by setting back heating, cooling, or humidity setpoints during scheduled unoccupied periods (24-hour day, 7-day week schedule).
user-defined reset control capability (reset control modules only) saves you energy in a wide variety of temperature and humidity reset control applications by adjusting the temperature or humidity control loop, based on changes in ambient outdoor temperature or other uncontrolled condition.

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Modular Controls (Continued)

The Control Modules with Communications have additional features:

Ethernet communication capability through a built-in web server (Ethernet Control Modules only) allows you to monitor your control system status and set up or change the parameters by means of a direct Ethernet cable connection, through a LAN connection, or over the Internet. The built in web server delivers user-friendly web pages to client browsers on a desktop, laptop, tablet, or smart device.
The Web page server on Ethernet communication modules provides a simple, intuitive web interface for easy remote monitoring, setup, adjustment and remote monitoring of your control systems across Ethernet networks.
RS485, RTU-compliant Modbus® network communication capability (Modbus control modules only) enables a head-end RS485 Modbus master controller to read and write control system status and setup parameters to the System 450 Modbus communication control module.
Password protection for local access (Ethernet and Modbus control modules only) and password protection for remote access (Ethernet control module only) deters unauthorized changes to the control system settings, but allows local and remote monitoring of your control system status.
Analog output signal limiting features (communication control modules only) allow you to select the rate and condition range at which the control updates the analog output signal, potentially reducing wear on the controlled equipment.
Binary input with time delay (communication control modules only) allows you to use an external set of dry contacts and selectable time delays to control relay outputs.

Applications

You can create a wide variety of custom, application-specific control systems with System 450 modules. The following are some common control application examples:

Temperature control
Pressure control
Humidity control
Multipurpose control
Reset and setback control
High input-signal selection
Differential control

Temperature Control

Temperature monitoring and alarming
On/Off staged control of boilers and chillers
Proportional stage control of boilers and chillers
Boiler and chiller pump control
Heating and cooling control with deadband
Floating temperature control of damper and valve actuators
Cooling tower fan speed/stage control based on water temperature
Supply, make-up, and mixed air temperature control
Temperature actuated valve control
Supply and make-up air damper and fan control
Condenser fan staging or speed control based on condenser temperature

Refrigerant Pressure Control

Condenser fan cycling and stage control
Multispeed condenser fan control
Floating pressure control of damper and valve actuators
Condenser fan speed and damper control
High and low pressure cutout control
Staged compressor control
Cooling tower fan speed control based on high-side pressure
Direct speed control of electronically commutated (EC) condenser fan motors (C450CPW-100 model)

Other Pressure Control

Relief damper and fan control for building pressurization
Constant static pressure control

Humidity Control

On/Off humidification and dehumidification control
Proportional humidification and dehumidification control
Multistage humidification and dehumidification control
Humidity monitoring and alarming

Multipurpose Control

Temperature and pressure based refrigeration rack control
Temperature and humidity control of wine cellars and greenhouses
Temperature, humidity, and static pressure control of clean rooms and greenhouses
Dehumidification with reheat control

Reset Control

Boiler supply water temperature reset control based on outside air temperature
Chiller supply water temperature reset control based on outside air temperature
VAV zone temperature control based on outside air temperature
Humidity reset based on outside air temperature
Staged applications with runtime balancing
Real-time Occupied/Unoccupied Setback

High Input Signal Selection

Pressure-based fan speed or fan cycling control on multi-circuit condensers
Temperature-based fan speed or fan cycling control on multi-circuit condensers

Differential Control

Air and fluid pump-flow monitoring and alarming
Air and fluid filter status monitoring and alarming
Chiller barrel flow monitoring, control, and alarming
Solar air and water heating applications

Note: Communications modules add network communication to any application of your choosing, except those requiring reset, setback, or EC motor control.

Repair Information

If a System 450 module fails to operate within its specifications, replace the module. For a replacement module, contact your Johnson Controls® representative.

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Modular Controls (Continued)

System 450 Control Module Capabilities

Control by	System 450 Control Modules
	Standard	Communications	Reset	Hybrid
	C450CPN-3C C450CQN-3C C450CBN-3C C450CCN-3C	C450CEN-1C C450CRN-1C	C450RBN-3C C450RCN-3C	C450CPW-100C
Controlled Condition
Temperature				
Pressure			–	
Humidity				
Combination of Conditions				
Control Capabilities
On/Off Relay Control				
Analog Proportional Control (Direct and Reverse Action)				
Analog Proportional Plus Integral Control (Direct and Reverse Action)				
Combination of On/Off Relay and Analog Output Control				
Stand-Alone Control		–		
Multi-Stage Control (Relay or Analog)				
Network Communications	–		–	–
High Input Signal Selection			–	
Differential Control			–	
Output Signal Limiting Output Signal Update Rate Output Signal Deadband	–		–	–
Binary Input Control for Relay Outputs	–		–	–
On/Off Duration Time Control	–		–	–
Temperature and Humidity Reset Control	–	–		–
Scheduling and Temperature Setback Control	–	–		–
Reset Setpoint Control	–	–		–
Setback Scheduling	–	–		–
Run-Time Balancing	–	–		–
Hybrid Analog Output Control	–	–	–	1

1. Only on output OUTA1.

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Modular Controls (Continued)

Selection Charts

System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code Number	Product Description
C450CBN-3C	Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Relay Output; provides one relay output (SPDT line-voltage relay) for SPDT control.
C450CCN-3C	Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Relay Output; provides two relay outputs (SPDT line-voltage relays) for SPDT control.
C450CEN-1C	Control Module with Ethernet Communications, LCD, and Four-Button Touchpad UI. (No onboard outputs available on control modules with network communications capabilities.)
C450CPN-3C	Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Analog Output; provides one analog output (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signal) for proportional control.
C450CPW-100C	Hybrid Analog Output Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, Hybrid Analog Output and Optional High Input Signal Select; provides one hybrid analog output and optional high input signal select primarily used for variable-speed EC motor speed control. Only Analog Output 1 (OUTA1) can be configured as a hybrid analog output and/or use the High Input Signal Selection feature. These features are not available for any of the other outputs in a System 450 control system that uses the C450CPW-100C as the control module.
C450CQN-3C	Standard Control Module with LCD and Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Analog Output; provides two analog outputs (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signals) for proportional control.
C450CRN-1C	Control Module with RS485 Modbus Communications, LCD, and Four-Button Touchpad UI. (No onboard outputs available on control modules with network communications capabilities.)
C450RBN-3C	Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides one SPDT output relay. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module.
C450RCN-3C	Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides two SPDT output relays. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module.
C450SBN-3C	Relay Output Expansion Module; provides one SPDT line-voltage relay output.
C450SCN-3C	Relay Output Expansion Module; provides two SPDT line-voltage relay outputs.
C450SPN-1C	Analog Output Expansion Module; provides one analog output (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signal) for proportional control.
C450SQN-1C	Analog Output Expansion Module; provides two analog outputs (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signals) for proportional control.
C450YNN-1C	Power Module; provides 24 V to System 450 Module Assembly; 120 VAC or 240 VAC supply power input terminals.
BKT287-1R	DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long
BKT287-2R	DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long
BKT287-3R	DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long
BKT287-4R	DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long
PLT344-1R	DIN Rail End Clamps (2 clamps)
WHA-C450-100C	System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

System 450 Compatible A99B Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information1 (Part 1 of 2)

Product Code Number	Product Description
A99BA-200C	PTC Silicon Sensor with Shielded Cable; Cable Length 2 m (6-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BB-25C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 0.25 m (9-3/4 in.); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BB-200C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 2 m (6-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BB-300C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 3 m (9-3/4 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BB-500C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 5 m (16-3/8 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BB-600C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 6 m (19-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BC-25C	PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 0.25 m (9-3/4 in.); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.
A99BC-300C	PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 3 m (9-3/4 ft) Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.
A99BC-1500C	PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 15 m (49 ft) Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.
BOX10A-600R	PVC Enclosure for A99 Sensor; Includes Wire Nuts and Conduit Connector (for Outdoor Sensor)

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Modular Controls (Continued)

System 450 Compatible A99B Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information1 (Part 2 of 2)

Product Code Number	Product Description
WEL11A-601R	Immersion Well for A99 Sensor Liquid Sensing Applications
A99-CLP-1	Mounting Clip for A99 Temperature Sensor
ADP11A-600R	Conduit Adaptor, 1/2 in. Snap-Fit EMT Conduit Adaptor (box of 10)
TE-6001-1	Duct Mounting Hardware with Handy Box for A99 Sensor
TE-6001-11	Duct Mounting Hardware without Handy Box for A99 Sensor
SHL10A-603R	Sun Shield (for Use with Outside A99 Sensors in Sunny Locations)

1. Refer to the A99B Series Temperature Sensors Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-125186) on the Johnson Controls® Product Literature website for more information.

System 450 Compatible TE-6000 Series 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code

Number

Product Description

TE-6000-x

TE6000 Series 1,000 ohm at 70F nickel temperature sensors (only). Only the TE-6000-6 sensor can be used for the entire HIC and HIF

temperature range. Different sensing element packages are available for various applications. For a complete list of compatible 1,000 ohm nickel sensors, including sensor descriptions, technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the

TE-6000 Series Temperature Sensing Elements Product Bulletin (LIT-216288). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

System 450 Compatible TE-6300 Series 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code

Number

Product Description

TE-631xx-x

TE6300 Series 1,000 ohm at 70F nickel averaging and 1,000 ohm thin-film nickel temperature sensors (only). For a complete list of

compatible 1,000 ohm nickel averaging and thin-film nickel sensors, including sensor descriptions, technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216320). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

System 450 Compatible TE-68NT-0N00S 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensor Ordering Information

Product Code

Number

Product Description

TE-68NT-0N00S

TE6800 Series 1,000 ohm nickel temperature sensor for wall-mount applications. For more information, including sensor description,

technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the TE-6800 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-12011542). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

System 450 Compatible HE67S3 Type Humidity Sensors with Integral A99B Temperature Sensor Ordering Information1

Product Code

Number

Product Description

HE-67S3-0N0BT

Wall Mount Humidity Sensor with A99B Type Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90% RH; 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)

HE-67S3-0N00P

Duct Mount Humidity Sensor with A99B Type Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90% RH; 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)

1. The HE-67S3 sensors require 24 VAC input and must use the 0–5 VDC output. Refer to the TrueRH Series HE-67xx Humidity Element with Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216245) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information, including technical specifications and mounting accessories.

System 450 Compatible HE6800 Series Humidity Transmitters with Temperature Sensor Ordering Information1

Product Code

Number

Product Description

HE-68N2-0N00WS

Wall Mount Humidity Transmitter with Nickel Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90 ±2% RH; 0 to 55C (32 to 131F)

HE-68N3-0N00WS

Wall Mount Humidity Transmitter with Nickel Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90 ±3% RH; 0 to 55C (32 to 131F)

1. The HE-6800 transmitters require 24 VAC input and must use the 0–5 VDC output. Refer to the HE-6800 Series Humidity Transmitters with Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin (LIT-12011625) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information, including technical specifications and mounting accessories.

System 450 Compatible Low Pressure Differential Transducer Ordering Information1 2

Product Code Number	Product Description
DPT2650-R25B-AB	Low Pressure Differential Transducer: -0.25 to 0.25 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 0.25)3
DPT2650-0R5D-AB	Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 0.5 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 0.5)
DPT2650-2R5D-AB	Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 2.5 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 2.5)
DPT2650-005D-AB	Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 5.0 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 5)
DPT2650-10D-AB	Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 10 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 10)

Refer to the Setra Systems Model DPT265 Very Low Differential Pressure Transducer Catalog Page on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.
The DPT265 sensors require 24 VAC input and must use the 0–5 VDC output. Refer to the Setra Systems Model DPT265 Very Low Differential Pressure Transducer Catalog Page on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.
Used only with Communications Control Modules.

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Modular Controls (Continued)

System 450 Compatible P499 Series Transducers with 1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread with Depressor (Style 47) Ordering Information1

Product Code Number	Product Description
P499RCP-401C	-1 to 8 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-402C	-1 to 15 bar; order WH A-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-404C	0 to 30 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-405C	0 to 50 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCPS100C	-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCPS100K	-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RCPS102C	0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCPS102K	0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RCP-101C	0 to 100 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-101K	0 to 100 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RCP-105C	0 to 500 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-105K	0 to 500 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RCP-107C	0 to 750 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-107K	0 to 750 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

1. The P499 sensors must be powered with the +5 VDC and C terminals and the output is 0.5 to 4.5 VDC. Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.

System 450 Compatible P499 Series Transducers with 1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49) Ordering Information1

Product Code Number	Product Description
P499RAPS100C	-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAPS100K	-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RAPS102C	0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAPS102K	0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RAP-101C	0 to 100 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAP-101K	0 to 100 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RAP-102C	0 to 200 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAP-105C	0 to 500 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAP-105K	0 to 500 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RAP-107C	0 to 750 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAP-107K	0 to 750 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

WHA-PKD3 Wire Harnesses Ordering Information1

Product Code Number	Product Description
WHA-PKD3-200C	Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 2.0 m (6-1/2 ft) cable
WHA-PKD3-400C	Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 4.0 m (13 ft) cable
WHA-PKD3-600C	Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 6.0 m (19-5/8 ft) cable

1. Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.

Technical Specifications

C450CPN-3C and C450CQN-3C Control Modules with Analog Output (Part 1 of 2)
Product	C450CPN-3C and C450CQN-3C: System 450 Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT analog output C450CPN-3C: Control Module with one analog output C450CQN-3C: Control Module with two analog outputs
Power Consumption	C450CPN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 1.5 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out C450CQN-3C: 2.0 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 2.4 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Modular Controls (Continued)

C450CPN-3C and C450CQN-3C Control Modules with Analog Output (Part 2 of 2)
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 0–10 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 4–20 mA outputs Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors
Analog Output	Voltage Mode (0–10 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that fall below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.
Analog Output	Current Mode (4–20 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedance less than 300 ohms. Devices that rise above 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 14 bits
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450CPN-3C: 195 g (0.43 lb) C450CQN-3C: 195 g (0.43 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

C450CEN-1C Control Module with Ethernet Communications
Product	C450CEN: System 450 control modules are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD and four-button touchpad UI, Ethernet communications capability, and no outputs. C450CEN-1C: Control module with Ethernet communications capability
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC; 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for an A99 PTC Temperature Sensor
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 16 bits
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 63 x 63 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450CEN-1C: 207 g (0.46 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive; Low Voltage Directive; CISPR22, class B.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Modular Controls (Continued)

C450CRN-1C Control Module with RS485 Modbus Communications
Product	C450CRN-1C: System 450 control modules are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD and four-button touchpad UI and no outputs. This control module is an RS485, RTU compliant Modbus slave device.
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC; 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for an A99 PTC Temperature Sensor
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 16 bits
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 63 x 63 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450CRN-1C: 207 g (0.46 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734: FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive; Low Voltage Directive; CISPR22, class B
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

C450CPW-100C Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output (Part 1 of 2)
Product	C450CPW-100C System 450 control module is a sensing control and operating control with LCD, four-button touchpad, and analog output with pulse-width modulation capability.
Power Consumption	C450CPW-100C: 1.3 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 1.5 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 0 to 10 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 4 to 20 mA outputs Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors
Analog Output	Voltage Mode (0–10 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that fall below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.
Analog Output	Current Mode (4–20 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedance less than 300 ohms. Devices that rise above 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 14 bits
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450CPW-100C: 195 g (0.43 lb)

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Modular Controls (Continued)

C450CPW-100C Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output (Part 2 of 2)

Compliance

North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734;

FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B

Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits

Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements

and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.

Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

C450CBN-3C and C450CCN-3C Control Modules with Relay Output
Product	C450CBN-3C and C450CCN-3C: System 450 Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT relay output C450CBN-3C: Control Module with one SPDT output relay C450CCN-3C: Control Module with two SPDT output relays
Power Consumption	C450CBN-3C: 0.9 VA maximum C450CCN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors
Output Relay Contacts	General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT
Output Relay Contacts	Specific: AC Motor Ratings 120 VAC 208/240 VAC AC Full-load Amperes: 9.8 A 4.9 A Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A 29.4 A 10 Amperes AC Non-inductive at 24/240 VAC Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 14 bits
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450CBN-3C: 209 g (0.46 lb) C450CCN-3C: 222 g (0.49 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B; Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

C450RBN-3C and C450RCN-3C Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output (Part 1 of 2)
Product	C450RBN-3C and C450RCN-3C: System 450 Reset Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT relay output C450RBN-3C: Control Module with one SPDT output relay C450RCN-3C: Control Module with two SPDT output relays
Power Consumption	C450RBN-3C: 0.9 VA maximum C450RCN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Modular Controls (Continued)

C450RBN-3C and C450RCN-3C Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output (Part 2 of 2)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors
Output Relay Contacts	General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT
Output Relay Contacts	Specific: AC Motor Ratings 120 VAC 208/240 VAC AC Full-load Amperes: 9.8 A 4.9 A AC Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A 29.4 A 10 Amperes AC Non-inductive at 24/240 VAC Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC
Clock Accuracy	±4 minutes per year
Clock Backup Power	12 hours (capacitor reserve)
Setback Events	One occupied and one unoccupied event per day; 7 day schedule
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 14 bits
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450RBN-3C: 209 g (0.46 lb) C450RCN-3C: 222 g (0.49 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B; Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

C450SPN-1C and C450SQN-1C Expansion Modules with Analog Output
Product	C450SPN-1C: System 450 Expansion Module with one Analog output C450SQN-1C: System 450 Expansion Module with two Analog outputs
Power Consumption	C450SPN-1C: 1.1 VA max using 0 to 10 V out; 1.3 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out C450SQN-1C: 1.8 VA max using 0 to 10 V out; 2.2 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 0 to 10 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 4 to 20 mA outputs Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Analog Output	Voltage Mode (0 to 10 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that drop below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.
Analog Output	Current Mode (4 to 20 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedances less than 300 ohms. Devices that exceed 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450SPN-1C: 150 g (0.33 lb) C450SQN-1C: 150 g (0.33 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc., declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the Low Voltage Directive and the EMC Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Modular Controls (Continued)

C450SBN-3C and C450SCN-3C Expansion Modules with Relay Output
Product	C450SBN-3C: System 450 Expansion Module with one SPDT output relay C450SCN-3C: System 450 Expansion Module with two SPDT output relays
Power Consumption	C450SBN-3C: 0.8 VA maximum C450SCN-3C: 1.2 VA maximum
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Output Relay Contacts	General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT
Output Relay Contacts	Specific: AC Motor Ratings 120 VAC 208/240 VAC AC Full-Load Amperes: 9.8 A 4.9 A AC Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A 29.4 A 10 Amperes AC Noninductive at 24/240 VAC Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450SBN-3C: 172 g (0.38 lb) C450SCN-3C: 186 g (0.41 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module
Product	C450YNN-1C: System 450 Power Supply Module; 120 or 240 VAC stepdown to 24 VAC Class 2 (North America) or SELV (Europe)
Supply Power	110/120 VAC or 220/240 VAC at 50/60 Hz (100 mA maximum)
Secondary Power	24 VAC, 10 VA
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450YNN-1C: 390 gm (0.86 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734: FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT- 1900861

System 450™ Series Control Module with Network Communications

Description

The System 450 control system is designed to replace System 350™ and System 27 control systems and to provide many additional features and benefits with fewer than twenty model variations.

System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable

out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.

A single C450 control module can be set up as a stand-alone control or connected to expansion modules to control up to ten On/Off relay and proportional analog outputs, based on any of the three available inputs.

System 450 Control Modules with Communications enable you to connect System 450 control systems to Modbus® or Ethernet networks for remote monitoring and setup. The Modbus communications control module is an RS485, RTU-compliant slave device. The Ethernet communications control module has an integral web server that can deliver web pages through a direct connection, on your LAN, or across the Internet.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information, as well as detailed information on designing, installing, setting up, and troubleshooting:

System 450™ Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
System 450™ Series Modular Control Systems with Communications Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011826)
System 450™ Series Control Module with RS485 Modbus® Communications Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2926)
System 450™ Series Control Module with Ethernet Communications Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2934)

Features

Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with plug-together connectors and DIN rail or direct wall mount capability eliminate field wiring between modules and allow you to quickly and

easily design, assemble, install, and upgrade your control systems.

Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
Control modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your

System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.

An extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors, and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
High input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.

C450CEN Control Module with Communication

Differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.
Ethernet communication capability through a built-in web server (Ethernet control modules only) allows you to monitor your control system status and set up or change the parameters by means of a direct Ethernet cable connection, through a LAN connection, or over the Internet. The built in web server delivers user-friendly web pages to client browsers on a desktop, laptop, tablet, or smart device.
The web page server on Ethernet communication modules provides a simple, intuitive web interface for easy remote monitoring, setup, adjustment and remote monitoring of your control systems across Ethernet networks.
RS485, RTU-compliant Modbus® network communication capability (Modbus control modules only) enables a head-end RS485 Modbus master controller to read and write control system status and setup parameters to the System 450 Modbus communication control module.
Password protection for local access (Ethernet and Modbus control modules only) and password protection for remote access (Ethernet control module only) deters unauthorized changes to the control system settings, but allows local and remote monitoring of your control system status.
Analog output signal limiting features (communication control modules only) allow you to select the rate and condition range at which the control updates the analog output signal, potentially reducing wear on the controlled equipment.
Binary input with time delay (communication control modules only) allows you to use an external set of dry contacts and selectable time delays to control relay outputs.

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Control Module with Network Communications (Continued)

Selection Chart

Refer to the System 450 Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories Catalog Page (LIT-1900662) for temperature sensors, humidity sensors, and pressure transducers compatible with the System 450 Control Modules.

Communications System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code Number	Product Description
C450CEN-1C	Control Module with Ethernet Communications, LCD, and Four-Button Touchpad UI. (No onboard outputs available on control modules with network communications capabilities.)
C450CRN-1C	Control Module with RS485 Modbus Communications, LCD, and Four-Button Touchpad UI. (No onboard outputs available on control modules with network communications capabilities.)
BKT287-1R	DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long
BKT287-2R	DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long
BKT287-3R	DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long
BKT287-4R	DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long
PLT344-1R	DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)
WHA-C450-100C	System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

Repair Information

If the System 450™ Control Module with Ethernet or RS485 Modbus Communication fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450™ Control Module, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

Technical Specifications

C450CEN-1C Control Module with Ethernet Communications
Product	C450CEN: System 450 control modules are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD and four-button touchpad UI, Ethernet communications capability, and no outputs. C450CEN-1C: Control module with Ethernet communications capability
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC; 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for an A99 PTC Temperature Sensor
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 16 bits
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 63 x 63 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450CEN-1C: 207 g (0.46 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive; Low Voltage Directive; CISPR22, class B.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Series Control Module with Network Communications (Continued)

C450CRN-1C Control Module with RS485 Modbus Communications
Product	C450CRN-1C: System 450 control modules are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD and four-button touchpad UI and no outputs. This control module is an RS485, RTU compliant Modbus slave device.
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC; 1,035 ohm at 25C (77F) for an A99 PTC Temperature Sensor
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 16 bit
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 63 x 63 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450CRN-1C: 207 g (0.46 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734: FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive; Low Voltage Directive; CISPR22, class B
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900658

System 450™ Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output

Description

The System 450 control system is designed to replace System 350™ and System 27 control systems, and to provide many additional features and benefits with fewer than twenty model variations.

System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable

out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information:

System 450™ Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
System 450™ Series Modular Control Systems with Reset Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011842)
System 450™ Series Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2888)

Features

Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with

Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
Control Modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your

System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.

Multipurpose, all-in-one control modules enable simple stand-alone, single-module control systems that are temperature, pressure, and humidity capable out of the box and easy to set up in the field to replace a wide variety of OEM HVAC/R and process controls.
An extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors, and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
High input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.

C450RCN-3 Reset Control Module with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output

Differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.

Reset Control Features

Adjustable minimum and maximum setpoint temperatures (reset control modules only) enable compliance with the manufacturer’s specifications for your controlled HVAC/R and process equipment.
Selectable shutdown-high and shutdown-low temperature settings (reset control modules only) saves you energy by shutting down controlled equipment when the ambient temperature either rises or drops to a point where heating or cooling is no longer required.
Real time clock and adjustable setback temperature (reset control modules only) save you energy by setting back heating, cooling, or humidity setpoints during scheduled unoccupied periods (24-hour day, 7-day week schedule).
User-defined reset control capability (reset control modules only) saves you energy in a wide variety of temperature and humidity reset control applications by adjusting the temperature or humidity control loop, based on changes in ambient outdoor temperature or other uncontrolled condition.

Repair Information

If the System 450 Reset Control Module fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450 Reset Control Module, contact the nearest Johnson Controls® representative.

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output (Continued)

Selection Chart

Refer to the System 450 Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories Catalog Page (LIT-1900662) for temperature sensors and humidity sensors compatible with the System 450 Reset Control Modules. Reset Control Modules control temperature and humidity, but not pressure.

Reset System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code Number	Product Description
C450RBN-3C	Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides one SPDT output relay. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module.
C450RCN-3C	Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides two SPDT output relays. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module.
BKT287-1R	DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long
BKT287-2R	DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long
BKT287-3R	DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long
BKT287-4R	DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long
PLT344-1R	DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)
WHA-C450-100C	System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

Technical Specifications

C450RBN-3C and C450RCN-3C Reset Control Modules with Real-Time Clock and Relay Output
Product	C450RBN-3C and C450RCN-3C: System 450 Reset Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT relay output C450RBN-3C: Control Module with one SPDT output relay C450RCN-3C: Control Module with two SPDT output relays
Power Consumption	C450RBN-3C: 0.9 VA maximum C450RCN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors
Output Relay Contacts	General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT
Output Relay Contacts	Specific: AC Motor Ratings 120 VAC 208/240 VAC AC Full-load Amperes: 9.8 A 4.9 A AC Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A 29.4 A 10 Amperes AC Non-inductive at 24/240 VAC Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC
Clock Accuracy	±4 minutes per year
Clock Backup Power	12 hours (capacitor reserve)
Setback Events	One occupied and one unoccupied event per day; 7 day schedule
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 14 bits
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450RBN-3C: 209 g (0.46 lb) C450RCN-3C: 222 g (0.49 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B; Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900656

System 450™ Control Modules with Analog Output

Description

The System 450 control system is designed to replace System 350™ and System 27 control systems, and to provide many additional features and benefits with fewer than twenty model variations.

System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information:

System 450™ Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
System 450™ Series Modular Control Systems with Standard Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011459)
System 450™ Series Control Modules with Analog Outputs Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2853)

Features

Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with

Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
Control Modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your

System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.

Selection Chart

C450CPN-3C Control Module with Analog Output

Multipurpose, all-in-one control modules enable simple

An extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors, and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
High input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.
Differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.

Repair Information

If the System 450™ Control Module with Analog Outputs fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450™ Control Module with Analog Outputs, contact your Johnson Controls® representative.

Standard System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code Number	Product Description
C450CPN-3C	Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Analog Output; provides one analog output (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signal) for proportional control.
C450CQN-3C	Standard Control Module with LCD and Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Analog Output; provides two analog outputs (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signals) for proportional control.
BKT287-1R	DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long
BKT287-2R	DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long
BKT287-3R	DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long
BKT287-4R	DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long
PLT344-1R	DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)
WHA-C450-100C	System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Control Modules with Analog Output (Continued)

Technical Specifications

C450CPN-3C and C450CQN-3C Control Modules with Analog Output
Product	C450CPN-3C and C450CQN-3C: System 450 Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT analog output C450CPN-3C: Control Module with one analog output C450CQN-3C: Control Module with two analog outputs
Power Consumption	C450CPN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 1.5 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out C450CQN-3C: 2.0 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 2.4 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 0 to 10 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 4 to 20 mA outputs Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors
Analog Output	Voltage Mode (0–10 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that fall below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.
Analog Output	Current Mode (4–20 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedance less than 300 ohms. Devices that rise above 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 14 bits
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450CPN-3C: 195 g (0.43 lb) C450CQN-3C: 195 g (0.43 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900657

System 450™ Control Modules with Relay Output

Description

The System 450 control system is designed to replace System 350™ and System 27 control systems, and to provide many additional features and benefits with fewer than twenty model variations.

System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information:

System 450™ Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
System 450™ Series Modular Control Systems with Standard Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011459)
System 450™ Series Control Modules with Relay Outputs Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2896)

Features

Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with

Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
Control Modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your

System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.

Selection Chart

C450CCN-3C Control Module with Relay Output

Multipurpose, all-in-one control modules enable simple stand-alone, single-module control systems that are temperature, pressure, and humidity capable out of the box and are easy to set up in the field to replace a wide variety of OEM HVAC/R and process controls.
An extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
High input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.
Differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.

Repair Information

If the System 450™ Control Module with Relay Outputs fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450™ Control Module with Relay Outputs, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

Standard System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code Number	Product Description
C450CBN-3C	Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Relay Output; provides one relay output (SPDT line-voltage relay) for SPDT control.
C450CCN-3C	Standard Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and Relay Output; provides two relay outputs (SPDT line-voltage relays) for SPDT control.
BKT287-1R	DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long
BKT287-2R	DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long
BKT287-3R	DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long
BKT287-4R	DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long
PLT344-1R	DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)
WHA-C450-100C	System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Control Modules with Relay Output (Continued)

Technical Specifications

C450CBN-3C and C450CCN-3C Control Modules with Relay Output
Product	C450CBN-3C and C450CCN-3C: System 450 Control Module models are sensing controls and operating controls with LCD, four-button touchpad, and SPDT relay output C450CBN-3C: Control Module with one SPDT output relay C450CCN-3C: Control Module with two SPDT output relays
Power Consumption	C450CBN-3C: 0.9 VA maximum C450CCN-3C: 1.3 VA maximum
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors
Output Relay Contacts	General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT
Output Relay Contacts	Specific: AC Motor Ratings 120 VAC 208/240 VAC AC Full-load Amperes: 9.8 A 4.9 A Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A 29.4 A 10 Amperes AC Non-inductive at 24/240 VAC Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 14 bits
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450CBN-3C: 209 g (0.46 lb) C450CCN-3C: 222 g (0.49 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B; Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900806

System 450™ Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output

Description

System 450 control modules provide a field-configurable out-of-the-box solution. Most System 450 control modules can control temperature, pressure, and humidity systems simultaneously.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information:

System 450™ Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
System 450™ Series Modular Control Systems with Standard Control Modules Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011459)
System 450™ Series Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output and High Input Signal Selection Installation Instructions

(Part No. 24-7664-2802)

Features

Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with

Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.
Control Modules with bright backlit LCDs and four-button touch pad user interfaces provide quick, clear, visual status of your

System 450 control system inputs and outputs with the touch of a button and enable you to quickly and easily set up and adjust your control system.

Multipurpose, all-in-one control modules enable simple stand-alone, single-module control systems that are temperature, pressure, and humidity capable out of the box and easy to set up in the field to replace a wide variety of OEM HVAC/R and process controls.

C450CPW-100 Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output

An extensive suite of compatible temperature and humidity sensors, and pressure transducers allows you to monitor and control a wide range of HVAC/R and process conditions in a variety of standard and global units of measurement.
High input signal selection enables your control system to monitor a temperature, pressure, or humidity condition with two or three sensors (of the same type) and control your system outputs based on the highest condition value sensed by the referenced sensors.
Differential control enables your control system to monitor and maintain a temperature, pressure, or humidity differential between two sensor points within a system, process, or space.

Repair Information

If the System 450™ Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450™ Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output (Continued)

Selection Chart

Hybrid System 450 Modules and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code Number	Product Description
C450CPW-100C	Hybrid Analog Output Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, Hybrid Analog Output and Optional High Input Signal Select; provides one hybrid analog output and optional high input signal select primarily used for variable-speed EC motor speed control. Only Analog Output 1 (OUTA1) can be configured as a hybrid analog output and/or use the High Input Signal Selection feature. These features are not available for any of the other outputs in a System 450 control system that uses the C450CPW-100C as the control module.
BKT287-1R	DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long
BKT287-2R	DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long
BKT287-3R	DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long
BKT287-4R	DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long
PLT344-1R	DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)
WHA-C450-100C	System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

Technical Specifications

C450CPW-100C Control Module with Hybrid Analog Output
Product	C450CPW-100C System 450 control module is a sensing control and operating control with LCD, four-button touchpad, and analog output with pulse-width modulation capability.
Power Consumption	C450CPW-100C: 1.3 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 1.5 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20–30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/ 60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 0 to 10 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 4 to 20 mA outputs Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Input Signal	0 to 5 VDC for humidity sensors and static pressure transducers 0.5 to 4.5 VDC for ratiometric pressure transducers 1,035 ohms at 25C (77F) for A99 PTC temperature sensors 1,000 ohms at 21.1C (70F) for TE-6xxx Nickel temperature sensors
Analog Output	Voltage Mode (0–10 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that fall below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.
Analog Output	Current Mode (4–20 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedance less than 300 ohms. Devices that rise above 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.
Analog Input Accuracy	Resolution: 14 bits
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450CPW-100C: 195 g (0.43 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900659

System 450™ Expansion Modules with Analog Output

Description

System 450 expansion modules allow you to increase the number of outputs in your control system to meet your application requirements. The following models are available:

C450SPN-1C: Analog Expansion Module with one analog output (each 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA)
C450SQN-1C: Analog Expansion Module with two analog outputs (each 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA)

Refer to the following documents for important product application information:

System 450™ Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
System 450™ Series Expansion Modules with Analog Outputs Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2799)

Features

Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with

Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.

Selection Chart

C450SQN-1C Expansion Module with Analog Output

Repair Information

If the System 450™ Expansion Module with Analog Output fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450™ Expansion Module with Analog Output, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

Product Code Number	Product Description
C450SPN-1C	Analog Output Expansion Module; provides one analog output (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signal) for proportional control.
C450SQN-1C	Analog Output Expansion Module; provides two analog outputs (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA self-selecting signals) for proportional control.
BKT287-1R	DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long
BKT287-2R	DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long
BKT287-3R	DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long
BKT287-4R	DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long
PLT344-1R	DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)
WHA-C450-100C	System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Expansion Modules with Analog Output (Continued)

Technical Specifications

C450SPN-1C and C450SQN-1C Expansion Modules with Analog Output
Product	C450SPN-1C: System 450 Expansion Module with one analog output C450SQN-1C: System 450 Expansion Module with two analog outputs
Power Consumption	C450SPN-1C: 1.1 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 1.3 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out C450SQN-1C: 1.8 VA maximum using 0 to 10 V out; 2.2 VA maximum using 4 to 20 mA out
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) when using 0 to 10 VDC outputs; -40 to 40C (-40 to 104F) when using 4 to 20 mA outputs Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Analog Output	Voltage Mode (0 to 10 VDC): 10 VDC maximum output voltage 10 mA maximum output current Requires an external load of 1,000 ohms or more The AO operates in Voltage Mode when connected to devices with impedance greater than 1,000 ohms. Devices that drop below 1,000 ohms may not operate as intended with Voltage Mode applications.
Analog Output	Current Mode (4 to 20 mA): Requires an external load between 0 to 300 ohms The AO operates in Current Mode when connected to devices with impedances less than 300 ohm. Devices that exceed 300 ohms may not operate as intended with Current Mode applications.
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450SPN-1C: 150 g (0.33 lb) C450SQN-1C: 150 g (0.33 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734, Vol. 1; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc., declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the Low Voltage Directive and the EMC Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900660

System 450™ Expansion Modules with Relay Output

Description

System 450 expansion modules allow you to increase the number of outputs in your control system to meet your application requirements. The following models are available:

C450SBN-3C: Relay Expansion Module with one relay output
C450SCN-3C: Relay Expansion Module with two relay outputs

Refer to the following documents for important product application information:

System 450™ Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
System 450™ Series Expansion Modules with Relay Outputs Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2896)

Features

Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with

Versatile, multipurpose, field-configurable control modules and expansion modules designed for global use allow you to create a wide variety of application-specific control systems capable of controlling temperature, pressure, or humidity, or all three conditions simultaneously, with only a small suite of module models.
Up to three hard-wired input sensors and up to ten relay or analog outputs (in any combination) per control system allow you to build complex custom control systems while reducing your control system cost to only the cost of the required components.

Selection Chart

C450SCN-3C Expansion Module with Relay Output

Repair Information

If the System 450™ Expansion Module with Relay Output fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450™ Expansion Module with Relay Output, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

Product Code Number	Product Description
C450SBN-3C	Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides one SPDT output relay. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module.
C450SCN-3C	Reset Control Module with LCD, Four-Button Touchpad UI, and SPDT relay output; provides two SPDT output relays. One A99BC-25C temperature sensor with 0.25 m (9-1/4 in.) silicon leads and one A99BC-300C temperature sensor with 3 m (9 ft 10 in.) silicon leads are included in the box with the Reset Control Module.
BKT287-1R	DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long
BKT287-2R	DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long
BKT287-3R	DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long
BKT287-4R	DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long
PLT344-1R	DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)
WHA-C450-100C	System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Expansion Modules with Relay Output (Continued)

Technical Specifications

C450SBN-3C and C450SCN-3C Expansion Modules with Relay Output
Product	C450SBN-3C: System 450 Expansion Module with one SPDT output relay C450SCN-3C: System 450 Expansion Module with two SPDT output relays
Power Consumption	C450SBN-3C: 0.8 VA maximum C450SCN-3C: 1.2 VA maximum
Supply Power	Internal Supply Power: C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module External Supply Power: 24 VAC (20 to 30 VAC) Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) (Europe), Class 2 (North America), 50/60 Hz, 10 VA minimum Note: A System 450 control module or module assembly can use an internal or an external supply power source, but must not be connected to both simultaneously.
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Output Relay Contacts	General: 1/2 HP at 120/240 VAC, SPDT
Output Relay Contacts	Specific: AC Motor Ratings 120 VAC 208/240 VAC AC Full-Load Amperes: 9.8 A 4.9 A AC Locked-Rotor Amperes: 58.8 A 29.4 A 10 Amperes AC Noninductive at 24/240 VAC Pilot Duty: 125 VA at 24/240 VAC
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450SBN-3C: 172 g (0.38 lb) C450SCN-3C: 186 g (0.41 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734; FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

Description

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900661

System 450™ Power Module

System 450™ modules require 24 VAC, Class 2 power. In applications where 24 VAC power is not available, the C450YNN-1C Power Module provides a convenient modular solution for transforming 120/240 VAC to 24 VAC power for your System 450 control systems.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information:

System 450™ Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458)
System 450™ Series Power Module Installation Instructions (Part No. 24-7664-2691)

Features

Durable, compact, interchangeable modular components with

Repair Information

If the System 450 Power Module fails to operate within its specifications, replace the unit. For a replacement System 450 Power Module, contact a Johnson Controls® representative.

Selection Chart

C450YNN-1C Power Module

Product Code Number	Product Description
C450YNN-1C	Power Module; provides 24 V to System 450 Module Assembly; 120 VAC or 240 VAC supply power input terminals.
BKT287-1R	DIN Rail; 0.30 m (12 in.) long
BKT287-2R	DIN Rail; 1 m (39-1/3 in.) long
BKT287-3R	DIN Rail; 0.61 m (24 in.) long
BKT287-4R	DIN Rail; 0.36 m (14 in.) long
PLT344-1R	DIN Rail End Clamps (Two clamps)
WHA-C450-100C	System 450 module connection extension cable, 100 cm (3.3 ft) long

Technical Specifications

C450YNN-1C Power Supply Module
Product	C450YNN-1C: System 450 Power Supply Module; 120 or 240 VAC stepdown to 24 VAC Class 2 (North America) or SELV (Europe)
Supply Power	110/120 VAC or 220/240 VAC at 50/60 Hz (100 mA maximum)
Secondary Power	24 VAC, 10 VA
Ambient Operating Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 66C (-40 to 150F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Ambient Shipping and Storage Conditions	Temperature: -40 to 80C (-40 to 176F) Humidity: Up to 95% RH noncondensing; maximum dew point 29C (85F)
Control Construction	Independently mounted control, surface mounted with Lexan® 950 enclosure suitable for DIN rail mounting or direct mounting to a hard, even surface.
Dimensions (H x W x D)	127 x 61 x 61 mm (5 x 2-3/8 x 2-3/8 in.)
Weight	C450YNN-1C: 390 gm (0.86 lb)
Compliance	North America: cULus Listed; UL 60730, File E27734: FCC Compliant to CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B Industry Canada (IC) Compliant to Canadian ICES-003, Class B limits
	Europe: CE Mark – Johnson Controls, Inc. declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive.
	Australia: Mark: C-Tick Compliant (N1813)

System 450 Control Series

Code No. LIT-1900662

System 450™ Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories

Description

System 450 control modules are designed to operate with a variety of compatible sensors and transducers. The System 450 compatible sensors and transducers cover a wide range of temperature, pressure, and humidity conditions, allowing you to select the sensor or transducer that best fits your control system requirements.

For ease of installation and setup, the Sensor Type that you select in the UI for a sensor or transducer automatically determines the sensed condition, unit of measurement, minimum differential, setup value ranges, and the default setup values for each control system output that references the sensor or transducer.

Refer to the System 450™ Series Modular Controls Product Bulletin (LIT-12011458) for important product application information on System 450 Controls.

Refer to the following documents for important product application information on sensors used with System 450 Controls:

A99B Series Temperature Sensors Product Technical Bulletin (LIT-125186)
TrueRH™ Series HE-67xx Humidity Element with Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216245)
HE-6800 Series Humidity Transmitters with Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin (LIT-12011625)
P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190)
TE-6000 Series Temperature Sensing Elements Product Bulletin (LIT-216288)
TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216320)
TE-6800 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-12011542)
Setra Systems Model DPT265 Very Low Differential Pressure Transducer Catalog Page

Duct-Mount HE67S3 Humidity Sensor

Wall-Mount HE67S3 Humidity Sensor

DPT265 Series Low Pressure Differential Pressure Transducers

A99 Temperature Sensors

TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors

TE-6000-1 Temperature Sensing Element

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories (Continued)

TE-6800 Series Wall Mount Temperature Sensors and HE-6800 Series Humidity Transmitters

with Temperature Sensors

Selection Charts

P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers

Use these tables to order System 450 compatible sensors, transducers, and accessories.

System 450 Compatible A99B Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information1

Product Code Number	Product Description
A99BA-200C	PTC Silicon Sensor with Shielded Cable; Cable Length 2 m (6-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BB-25C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 0.25 m (9-3/4 in.); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BB-200C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 2 m (6-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BB-300C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 3 m (9-3/4 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BB-500C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 5 m (16-3/8 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BB-600C	PTC Silicon Sensor with PVC Cable; Cable Length 6 m (19-1/2 ft); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Temperature Range: -40 to 100°C (-40 to 212°F)
A99BC-25C	PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 0.25 m (9-3/4 in.); Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.
A99BC-300C	PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 3 m (9-3/4 ft) Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.
A99BC-1500C	PTC Silicon Sensor with High Temperature Silicon Cable; Cable Length 15 m (49 ft) Sensor Temperature Range: -40 to 120°C (-40 to 250°F) Cable Jacket Rated for Full Sensor Temperature Range.
BOX10A-600R	PVC Enclosure for A99 Sensor; Includes Wire Nuts and Conduit Connector (for Outdoor Sensor)
WEL11A-601R	Immersion Well for A99 Sensor Liquid Sensing Applications
A99-CLP-1	Mounting Clip for A99 Temperature Sensor
ADP11A-600R	Conduit Adaptor, 1/2 in. Snap-Fit EMT Conduit Adaptor (box of 10)
TE-6001-1	Duct Mounting Hardware with Handy Box for A99 Sensor
TE-6001-11	Duct Mounting Hardware without Handy Box for A99 Sensor
SHL10A-603R	Sun Shield (for Use with Outside A99 Sensors in Sunny Locations)

1. Refer to the A99B Series Temperature Sensors Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-125186) on the Johnson Controls® Product Literature website for more information.

System 450 Compatible TE-6000 Series 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code Number

Product Description

TE-6000-x

TE6000 Series 1,000 ohm at 70F nickel temperature sensors (only). Only the TE-6000-6 sensor can be used for the entire HIC

and HIF temperature range. Different sensing element packages are available for various applications.For a complete list of compatible 1,000 ohm nickel sensors, including sensor descriptions, technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the TE-6000 Series Temperature Sensing Elements Product Bulletin (LIT-216288). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

System 450 Compatible TE-6300 Series 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensors and Accessories Ordering Information

Product Code Number

Product Description

TE-631xx-x

TE6300 Series 1,000 ohm at 70F nickel averaging and 1,000 ohm thin-film nickel temperature sensors (only). For a complete list

of compatible 1,000 ohm nickel averaging and thin-film nickel sensors, including sensor descriptions, technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the TE-6300 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216320). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories (Continued)

System 450 Compatible TE-68NT-0N00S 1,000 Ohm Nickel Temperature Sensor Ordering Information

Product Code Number

Product Description

TE-68NT-0N00S

TE6800 Series 1,000 ohm nickel temperature sensor for wall-mount applications. For more information, including sensor

description, technical specifications, and mounting accessories, refer to the TE-6800 Series Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-12011542). (System 450 Sensor Types HIC and HIF)

System 450 Compatible HE67S3 Type Humidity Sensors with Integral A99B Temperature Sensor Ordering Information1

Product Code Number	Product Description
HE-67S3-0N0BT	Wall Mount Humidity Sensor with A99B Type Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90% RH; 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)
HE-67S3-0N00P	Duct Mount Humidity Sensor with A99B Type Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90% RH; 0 to 60C (32 to 140F)

1. The HE-67S3 sensors require 24 VAC input and must use the 0 to 5 VDC output. Refer to the TrueRH Series HE-67xx Humidity Element with Temperature Sensors Product Bulletin (LIT-216245) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information, including technical specifications and mounting accessories.

System 450 Compatible HE6800 Series Humidity Transmitters with Temperature Sensor Ordering Information1

Product Code Number	Product Description
HE-68N2-0N00WS	Wall Mount Humidity Transmitter with Nickel Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90 ±2% RH; 0 to 55C (32 to 131F)
HE-68N3-0N00WS	Wall Mount Humidity Transmitter with Nickel Temperature Sensor: 10 to 90 ±3% RH; 0 to 55C (32 to 131F)

1. The HE-6800 transmitters require 24 VAC input and must use the 0 to 5 VDC output. Refer to the HE-6800 Series Humidity Transmitters with Temperature Sensor Product Bulletin (LIT-12011625) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information, including technical specifications and mounting accessories.

System 450 Compatible Low Pressure Differential Transducer Ordering Information1 2

Product Code Number	Product Description
DPT2650-R25B-AB	Low Pressure Differential Transducer: -0.25 to 0.25 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 0.25)3
DPT2650-0R5D-AB	Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 0.5 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 0.5)
DPT2650-2R5D-AB	Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 2.5 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 2.5)
DPT2650-005D-AB	Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 5.0 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 5)
DPT2650-10D-AB	Low Pressure Differential Transducer: 0 to 10 in. W.C. (System 450 Sensor Type: P 10)

Refer to the Setra Systems Model DPT265 Very Low Differential Pressure Transducer Catalog Page on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.
The DPT265 sensors require 24 VAC input and must use the 0 to 5 VDC output. Refer to the Setra Systems Model DPT265 Very Low Differential Pressure Transducer Catalog Page on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.
Used only with Communications Control Modules.

System 450 Compatible P499 Series Transducers with 1/4 in. SAE 45 Flare Internal Thread with Depressor (Style 47) Ordering Information1

Product Code Number	Product Description
P499RCP-401C	-1 to 8 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-402C	-1 to 15 bar; order WH A-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-404C	0 to 30 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-405C	0 to 50 bar; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCPS100C	-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCPS100K	-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RCPS102C	0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCPS102K	0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RCP-101C	0 to 100 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-101K	0 to 100 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RCP-105C	0 to 500 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-105K	0 to 500 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RCP-107C	0 to 750 psi; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RCP-107K	0 to 750 psi; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

System 450 Control Series

System 450™ Compatible Sensors, Transducers, and Accessories (Continued)

System 450 Compatible P499 Series Transducers with 1/8 in. 27 NPT External Thread (Style 49) Ordering Information1

Product Code Number	Product Description
P499RAPS100C	-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAPS100K	-10 to 100 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RAPS102C	0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAPS102K	0 to 200 psis (sealed for wet and freeze/thaw applications); WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RAP-101C	0 to 100 psig; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAP-101K	0 to 100 psig; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RAP-102C	0 to 200 psig; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAP-105C	0 to 500 psig; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAP-105K	0 to 500 psig; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included
P499RAP-107C	0 to 750 psig; order WHA-PKD3 type wire harness separately
P499RAP-107K	0 to 750 psig; WHA-PKD3-200C wire harness included

WHA-PKD3 Wire Harnesses Ordering Information1

Product Code Number	Product Description
WHA-PKD3-200C	Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 2.0 m (6-1/2 ft) cable
WHA-PKD3-400C	Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 4.0 m (13 ft) cable
WHA-PKD3-600C	Plug and Three-Wire Harness for P499 Electronic Pressure Transducers: 6.0 m (19-5/8 ft) cable

1. Refer to the P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers Product/Technical Bulletin (LIT-12011190) on the Johnson Controls Product Literature website for more information.

Cross-Reference Code No. LIT-1900120

Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference

Temperature Controls (Part 1 of 2)

Product	#	Range	Differential	Switch	Capillary	Bulb	Cover	Notes
Ranco	ETC111000-000	-30/220F	1/30F ADJ	SPDT	96” Lead	0.5×2	NEMA 1
PENN	A419ABC-1C	-30/212F	1/30F ADJ	SPDT	78” Lead	0.5X2	NEMA 1	(14)
Ranco	3130-101	35/45F	12F FXD	Open LO	None	240”	NEMA 1
PENN	A11B-1C	35/45F	12F FXD	Open LO	48”	240″	NEMA 1
Ranco	3130-201	35/45F	Manual	Open LO	None	240”	NEMA 1
PENN	A11A-1C	35/45F	Manual	Open LO	48”	240″	NEMA 1
Ranco	3311-651	37F FXD	Manual	Open LO	180″	0.5×4.25	NEMA 1
PENN	A70BA-17C	35/80F ADJ	Manual	Open LO	72″	3/8×3	NEMA 1
Ranco	3311-701	30F FXD	15F FXD	Open LO	120″	3/8×6.5	NEMA 1
PENN	A70AA-15C	-10/65F ADJ	4/40F ADJ	Open LO	72″	3/8×3	NEMA 1
Ranco	A22-2237	41F FXD	6F FXD	Open HI	None	48″	NEMA 1
PENN	A11E-6C	35/45F	12F FXD	SPDT	48″	240″	NEMA 1
Ranco	O10-1010	0/55F	7/55F ADJ	Open LO	None	48″	NEMA 1
PENN	A11B-1C	35/45F	12F FXD	Open LO	48″	240″	NEMA 1
Ranco	O10-1409	0/55F	3/20F ADJ	Open LO	72″	Yes	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABA-1C	-30/50F	5/20F ADJ	Open LO	72″	3/8×4	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O10-1410	25/75F	3/20F ADJ	Open LO	72″	Yes	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABA-4C	20/80F	3.5/14F ADJ	Open LO	72″	3/8×5	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O10-1416	0/55F	3/20F ADJ	Open LO	None	72″	NEMA 1
PENN	A11B-1C	35/45F	12F FXD	Open LO	48″	240″	NEMA 1
Ranco PENN	O10-1418 A19BBA-1C	0/55F -30/50F	3/20F ADJ 5/20F ADJ	Open LO Open LO	None None	Coiled Coiled	NEMA 1 NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O10-1473	0/55F	7/55F ADJ	Open LO	72″	Yes	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABA-1C	-30/50F	5/20F ADJ	Open LO	72″	3/8×4	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O10-1490	0/55F	2F FXD	Open LO	72″	Yes	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABA-1C	-30/50F	5/20F ADJ	Open LO	72″	3/8×4	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O10-1491	25/75F	2F FXD	Open LO	72″	Yes	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABA-4C	20/80F	3.5/14F ADJ	Open LO	72″	3/8×5	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O10-1802	25/75F	3/20F ADJ	Open LO	None	Coiled	NEMA 1
PENN	A19BAC-1C	30/110F	3.5F FXD	SPDT	None	Coiled	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O10-301	30/95F	2F FXD	Open LO	None	Coiled	NEMA 1
PENN	A19BAA-5C	30/110F	3.5F FXD	Open LO	None	Coiled	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O16-104	0/55F	3/20F ADJ	SPDT	72″	Yes	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABC-24C	-30/100F	3/12F ADJ	SPDT	96″	3/8×4	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O16-111	0/55F	3/20F ADJ	SPDT	None	72″	NEMA 1
PENN	A11E-6C	35/45F	12F FXD	SPDT	48″	240″	NEMA 1
Ranco	O16-165	30/90F	2.5F FXD	SPDT	None	Coiled	NEMA 1
PENN	A19BAC-1C	30/110F	3.5F FXD	SPDT	None	Coiled	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O16-263	0/55F	Manual	SPDT	72″	Yes	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ACC-6C	-30/100F	Manual	SPDT	72″	3/8×4	NEMA 1
PENN	A70BA-17C	35/80F	Manual	Open LO	72″	3/8×3	NEMA 1	(12)
Ranco	O16-264	0/55F	Manual	SPDT	None	96″	NEMA 1
PENN	A11D-1C	35/45F	Manual	SPDT	48″	240″	NEMA 1
PENN	A70BA-18C	15/55F	Manual	Open LO	None	240″	NEMA 1	(12)
Ranco	O16-588	-15/40F	1.5F FXD	SPDT	None	72″	NEMA 1
PENN	A11E-6C	35/45F	12F FXD	SPDT	48″	240″	NEMA 1	(1)
PENN	A70AA-16C	15/55F	5F FXD	Open LO	None	240″	NEMA 1
Ranco PENN	O16-594 A19BBC-2C	0/55F -30/100F	2F FXD 3/12F ADJ	SPDT SPDT	None None	Coiled Coiled	NEMA 1 NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O16-595	50/100F	3/20F ADJ	SPDT	96″	3/8×6	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABC-4C	50/130F	3.5/14F ADJ	SPDT	96″	3/8×5	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O16-601	22.5/47.5F	2.5F FXD	SPDT	36″	3/8×6	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABC-2C	20/80F	3.5/14F ADJ	SPDT	72″	3/8×5	NEMA 1	(1)
PENN	A70AA-15C	-10/65F ADJ	10F FXD	Open LO	72″	3/8×3	NEMA 1	(12)
Ranco	O20-7041	0/100F	6/20F ADJ	DPST Open LO	96″	3/8×6	NEMA 1
PENN	A72AA-3C	50/90F	ADJ	DPST Open LO	72″	11/16×6 3/4	NEMA 1
PENN	A72AA-2C	15/55F	ADJ	DPST Open LO	72″	3/8×3	NEMA 1

Cross-Reference

Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Temperature Controls (Part 2 of 2)

Product	#	Range	Differential	Switch	Capillary	Bulb	Cover	Notes
Ranco	O52-6910	30/95F	2F FXD	SPDT	None	Coiled	NEMA 4X
PENN	A19PRC-1C	30/110F	3/12F ADJ	SPDT	None	Coiled	NEMA 4X
Ranco	O60-100	-35/95F	4/50F ADJ	SPDT	96″	3/8×6	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABC-24C	-30/100F	3/12F ADJ	SPDT	96″	3/8×4	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O60-101	-35/95F	4/50F ADJ	SPDT	None	Coiled	NEMA 1
PENN	A19BBC-2C	-30/100F	3/12F ADJ	SPDT	None	Coiled	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O60-1072	-15/40F	3/20F ADJ	Open LO	None	Coiled	NEMA 1
PENN	A19BBA-1C	-30/50F	5/20F ADJ	Open LO	None	Coiled	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O60-120	-35/95F	4/50F ADJ	SPDT	240″	3/8×6	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABC-36C	-30/100F	3/12F ADJ	SPDT	240″	3/8×4	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O60-1408	-15/40F	3/20F ADJ	Open LO	72″	Yes	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABA-1C	-30/50F	5/20F ADJ	Open LO	72″	3/8×4	NEMA 1	(1)
Ranco	O60-200	95/240F	6/50F ADJ	SPDT	96″	3/8×6	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABC-12C	100/240F	6/24F ADJ	SPDT	96″	.29×2.5	NEMA 1	(1)

Defrost/Fan Delay Temperature Controls

Product	#	Range	Differential	Switch	Capillary	Bulb	Cover	Notes
Ranco	F25-107	40/75F	20F FXD	SPDT	60″	3/8×4	Open
PENN	A19ZBC-2C	45/85	25F ADJ	SPDT	72″	0.3×3.125	NEMA 1	(10)
Ranco	F25-114	43/73F	24F FXD	SPDT	60″	3/8×4	Open
PENN	A19ZBC-2C	45/85	25F ADJ	SPDT	72″	0.3×3.125	NEMA 1	(10)

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3126-3161, G20-G23, and O10-O20) (Part 1 of 3)

Product	#	Range	Differential	Switch	Capillary	Connection	Cover	Notes
Ranco	3126-116	7/125	25 FXD	SPDT	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-1C	7/150	29/32 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	3126-117	7/27	12 FXD	SPDT	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P70AB-2C	20″/100	7/50 ADJ	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(5)(4)
Ranco	3126-216	7/125	Manual	Open LO	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P70BA-1C	20″/100	Manual	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(5)(4)
Ranco	3126-412	7/77	23/70	SPDT	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-1C	7/150	29/32 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	3127-140	125/450	70 FXD	Open HI	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-2C	100/425	60/77 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	3127-220	125/450	Manual	SPDT	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P70DA-1C	50/450	Manual	Open HI	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(5)(4)
Ranco	3127-414	150/450	70/125	SPDT	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-2C	100/425	60/77 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	3160-012	5/110	25 FXD	SPDT	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-1C	7/150	29/32 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	3160-014	5/125	25 FXD	Open LO	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-1C	7/150	29/32 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	3160-212	5/110	Manual	Open LO	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P70BA-1C	20″/100	Manual	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(5)(4)
Ranco	3160-406	5/125	12/50	SPDT	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-1C	7/150	29/32 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	3161-002	200/475	75 FXD	Open HI	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-2C	100/425	60/77 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	3161-003	200/475	110 FXD	Open HI	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-2C	100/425	60/77 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	3161-004	200/475	50 FXD	Open HI	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-2C	100/425	60/77 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	3161-009	125/285	50 FXD	SPDT	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-2C	100/425	60/77 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)

Cross-Reference

Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3126-3161, G20-G23, and O10-O20) (Part 2 of 3)

Product	#	Range	Differential	Switch	Capillary	Connection	Cover	Notes
Ranco	3161-201	200/475	Manual	SPDT	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P70DA-1C	50/450	Manual	Open HI	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(5)(4)
Ranco	3161-205	125/285	Manual	Open HI	60″	w/ Flare		Open
PENN	P70DA-1C	50/450	Manual	Open HI	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(5)
Ranco	3161-403	200/475	50/150	SPDT	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-2C	100/425	60/77 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	G20-4050	7/27	12 FXD	Open LO	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P70AB-2C	20″/100	7/50 ADJ	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(5)(4)
Ranco	G20-4051	7/77	19/70	Open LO	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-1C	7/150	29/32 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	G20-4412	7/70	Manual	Open LO	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P70BA-1C	20″/100	Manual	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(5)(4)
Ranco	G23-5052	150/450	50/125	Open HI	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P20EB-2C	100/425	60/77 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	Open	(6)
Ranco	G23-5253	50/450	Manual	Open HI	60″	Sweat	Open
PENN	P70DA-1C	50/450	Manual	Open HI	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(5)(4)
Ranco	O10-1093	10″/100	10/40	Open LO	48″	w/ Flare		NEMA 1
PENN	P70AB-2C	20″/100	7/50	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O10-1401	12″/50	5/35	Open LO	None	External Flare		NEMA 1
PENN	P170AB-12C	12″/80	5/35	Open LO	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O10-1402	12″/50	535	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare		NEMA 1
PENN	P70AB-12C	12″/80	5/35	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O10-1483	10″/100	10/40	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare		NEMA 1
PENN	P70AB-2C	20″/100	7/50	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O10-1807	100/250	20/100	Open LO	None	External Flare		NEMA 1
PENN	P70AA-151C	50/300	20/120	Open LO	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O10-1831	10″/100	10/40	Open LO	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70AB-12C	12″/80	5/35	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O10-1842	12″/50	5/35	Open LO	48″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70AB-12C	12″/80	5/35	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O10-2000	100/250	20/100	Open LO	48″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70AA-3C	100/300	25/75	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O10-2054	100/400	40/150	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70AA-118C	100/400	35/200	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O11-1711	150/450	40/150	Open HI	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70CA-3C	50/450	60/150	Open HI	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O11-1713	150/450	40/150	Open HI	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70CA-2C	50/450	60/150	Open HI	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O11-1799	10″/100	10/40	Open HI	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P170CA-1C	20″/100	6/70	Open HI	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O11-3099	10″/100	10/40	Open HI	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70CA-1C	20″/100	6/70	Open HI	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O16-107	10″/100	10/40 ADJ	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70EA-10C	20″/100	5 FXD	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O16-120	12″/50	5/35 ADJ	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70EA-10C	20″/100	5 FXD	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O16-142	100/400	17 FXD	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70EA-6C	100/300	14 FXD	SPDT	36″	Sweat	NEMA 1	(4)
Ranco	O16-166	50/150	10/40	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70GA-2C	20″/100	7/50	NO/NC	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(12)
Ranco	O16-200	150/450	Manual	SPDT	48″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70KA-1C	50/450	Manual	NO/NC	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(12)
Ranco	O16-209	150/450	Manual	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P170KA-1C	50/450	Manual	NO/NC	None	External Flare	NEMA 1	(12)
Ranco	O16-261	10″/100	Manual	SPDT	48″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70HA-2C	20″/100	Manual	NO/NC	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(12)
Ranco	O16-503	150/450	40/150	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70JA-18C	50/450	60/150	NO/NC	None	External Flare	NEMA 1	(12)

Cross-Reference

Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3126-3161, G20-G23, and O10-O20) (Part 3 of 3)

Product	#	Range	Differential	Switch	Capillary	Connection	Cover	Notes
Ranco	O16-527	10″/100	10/40 ADJ	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70EA-10C	20″/100	5 FXD	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1	(3)
Ranco	O16-557	12″/50	5/35 ADJ	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70EA-10C	20″/100	5 FXD	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1	(3)
Ranco	O16-585	10″/100	Manual	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70HA-3C	20″/100	Manual	NO/NC	None	Internal NPT	NEMA 1	(4)(12)
Ranco	O20-1894	100/400	40/150	Open LO	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P170AA-118C	100/400	35/200	Open LO	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O20-7002	12″/50	5/35	DPST-LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P72AA-1C	20″/100	7/50	DPST-LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
Ranco	O20-7006	100/400	40/150	DPST-LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P72AA-27C	100/400	35/200	DPST-LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3100, MPF, MPH, and MPL) (Part 1 of 3)

Product

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Range

Switch

Electrical

Pressure Notes

Ranco

PENN

3100-001

P100AA-1C

None

None

SPST

SPST

30″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Sweat

1/4″ Internal Flare

Ranco

PENN

3100-002

P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None

7/150

SPST

SPDT

72″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-003

P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None

7/150

SPST

SPDT

72″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-004

P100AA-2C

None

None

SPST

SPST

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-005

P70AB-1C

15″ VAC

ADJ.

17.5

N/A

None

20″/100

SPDT

SPST

Screw Terms.

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

(4)(5)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-006

P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None

7/150

SPDT

SPDT

36″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Sweat

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-007

P100AA-1C

None

None

SPST

SPST

30″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

Ranco

PENN

3100-009

P70AB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None

20″/100

SPST

SPST

Screw Terms.

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

(4)(5)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-010

P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None

7/150

SPDT

SPDT

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)

Ranco

PENN

3100-050

P100AA-1C

None

None

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

Ranco

PENN

3100-051

P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None

7/150

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-052

P100AA-2C

None

None

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

Ranco

PENN

3100-075

P70AA-119C

ADJ.

135

N/A

None

50/300

SPDT

SPST

Screw Terms.

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

(5)(7)(8)(12)

Ranco

PENN

3100-076

P20EB-1C

108

ADJ.

135

N/A

None

7/150

SPST

SPDT

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)(12)

Ranco

PENN

3100-077

P170AA-118C

115

ADJ.

165

N/A

None

100/400

SPST

SPST

Screw Terms.

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

(4)(5)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-078

P170AA-118C

135

ADJ.

185

N/A

None

100/400

SPDT

SPST

Screw Terms.

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

(4)(5)(7)(8)(12)

Ranco

PENN

3100-079

P100AA-4C

165

170

215

250

None

None

SPST

SPST

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-080

P170AA-118C

200

ADJ.

240

N/A

None

100/400

SPDT

SPST

Screw Terms.

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

(4)(5)(7)(8)(12)

Ranco

PENN

3100-081

P170AA-118C

250

ADJ.

300

N/A

None

100/400

SPDT

SPST

Screw Terms.

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

(4)(5)(7)(8)(12)

Ranco

PENN

3100-100

P100CA-2C

425

425

325

325

None

None

SPST

SPST

72″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

Ranco

PENN

3100-101

P100CA-1C

400

400

300

300

None

None

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

Cross-Reference

Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3100, MPF, MPH, and MPL) (Part 2 of 3)

Product

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Range

Switch

Electrical

Pressure

Notes

Ranco

PENN

3100-102

P100CA-2C

220

425

170

325

None

None

SPST

SPST

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-103

P100DA-1C

410

410

Manual

Manual

None

None

SPST

SPST

42″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

Ranco

PENN

3100-104

P70DA-1C

420

ADJ.

Manual

Manual

None

50/450

SPST

SPST

48″ Leads

Screw Terms.

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Flare

(4)(5)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-105

P70DA-1C

440

ADJ.

Manual

Manual

None

50/450

SPST

SPST

36″ Leads

Screw Terms.

.093 Cap. Tube

36″ Cap, Flare

(4)(5)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-106

P100DA-2C

475

475

Manual

Manual

None

None

SPST

SPST

42″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Sweat w/ Cap.

1/4″ Internal Flare

(4)

Ranco

PENN

3100-107

P70DA-1C

232

ADJ.

Manual

Manual

None

50/450

SPST

SPST

84″ Leads

Screw Terms.

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Flare

(4)(5)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-108

P20EB-2C

280

ADJ.

Manual

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

12″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ NPTF

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-110

P20EB-2C

375

ADJ.

275

N/A

None

100/425

SPDT

SPDT

Arkles

1/4″ Sweat

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)

Ranco

PENN

3100-111

P20EB-2C

375

ADJ.

275

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)

Ranco

PENN

3100-112

P20EB-2C

275

ADJ.

175

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

24″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-113

P20EB-2C

395

ADJ.

295

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

Arkles

1/4″ Sweat

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)

Ranco

PENN

3100-115

P20EB-2C

350

ADJ.

250

N/A

None

100/425

SPDT

SPDT

36″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Sweat

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-116

P20EB-2C

213

ADJ.

113

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)

Ranco

PENN

3100-117

P20EB-2C

140

ADJ.

190

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

12″ Leads

Arkles

.093 Cap. Tube

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-118

P20EB-2C

295

ADJ.

395

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)

Ranco

PENN

3100-120

P20EB-2C

420

ADJ.

320

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)

Ranco

PENN

3100-121

P20EB-2C

426

ADJ.

272

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

Arkles

1/4″ Sweat

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)

Ranco

PENN

3100-150

P20EB-2C

350

ADJ.

250

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-151

P100CA-1C

400

400

300

300

None

None

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

Ranco

PENN

3100-152

P100CA-1C

400

400

200

300

None

None

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ Internal Flare

Ranco

PENN

3100-153

P20EB-2C

450

ADJ.

250

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(4)(5)(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

3100-154

P70LB-1C

500

ADJ.

400

N/A

None

100/500

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

Screw Terms.

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Flare

(4)(5)(7)(8)(9)

Ranco

PENN

3100-155

P70LB-1C

500

ADJ.

300

N/A

None

100/500

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

Screw Terms.

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Flare

(4)(5)(7)(8)(9)

Ranco

PENN

MPF-7006

P20EB-1C

ADJ.

120

N/A

None

7/150

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPF-7007

P20EB-1C

110

ADJ.

170

N/A

None

7/150

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPF-7008

P100AA-3C

150

150

225

225

None

None

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

Ranco

PENN

MPF-7009

P20EB-2C

190

ADJ.

275

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPF-7010

P20EB-2C

300

ADJ.

400

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPH-7101

P20EB-2C

250

ADJ.

180

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Cross-Reference

Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Pressure Controls (Ranco Series 3100, MPF, MPH, and MPL) (Part 3 of 3)

Product

Cut-Out

Cut-In

Range

Switch

Electrical

Pressure

Notes

Ranco

PENN

MPH-7102

P20EB-2C

270

ADJ.

200

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPH-7103

P20EB-2C

300

ADJ.

200

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPH-7104

P20EB-2C

325

ADJ.

225

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPH-7105

P20EB-2C

350

ADJ.

250

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPH-7106

P20EB-2C

375

ADJ.

275

N/A

None

100/425

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPH-7107

P100CA-1C

400

400

300

300

None

None

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

Ranco

PENN

MPH-7108

P100CA-2C

425

425

325

325

None

None

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

Ranco

PENN

MPL-7001

P100AC-1C

None

None

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

Ranco

PENN

MPL-7002

P100AA-1C

None

None

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

Ranco

PENN

MPL-7003

P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None

7/150

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPL-7004

P100AA-2C

None

None

SPST

SPST

18″ Leads

48″ Leads

1/4″ Internal Flare

1/4″ External Flare

Ranco

PENN

MPL-7005

P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None

7/150

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPL-7011

P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None

7/150

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPL-7012

P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None

7/150

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Ranco

PENN

MPL-7014

P20EB-1C

ADJ.

N/A

None

7/150

SPST

SPDT

18″ Leads

Arkles

1/4″ Internal Flare

36″ Cap, Sweat

(6)(7)(8)

Dual Pressure Controls (Part 1 of 2)

Product	#	LO Side	Differential	HI Side	Differential	Capillary	Connection	Notes
Ranco	O12-1502	12″/50	5/35	150/450	70 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
PENN	P70LB-6C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
Ranco	O12-1505	12″/50	5/35	100/250	50 FXD	None	External Flare
PENN	P170LB-6C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	None	External Flare
Ranco	O12-1506	12″/50	5/35	100/250	50 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
PENN	P70LB-6C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
Ranco	O12-1549	10″/100	10/40	150/450	70 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
PENN	P70LB-1C	20″/100	7/50	100/500	60 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
Ranco	O12-1550	10″/100	10/40	150/450	70 FXD	None	External Flare
PENN	P170LB-1C	20″/100	7/50	100/500	60 FXD	None	External Flare
Ranco	O12-1554	12″/50	5/35	100/250	50 FXD	48″	W/ Flare
PENN	P70LB-6C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
Ranco	O12-1594	10″/100	Manual	150/450	Manual	36″	W/ Flare
PENN	P70NA-1C	20″/100	Manual	100/500	Manual	36″	W/ Flare
Ranco	O12-4139	12″/50	5/35	150/450	70 FXD	None	External Flare
PENN	P170LB-6C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	None	External Flare
Ranco	O12-4833	12″/50	5/35	150/450	70 FXD/Man	48″	W/ Flare
PENN	P70SA-1C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
Ranco	O12-4834	10″/100	10/40	150/450	70 FXD/Man	48″	W/ Flare
PENN	P70SA-1C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
Ranco	O12-4842	12″/50	5/35	150/450	70 FXD/Man	None	External Flare
PENN	P170SA-1C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	None	External Flare
Ranco	O12-4846	10″/100	10/40	150/450	70 FXD/Man	None	External Flare
PENN	P170SA-1C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	None	External Flare
Ranco	O22-7702	12″/50	5/35	100/250	50 FXD/Man	36″	W/ Flare
PENN	P72LB-1C	20″/100	7/50	100/500	60 FXD	36″	W/ Flare	(2)

Cross-Reference

Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Dual Pressure Controls (Part 2 of 2)

Product	#	LO Side	Differential	HI Side	Differential	Capillary	Connection	Notes
Ranco	O22-7706	10″/100	10/40	150/450	70 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
PENN	P72LB-1C	20″/100	7/50	100/500	60 FXD	36″	W/ Flare	(2)

Low Pressure Cutout with Time Delay

Product	#	Range	Differential	Time Delay	Capillary	Connection	Cover Notes
Ranco	3341-161	0/100	5 FXD	120 Secs.	36″	W/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P29NC-38C	20″/100	2.2 FXD	120 Secs.	36″	W/ Flare	NEMA 1

Lube Oil Pressure Controls

Product

Range

Reset

Delay

Capillary

Connection

Cover

Notes

Ranco

PENN

3321-001

P128AA-**C

9 FXD

8/70 ADJ

Manual

Manual

45,60,90,120

Note (11)

None

None

External Flare

External Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

(11)

Ranco

PENN

3321-009

P28AA-**C

5 FXD

8/70 ADJ

Manual

Manual

45,60,90,120

Note (11)

36″

36″

W/ Flare

W/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

(11)

Ranco

PENN

3321-010

P28AA-**C

9 FXD

8/70 ADJ

Manual

Manual

45,60,90,120

Note (11)

36″

36″

W/ Flare

W/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

(11)

Ranco

PENN

3321-014

P28AA-**C

15 FXD

8/70 ADJ

Manual

Manual

45,60,90,120

Note (11)

36″

36″

W/ Flare

W/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

(11)

Ranco

PENN

3321-015

P28AA-**C

30 FXD

8/70 ADJ

Manual

Manual

45,60,90,120

Note (11)

36″

36″

W/ Flare

W/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

(11)

Ranco

PENN

P30-3601

P28AA-2C

8/60 ADJ

8/70 ADJ

Manual

Manual

36″

36″

W/ Flare

W/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

Ranco

PENN

P30-3701

P28AA-1C

8/60 ADJ

8/70 ADJ

Manual

Manual

36″

36″

W/ Flare

W/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

Ranco

PENN

P30-3801

P28AA-17C

8/60 ADJ

8/70 ADJ

Manual

Manual

120

120

36″

36″

W/ Flare

W/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

Ranco

PENN

P30-5826

P45NCA-12C

9 FXD

9 FXD

Manual

Manual

120

120

36″

36″

W/ Flare

W/ Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

Ranco

PENN

P30-5827

P145NCA-12C

9 FXD

9 FXD

Manual

Manual

120

120

None

None

External Flare

External Flare

NEMA 1

NEMA 1

Lube Oil Pressure Controls without Time Delay

Product

Range

Differential

Cut-In

Switch

Capillary

Connection

Notes

Ranco

PENN

3311-101

P74AA-1C

14 FXD

8/70 ADJ

5 FXD

8/30 ADJ

9 FXD

ADJ

SPDT

Open Hi

36″

36″

1/4″ Internal Flares

1/4″ Internal Flares

(12)

Ranco

PENN

3311-103

P74EA-8C

4/6 ADJ

2/26 ADJ

5/6

3.5 FXD

9/12

N/A

SPDT

SPDT

24″

36″

W/1/4″ Sweats

1/4″ Internal Flares

(4)

Ranco

PENN

3311-111

P74EA-8C

4/6 FXD

2/26 ADJ

5/6

3.5 FXD

9/12

N/A

SPDT

SPDT

84″

36″

1/4″ Internal Flares

1/4″ Internal Flares

Ranco

PENN

3311-115

P74BA-1C

6 FXD

8/70 ADJ

5 FXD

7/30 ADJ

11 FXD

ADJ

Open LO

Open LO

24″

36″

1/4″ Internal Flares

1/4″ Internal Flares

Ranco

PENN

3311-118

P74BA-1C

40 FXD

8/70 ADJ

5 FXD

7/30 ADJ

45 FXD

ADJ

Open LO

Open LO

25″ & 24″

36″

W/1/4″ Sweats

1/4″ Internal Flares

(4)

Ranco

PENN

3311-201

P74AB-1C

7 FXD

8/70 ADJ

Manual

Manual

Manual

Manual

SPDT

Open Hi

49″ & 72″

None

W/1/4″ Sweats

1/4″ Internal NPT

(4)(12)

Ranco

PENN

3315-101

P74AA-1C

14 FXD

8/70 ADJ

5 FXD

8/30 ADJ

9 FXD

ADJ

SPDT

Open Hi

36″

36″

1/4″ Internal Flares

1/4″ Internal Flares

(12)

Ranco

PENN

3315-801

P74BA-1C

11/14 ADJ

8/70 ADJ

5 FXD

7/30 ADJ

16/19

ADJ

SPDT

Open LO

None

36″

External Flares

1/4″ Internal Flares

(4)(12)

Cross-Reference

Transformers

Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference (Continued)

Product	#	VA	Prim. Volt.	Prim. Lead	Sec. Volt.	Sec. Lead	Mounting	Notes
Ranco	620-205	20	120	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Foot
PENN	Y65A13-0	40	120	8″ Leads	24	30″ Leads	Foot w/ Hubs
Ranco	620-206	20	208/240	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Foot
PENN	Y65T31-0	40	120/208/240	8″ Leads	24	3 Terminals	Universal	(8)
Ranco	620-403	40	120	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Universal
PENN	Y65T31-0	40	120/208/240	8″ Leads	24	3 Terminals	Universal	(8)
Ranco	620-404	40	208/240	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Universal
PENN	Y65T31-0	40	120/208/240	8″ Leads	24	3 Terminals	Universal	(8)
Ranco	620-405	40	120	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Foot
PENN	Y65A13-0	40	120	8″ Leads	24	30″ Leads	Foot w/ Hubs
Ranco	620-406	40	208/240	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Foot
PENN	Y65T31-0	40	120/208/240	8″ Leads	24	3 Terminals	Universal	(8)
Ranco	620-482	40	120/208/240	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Foot
PENN	Y65A13-0	40	120	8″ Leads	24	30″ Leads	Foot w/ Hubs	(13)
PENN	Y65T31-0	40	120/208/240	8″ Leads	24	3 Terminals	Universal
Ranco	620-502	50	120/208/240	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Universal
PENN	Y63T22-0	50	120/208/240	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Universal	(13)
Ranco	620-752	75	120/208/240	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Foot
PENN	Y66T12-0	75	120/208/240	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Foot	(13)
Ranco	620-758	75	480	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Foot
PENN	Y66F12-0	75	277/480	8″ Leads	24	8″ Leads	Foot

Notes:

Can use A419ABC-1, -30/212F range, 1/30F differential, SPDT, 78” lead, 0.25 x 2 PTC sensor, NEMA 1.
Convertible
Add Ecosafe hose.
Different pressure element.
Not as compact.
Differential depends on setting.
Not an encapsulated switch as Ranco’s is.
Different electrical connection.
Dual control, ignore lo side.
Range is Defrost Termination for both.
Choose correct one below based on timing required and pressure connection:

P28AA-1	8/70	90 Secs.	36″	W/ Flare
P28AA-2	8/70	60 Secs.	36″	W/ Flare
P28AA-17	8/70	120 Secs.	36″	W/ Flare
P28AA-18	8/70	45 Secs.	36″	W/ Flare
P128AA-1	8/70	90 Secs.	None	External Flare
P128AA-2	8/70	60 Secs.	None	External Flare
P128AA-17	8/70	120 Secs.	None	External Flare
(12) Different switch.

Choose which transformer based on primary voltage desired.
May be extended up to 800 feet.

Cross-Reference Code No. LIT-1900211

ALCO® Cross Reference

Temperature Controls

Product	#	Range	Differential	Switch	Capillary	Bulb	Cover	Notes
ALCO	TF115-S2 AE00	-20/60F	3/30F ADJ	SPDT	NONE	COILED	NEMA 1
ALCO	TSI-X2E 30/40	-20/60F	3/30F ADJ	SPDT	NONE	COILED	NEMA 1
PENN	A19BBC-2C	-30/100F	3/12F ADJ	SPDT	None	Coiled	NEMA 1	(1)
PENN	A19BBC-6C	-30/100F	3/12F ADJ	SPDT	None	Coiled	NEMA 1	(1)(2)
ALCO	TF115-S3 AE00	15/95F	3/30F ADJ	SPDT	NONE	COILED	NEMA 1
ALCO	TSI-X3E 64/48	15/95F	3/30F ADJ	SPDT	NONE	COILED	NEMA 1
PENN	A19BBC-2C	-30/100F	3/12F ADJ	SPDT	None	Coiled	NEMA 1	(1)
PENN	A19BBC-6C	-30/100F	3/12F ADJ	SPDT	None	Coiled	NEMA 1	(1)(2)
ALCO	TF115-S4 AF10	-20/95F	5/35F ADJ	SPDT	120″	3/8×2-3/4	NEMA 1
ALCO	TSI-X4F 32/41	-20/95F	5/35F ADJ	SPDT	120″	3/8×2-3/4	NEMA 1
PENN	A19ABC-24C	-30/100F	3/12F ADJ	SPDT	96″	3/8×4	NEMA 1	(1)
PENN	A19ABC-36C	-30/100F	3/12F ADJ	SPDT	240″	3/8×4	NEMA 1	(1)

Notes:

1. Can use A419ABC-1, -30/212F range, 1/30F differential, SPDT, 78” lead, 0.25 x 2 PTC sensor, NEMA 1.
2. Knob assembly/concealed adjustment packed separately.

Pressure Controls

Product	#	Range	Differential	Switch	Capillary	Connection	Cover	Notes
ALCO	FF115-S1 BAK	24″/42	3/30 ADJ	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	PS1-X1K 7/15	24″/42	3/30 ADJ	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70AB-12C	12″/80	5/35 ADJ	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	FF115-S3 BAK	15″/100	7/70 ADJ	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	PS1-X3K 50/65	15″/100	7/70 ADJ	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70AB-2C	20″/100	7/50 ADJ	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	FF115-S3 BAA	15″/100	7/70 ADJ	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	PS1-X3A 50/65	15″/100	7/70 ADJ	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P170AB-2C	20″/100	7/50 ADJ	Open LO	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	FF115-S4 BAK	15/290	15/145 ADJ	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	PS1-X4K 115/145	15/290	15/145 ADJ	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70AA-2C	0/150	12/40 ADJ	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70AA-3C	100/300	25/75 ADJ	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	FF115-S5 BAK	90/450	30/220	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	PS1-X5K 230/290	90/450	30/220	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70AA-118C	100/400	35/200	Open LO	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70CA-3C	50/450	60/150	Open HI	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	FF115-S5 BAA	90/450	30/220	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	PS1-X5A 140/280	90/450	30/220	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P170AA-118C	100/400	35/200	Open LO	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P170CA-3C	50/450	60/150	Open HI	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	FF115-S5 BRK	90/450	Manual	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	PS1-Y5K 230/290	90/450	Manual	SPDT	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70DA-1C	50/450	Manual	Open HI	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P70KA-1C	50/450	Manual	M-Block	36″	w/ Flare	NEMA 1	(3)
ALCO	FF115-S5 BRA	90/450	Manual	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
ALCO	PS1-Y5A 330/390	90/450	Manual	SPDT	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P170DA-1C	50/450	Manual	Open HI	None	External Flare	NEMA 1

Notes:

1. Main opens HI, auxilliary opens LO (primarily used for alarm circuit).

Cross-Reference

ALCO® Cross Reference (Continued)

Dual Pressure Controls

Product	#	LO Side	Differential	HI Side	Differential	Capillary	Connection Notes
ALCO	FF215-S9 BAUK	24″/42	3/30	90/450	60 FXD	48″	W/ Flare
ALCO	PS2-Y9K	24″/42	3/30	90/450	60 FXD	48″	W/ Flare
PENN	P70SA-1C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
ALCO	FF215-S7 BAUK	15″/100	7/70	90/450	60 FXD	48″	W/ Flare
ALCO	PS2-Y7K	15″/100	7/70	90/450	60 FXD	48″	W/ Flare
PENN	P70SA-1C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	36″	W/ Flare
ALCO	FF215-S7 BAUA	15″/100	7/70	90/450	60 FXD	None	External Flare
ALCO	PS2-Y7A	15″/100	7/70	90/450	60 FXD	None	External Flare
PENN	P170SA-1C	12″/80	5/35	100/500	60 FXD	None	External Flare

Lube Oil Pressure Controls

Product	#	Range	Reset	Delay	Capillary	Connection	Cover	Notes
ALCO	FD113-ZUK	4/65 ADJ	Manual	20-150 secs.	36″	W/ Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P28AA-C**	8/70 ADJ	Manual	Note (4)	36″	W/ Flare	NEMA 1	(4)
PENN	P45NCA-12C	9.0 FXD	Manual	120 secs.	36″	W/ Flare	NEMA 1	(5)
PENN	P45NCA-82C	6.5 FXD	Manual	45 secs.	36″	W/ Flare	NEMA 1	(5)
ALCO	FD113-ZU	4/65 ADJ	Manual	20-150 secs.	None	External Flare	NEMA 1
PENN	P128AA-C**	8/70 ADJ	Manual	Note (4)	None	External Flare	NEMA 1	(4)
PENN	P145NCA-12C	9.0 FXD	Manual	120 secs.	None	External Flare	NEMA 1	(5)
PENN	P145NCA-82C	6.5 FXD	Manual	45 secs.	None	External Flare	NEMA 1	(5)

Notes:

1. Choose correct control below based on timing required and desired pressure connection:

P28AA-1	8/70#	90 Secs.	36″	W/ Flare
P28AA-2	8/70#	60 Secs.	36″	W/ Flare
P28AA-17	8/70#	120 Secs.	36″	W/ Flare
P28AA-18	8/70#	45 Secs.	36″	W/ Flare
P128AA-1	8/70#	90 Secs.	None	External Flare
P128AA-2	8/70#	60 Secs.	None	External Flare
P128AA-17	8/70#	120 Secs.	None	External Flare

1. Verify timing specifications.

NOTES

Johnson Controls offers a broad line of innovative, high performing and energy-saving HVAC and refrigeration controls

REFRIGERATION CONTROLS

VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES

VALVES

ACTUATORS

SENSORS & THERMOSTATS

HVAC CONTROL PANEL PRODUCTS

DAMPERS, LOUVERS & AIR MEASURING PRODUCTS

PNEUMATICS

We are in the business of building efficiency. We create buildings

and environments that help people achieve and enterprises succeed. We do that by delivering energy savings. Operational savings. And sustainable solutions. In fact,

PENN commercial refrigeration controls by Johnson Controls have been serving the cooling needs of millions of customers worldwide for more than 95 years.

For more information, or to purchase Johnson Controls products, call 1-800-275-5676 or 1-800-482-2778.

Johnson Controls, the Johnson Controls logo and the PENN by Johnson Controls logo are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc. in the United States of America and other countries. Other trademarks used herein may be trademarks or registered trademarks of other companies.

V43AT-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46AE-1C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-151
V43AV-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147	V46AE-4C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43AV-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147	V46AJ-2C .	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-151
V43AV-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147	V46AL-2C .	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-151
V43AW-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46AM-2 .	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-151
V43AW-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147	V46AR-10C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-151
V43AW-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46AR-1C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-151
V43BS-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46AR-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BS-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46AS-1C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-151
V43BS-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147	V46AS-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-151
V43BS-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147	V46AS-3C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BS-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147	V46AT-1C .	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-151
V43BT-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46AT-2C .	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-151
V43BT-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46AT-3C .	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BT-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147	V46BA-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BT-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147	V46BB-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BT-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147	V46BC-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BV-10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147	V46BD-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BV-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46BE-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BV-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46BR-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BV-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147	V46BS-3C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BV-5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46BS-4C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BV-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46BT-3C .	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BV-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-145, R-147	V46BT-4C .	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BV-8C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46CJ-2C .	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BV-9C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46CN-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BW-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147	V46CP-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BW-6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46CQ-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43BW-7C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147	V46CR-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43CS-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147	V46CS-3C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43CS-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147	V46CS-4C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43CS-3C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46CT-3C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43CT-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-147	V46CT-4C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43CT-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147	V46DA-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-152
V43CV-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147	V46EK-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-151
V43CV-2C . . . . . . . . . . . . R-146, R-147, R-148	V46NA-1C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-154
V46AA-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151	V46NA-4C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-154
V46AA-50C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151	V46NB-1C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-154
V46AB-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151	V46NB-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-154
V46AB-25C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151	V46NC-1C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-154
V46AC-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151	V46NC-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-154
V46AC-26C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151	V46ND-1C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-154
V46AC-8C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152	V46ND-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-154
V46AD-13C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151	V46NE-1C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-154
V46AD-1C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151	V46NE-2C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-154
V46AD-4C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-152	V47AA-1C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-157
V46AE-17C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-151	V47AA-26C	. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	R-157

For the latest product updates, visit us online at johnsoncontrols.com,

A19 Series High Range Temperature Control

A19 Series Thermostat for Crop Drying

A19 Temperature Control Less Enclosure (SPDT, Close Differential)

A19 Series Coiled Bulb Space Thermostat

A19 Series Automatic Changeover with Strap-On Mounting

A19D Series Surface Mounted Temperature Controls

A25 Series Warm Air Limit Control with Manual Reset

A70 Series Four-Wire, Two-Circuit Temperature Control

A72 Series Cooling Tower or Evaporative Condenser Controls (Single-Stage Temperature Control with Outdoor Enclosure)

A421 Series Electronic Temperature Controls

MR4PMUHV Electronic Temperature/Defrost Control with Relay Pack

A28 Series Two-Stage Temperature Control

A28 Series Two-Stage Flange Mounted Duct Thermostat

A28 Two-Stage Industrial Thermostat (Watertight and Dusttight)

A36 Series Four-Stage Remote Bulb Thermostats

S26 Series Switching Subbase

T22/T25/T26 Series Line Voltage Wall Thermostat (Heating, Cooling, or Heating and Cooling)

Typical Wiring Diagram and Electrical Ratings for Line Voltage Thermostats

T23 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with Fan and System Selectors)

T28 Series Fan Coil Thermostat (with or without Fan Selector Switches)

Bulb Wells

T22, T25, T26, T28, T46, and T91 Accessories

T91 Series Room Temperature Sensor

P10 Series Low Pressure Control

P20 Series Air Conditioning/Pressure Cutout Control

P29 Series Low Pressure Control with Time Delay

P47 Series Steam Pressure Limit Control

P67 Series Low Pressure Control

P70, P72 Approximate Low Pressure Settings for Typical Applications

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Low Pressure Applications

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for High Pressure Applications

P70, P72, and P170 Series Controls for Dual Pressure Applications

P470 Electronic Pressure Control with Display

P28 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay

P32 Series Sensitive Pressure Switch

P45 Series Lube Oil Pressure Cutout Control with Time Delay

P74 Series Differential Pressure Control

P128 and P145 Series Lube Oil Pressure Controls

P12 Series Differential Pressure Controls

P545 Series Electronic Lube Oil Control

CST29A Adaptor Block for Carlyle® Compressors

Replacement Timing Relays for P28 and P29 Lube Oil Controls

P100 Series Encapsulated Pressure Switches

P499 Series Electronic Pressure Transducers

R310A Series Current Sensing Switch

Universal Mounting Brackets

SEC99A UltraCap Armored Capillary

RLD-H10PRO Refrigerant Leak Detector

RLD Refrigerant Leak Detector Accessories and Replacement Parts

F59 Series Sump Pump Switch

F261 Series Fluid Flow Switches

F262 Airflow Switch

F263 Series Liquid Level Float Switches

F61 and F62 Series Replacement Paddles

F92 Series Air Volume Controls for Shallow Wells

F93 Series Air Volume Controls for Deep Wells

P266 Series Single-Phase Condenser Fan Speed Control

P66/S66 Series Controls to P266 Series Controls Replacement Guide

VFD68 Variable Frequency Drives

V43/V243 Series Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves

V46 Series Pressure Actuated Water Regulating Valve

V46N Series Reverse Acting Valve

V46 Series Valve Sizing Information—90% Open Method

V47 Series Temperature Actuated Modulating Valve

V47N Series Reverse Acting Valve

V48 Series Three-Way Water Regulating Valve

V146 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves

P = P +10 psi (0.7 bar)

V246 Series Two-Way Pressure-Actuated Water-Regulating Valves for High-Pressure Refrigerants

Flow =

STT Water Valve Renewal Kit for V46, V47, and V48 Series Valves

Companion Flanges and Gaskets for V43, V46, and V47 Series Valves

Ranco® Refrigeration Cross-Reference

ALCO® Cross Reference

Leave a Reply Cancel reply